Yamaha YSP-500 de handleiding

Merk: Yamaha

Model: YSP-500

Categorie: Projectoren

Type: de handleiding

YAMAHA ELECTRONICS CORPORATION, USA

6660 ORANGETHORPE AVE., BUENA PARK, CALIF. 90620, U.S.A.

YAMAHA CANADA MUSIC LTD.

135 MILNER AVE., SCARBOROUGH, ONTARIO M1S 3R1, CANADA

YAMAHA ELECTRONIK EUROPA G.m.b.H.

SIEMENSSTR. 22-34, 25462 RELLINGEN BEI HAMBURG, GERMANY

YAMAHA ELECTRONIQUE FRANCE S.A.

RUE AMBROISE CROIZAT BP70 CROISSY-BEAUBOURG 77312 MARNE-LA-VALLEE CEDEX02, FRANCE

YAMAHA ELECTRONICS (UK) LTD.

YAMAHA HOUSE, 200 RICKMANSWORTH ROAD WATFORD, HERTS WD18 7GQ, ENGLAND

YAMAHA SCANDINAVIA A.B.

J A WETTERGRENS GATA 1, BOX 30053, 400 43 VÄSTRA FRÖLUNDA, SWEDEN

YAMAHA MUSIC AUSTRALIA PTY, LTD.

17-33 MARKET ST., SOUTH MELBOURNE, 3205 VIC., AUSTRALIA

Printed in Malaysia WM28790

YSP-500

Digital Sound Projector

Système Acoustique Numérique

OWNER’S MANUAL

MODE D’EMPLOI

BEDIENUNGSANLEITUNG

BRUKSANVISNING

GEBRUIKSAANWIJZING

ИНСТРУКЦИЯ ПО ЭКСПЛУАТАЦИИ

YSP-500_G-cv.fm Page 1 Thursday, September 20, 2007 8:49 AM

CAUTION: READ THIS BEFORE OPERATING THIS UNIT.

i En

To assure the finest performance, please read this manual

carefully. Keep it in a safe place for future reference.

2 Install this sound system in a well ventilated, cool, dry, clean

place with at least 5 cm (2 in) of space above (or below) this unit

– away from direct sunlight, heat sources, vibration, dust,

moisture, and/or cold.

3 Locate this unit away from other electrical appliances, motors, or

transformers to avoid humming sounds.

4 Do not expose this unit to sudden temperature changes from cold

to hot, and do not locate this unit in an environment with high

humidity (i.e. a room with a humidifier) to prevent condensation

inside this unit, which may cause an electrical shock, fire,

damage to this unit, and/or personal injury.

5 Avoid installing this unit where foreign object may fall onto this

unit and/or this unit may be exposed to liquid dripping or

splashing. On the top of this unit, do not place:

– Other components, as they may cause damage and/or

discoloration on the surface of this unit.

– Burning objects (i.e. candles), as they may cause fire, damage

to this unit, and/or personal injury.

– Containers with liquid in them, as they may fall and liquid

may cause electrical shock to the user and/or damage to this

unit.

6 Do not cover this unit with a newspaper, tablecloth, curtain, etc.

in order not to obstruct heat radiation. If the temperature inside

this unit rises, it may cause fire, damage to this unit, and/or

personal injury.

7 Do not plug in this unit to a wall outlet until all connections are

complete.

8 Do not operate this unit upside-down. It may overheat, possibly

causing damage.

9 Do not use force on switches, knobs and/or cords.

10 When disconnecting the power supply cable from the wall outlet,

grasp the plug; do not pull the cable.

11 Do not clean this unit with chemical solvents; this might damage

the finish. Use a clean, dry cloth.

12 Only voltage specified on this unit must be used. Using this unit

with a higher voltage than specified is dangerous and may cause

fire, damage to this unit, and/or personal injury. Yamaha will not

be held responsible for any damage resulting from use of this unit

with a voltage other than specified.

13 To prevent damage by lightning, keep the power supply cable

disconnected from a wall outlet or this unit during a lightning

storm.

14 Do not attempt to modify or fix this unit. Contact qualified

Yamaha service personnel when any service is needed.

The cabinet should never be opened for any reasons.

15 When not planning to use this unit for long periods of time (i.e.

vacation), disconnect the power supply cable from the wall

outlet.

16 Be sure to read the “Troubleshooting” section on common

operating errors before concluding that this unit is faulty.

17 Before moving this unit, press STANDBY/ON to set this unit in

standby mode, and disconnect the power supply cable from the

wall outlet.

18 Condensation will form when the surrounding temperature

changes suddenly. Disconnect the power supply cable from the

outlet, then leave the unit alone.

19 When using the unit for a long time, the unit may become warm.

Turn the power off, then leave the unit alone for cooling.

20 Install this unit near the AC outlet and where the AC power plug

can be reached easily.

21 The batteries shall not be exposed to excessive heat such as

sunshine, fire or the like.

Caution: Read this before operating this unit.

WARNING

TO REDUCE THE RISK OF FIRE OR ELECTRIC SHOCK, DO

NOT EXPOSE THIS UNIT TO RAIN OR MOISTURE.

WARNING

THE POWER SUPPLY CABLE OF THIS UNIT MUST BE

CONNECTED TO THE MAIN SOCKET OUTLET VIA A

PROTECTIVE EARTHING CONNECTION.

This unit is not disconnected from the AC power source as long as

it is connected to the AC wall outlet, even if this unit itself is

turned off by STANDBY/ON. This state is called the standby

mode. In this state, this unit is designed to consume a very small

quantity of power.

FOR U.K. CUSTOMERS

If the socket outlets in the home are not suitable for the plug

supplied with this appliance, it should be cut off and an

appropriate 3 pin plug fitted. For details, refer to the instructions

described below. Note that the plug severed from the mains lead

must be destroyed, as a plug with bared flexible cord is hazardous

if engaged in a live socket outlet.

IMPORTANT

THE WIRES IN MAINS LEAD ARE COLOURED IN

ACCORDANCE WITH THE FOLLOWING CODE:

Blue: NEUTRAL

Brown: LIVE

As the colours of the wires in the mains lead of this apparatus may

not correspond with the coloured markings identifying the

terminals in your plug, proceed as follows:

The wire which is coloured BLUE must be connected to the

terminal which is marked with the letter N or coloured BLACK.

The wire which is coloured BROWN must be connected to the

terminal which is marked with the letter L or coloured RED. Make

sure that neither core is connected to the earth terminal of the three

pin plug.

CAUTION

Danger of explosion if battery is incorrectly replaced. Replace

only with the same or equivalent type.

CAUTION

Use of controls or adjustments or performance of procedures other

than those specified herein may result in hazardous radiation

exposure.

This symbol mark is according to the

EU directive 2002/96/EC.

This symbol mark means that electrical

and electronic equipment, at their end-

of-life, should be disposed of separately

from your household waste.

Please act according to your local rules

and do not dispose of your old products

with your normal household waste.

PREPARATIONINTRODUCTION

BASIC

OPERATION

ADVANCED

OPERATION

ADDITIONAL

INFORMATION

SETUP

English

1 En

Overview.................................................................. 2

Features ................................................................... 3

Using this manual ................................................... 5

Supplied accessories ............................................... 6

Controls and functions ........................................... 7

Front panel ................................................................. 7

Front panel display .................................................... 8

Rear panel .................................................................. 9

Remote control......................................................... 10

Installation............................................................. 13

Before installing this unit......................................... 13

Installing this unit .................................................... 13

Connections........................................................... 16

Before connecting components................................ 17

Connecting a TV...................................................... 18

Connecting a DVD player/recorder ......................... 19

Connecting a digital satellite tuner

or a cable TV tuner.............................................. 20

Connecting a digital airwave tuner .......................... 21

Connecting a VCR................................................... 22

Connecting other external components ................... 23

Connecting a subwoofer .......................................... 24

Connecting the AC power supply cable .................. 25

Getting started ...................................................... 26

Installing batteries in the remote control ................. 26

Operation range of the remote control..................... 26

Turning on this unit or setting it to the standby mode

............................................................................. 27

Using SET MENU................................................. 28

Displaying the OSD (on-screen display) ................. 28

The flow chart of SET MENU................................. 29

Changing OSD language...................................... 30

AUTO SETUP (IntelliBeam) ............................... 31

The flow chart of AUTO SETUP ............................ 31

Installing the IntelliBeam microphone .................... 32

Using AUTO SETUP (IntelliBeam)........................ 33

Using the system memory .................................... 38

Convenient usage of the system memory ................ 38

Saving settings......................................................... 38

Loading settings....................................................... 39

Playback ................................................................ 41

Selecting the input source........................................ 41

Playing back sources................................................ 42

Adjusting the volume............................................... 43

Enjoying surround sound .................................... 44

5 Beam..................................................................... 44

Stereo plus 3 Beam .................................................. 45

3 Beam..................................................................... 45

My Surround............................................................ 45

Enjoying 2-channel sources in surround sound....... 47

Enjoying TV in surround sound .............................. 48

Adjusting surround mode parameters...................... 49

Enjoying stereo sound...........................................50

Playing back sound clearly (My Beam)...............51

Using auto-adjust function....................................... 51

Using manual-adjust function.................................. 52

Using the volume mode

(Night listening enhancer/TV volume equal

mode) ..................................................................53

Using the sleep timer.............................................54

MANUAL SETUP.................................................56

Using MANUAL SETUP........................................ 57

BEAM MENU ......................................................... 58

SOUND MENU....................................................... 62

INPUT MENU......................................................... 64

DISPLAY MENU.................................................... 66

Adjusting the audio balance.................................67

Using the test tone ................................................... 67

Using the audio output being played back............... 68

Selecting the input mode.......................................70

Adjusting the system parameters ........................71

Using the system parameters ................................... 71

Setting the MEMORY PROTECT .......................... 72

Setting the MAX VOLUME.................................... 73

Setting the TURN ON VOLUME ........................... 73

Setting the DEMO MODE ...................................... 74

Setting the PANEL INP. KEY ................................ 75

Disabling the front panel keys ................................. 76

Setting the FACTORY PRESET............................. 77

Remote control features........................................79

Setting remote control codes ................................... 79

Controlling other components ................................. 80

Using the TV macro ................................................ 83

Troubleshooting.....................................................85

Glossary..................................................................88

Index.......................................................................90

Specifications .........................................................91

List of remote control codes...........................................i

Contents

INTRODUCTION

PREPARATION

SETUP

BASIC OPERATION

ADVANCED OPERATION

ADDITIONAL INFORMATION

Overview

2 En

It is generally accepted that in order to fully enjoy the benefits of surround sound at home, you must endure the agony of

wiring and installing a great number of speakers in the hope that your listening room will give you the same kind of

surround sound experience as your local movie theater.

Yamaha YSP-500 Digital Sound Projector challenges this preconception that complicated speaker setup and troublesome

wiring go hand-in-hand with the enjoyment of multi-channel surround sound.

This slimline unit does away with the need for complicated wiring and installation worries, leaving you with a unit that is

not only easy to set up, but is also capable of reproducing the kind of powerful surround sound you have been waiting for

from its built-in 2 woofers and 16 full-range small speakers.

You can fine-tune the parameters of this unit to adjust the delay time for separate sound beams, resulting in highly

directional sound that comes in on the listening position from all directions.

The YSP-500 projects sound beams containing surround sound information for the front right (R), front left (L), surround

right (SR), and surround left (SL) speaker positions, which are reflected off the walls of your listening room before

reaching the actual listening position. With the addition of center (C) sound beams, this Digital Sound Projector creates

true-to-life 5.1-channel surround sound that makes you feel as if there are actual speakers around the room.

Sit back and enjoy the real sound experience of this simple, yet stylish Digital Sound Projector.

Overview

Listening position

Imaginary

surround left

speaker

Imaginary

surround right

speaker

Imaginary

front left

speaker

Imaginary

front right

speaker

Imaginary

center

speaker

Features

3 En

INTRODUCTION

English

Digital Sound Projector™

The Digital Sound Projector technology allows one slim

unit to control and steer multiple channels of sound to

generate multi-channel surround sound, thus eliminates

the need for satellite loudspeakers and cabling normally

associated with conventional surround sound systems.

This unit also employs the beam modes that let you enjoy

the surround sound (5 Beam, Stereo plus 3 Beam, 3 Beam,

and My Surround), stereo playback, and My Beam.

My Surround

In addition to the above mentioned beam modes, this unit

is equipped with My Surround beam mode that allows you

to enjoy surround system even in a small listening area.

My Beam

This unit employs My Beam that ensures a clear sound in

a noisy environment. You can adjust the beam angle

manually or automatically using the supplied remote

control to the maximum of 30°, rightward and leftward.

Versatile Remote Control

The supplied remote control comes with preset remote

control codes used to control the DVD player, VCR, cable

TV tuner, and digital satellite tuner connected to this unit.

In addition, the remote control is equipped with the macro

capability that enables a series of operations with the press

of a single button.

AUTO SETUP (IntelliBeam)

This unit employs the automatic sound beam and acoustic

optimization technology with the aid of the supplied

IntelliBeam microphone. You can avoid troublesome

listening-based speaker setup and achieve highly accurate

sound beam adjustments that best match your listening

environment.

Compatibility with the Newest Technologies

This unit employs decoders compatible with Dolby

Digital, DTS, Dolby Pro Logic, Dolby Pro Logic II, and

DTS Neo:6.

◆ Dolby Digital

This is the standard audio signal format used on various

digital media such as DVD, Blu-ray, and HD DVD. This

surround technology delivers high-quality digital audio for up

to 5.1 discrete channels to produce a directional and more

realistic effect.

◆ DTS

This is the standard audio signal format used on various

digital media such as DVD, Blu-ray, and HD DVD. This

surround technology delivers high-quality digital audio for up

to 5.1 discrete channels to produce a directional and more

realistic effect.

◆ Dolby Pro Logic

This sophisticated, matrix decoding technology up-converts

any 2-channel source audio to a 5.1-channel full bandwidth

playback, resulting in a surround sound experience.

◆ Dolby Pro Logic II

This is a redesigned version of Dolby Pro Logic that employs

2 stereo surround channels, a subwoofer, and a greatly

enhanced steering logic. This improved technology provides

an exceptionally stable sound field that simulates 5.1 to a

much greater degree than the original Dolby Pro Logic.

◆ DTS Neo:6

This technology decodes the conventional 2-channel sources

for 6-channel playback, enabling playback with the full-range

channels with higher separation. Music mode and Cinema

mode are available to play back music and movie sources

respectively.

Features

4 En

The “ ” logo and “IntelliBeam” are trademarks of

YAMAHA Corporation.

Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories.

“Dolby”, “Pro Logic”, and the double-D symbol are trademarks

of Dolby Laboratories.

“DTS” and “Neo:6” are registered trademarks of DTS, Inc.

Manufactured under license from 1 Ltd. Worldwide patents

applied for.

The “ ” logo and “Digital Sound Projector

™

” are trademarks

of 1 Ltd.

TruBass, SRS and the “ ” symbol are registered trademarks

of SRS Labs, Inc. TruBass technology is incorporated under

license from SRS Labs, Inc.

™

is a trademark of DiMAGIC Co., Ltd.

Using this manual

5 En

INTRODUCTION

English

• This manual describes how to connect and operate this unit. For details regarding the operation of external components, refer to the

supplied owner’s manual for each component.

• Operations in this manual use keys on the supplied remote control of this unit unless otherwise specified.

• y indicates a tip for your operation.

• This manual is printed prior to production. Designs and specifications are subject to change in part as a result of improvements, etc. In

case of differences between the manual and the product, the product has priority.

1 Install this unit in your listening room.

See “Installation” on page 13.

2 Connect this unit to your TV and other external components.

See “Connections” on page 16.

3 Prepare the remote control and turn on the power of this unit.

See “Getting started” on page 26.

4 Run AUTO SETUP.

See “AUTO SETUP (IntelliBeam)” on page 31.

5 Play back a source.

See “Playback” on page 41.

6 Change the beam modes.

See “Enjoying surround sound” on page 44.

7 Run MANUAL SETUP to fine-tune settings and/or set remote control codes.

See “MANUAL SETUP” on page 56 and “Remote control features” on page 79.

Using this manual

Notes

If you want to make additional settings

and adjustments

Supplied accessories

6 En

Check that you have received all of the following parts.

Supplied accessories

STEREO MY SUR.

MY BEAM

SLEEP

INPUTMODE

CH LEVEL MENU

RETURNTEST

TV VOL

VOLUME

MUTE

TV INPUT TV MUTE

ENTER

SUR. DECODE

CODE SET

5BEAM ST+3BEAM 3BEAM

VOL MODE

AUTO

SETUP

MACRO

INPUT2INPUT1

YSP

TV/AV

321

VCR DVD

STB AUX

POWERPOWERSTANDBY/ON

+10

Remote control (×1)

Batteries (×2)

(AA, R6, UM-3)

OSD* video pin cable (×1)

IntelliBeam microphone

(×1)

Audio pin cable (×1)

Digital audio pin cable (×1)

Optical cable (×1)Cable clamp (×1)

Cardboard microphone

stand (×1)

(Orange)

(White/Red)

(Yellow)

Indoor FM antenna (×1)

Demonstration DVD

(×1)

QUICK REFERENCE

GUIDE

* The number of provided languages

varies depending on the model.

*OSD: On-Screen Display

Controls and functions

7 En

INTRODUCTION

English

1 INTELLIBEAM MIC jack

Connect the supplied IntelliBeam microphone for AUTO

SETUP (see page 32).

2 Front panel display

Shows information about the operational status of this

unit.

3 Remote control sensor

Receives infrared signals from the remote control.

4 INPUT

Press repeatedly to switch between input sources (see

page 41).

Outputs a test tone to experience the sound beam (see

page 74).

5 VOLUME +/–

Controls the volume level of all audio channels (see

page 43).

6 STANDBY/ON

Turns on the power of this unit or sets it to the standby

mode (see page 27).

• When you turn on this unit, you will hear a click sound

followed by the 4 to 5-second interval before sound

reproducing.

• In the standby mode, this unit consumes a small amount of

power in order to receive infrared signals from the remote

control.

Controls and functions

Front panel

INTELLIBEAM MIC INPUT VOLUME STANDBY/ON

142653

Notes

Controls and functions

8 En

1 SRS TruBass indicator

Lights up when TruBass is turned on (see page 63).

2 EQUAL indicator

Lights up when the TV volume equal mode is selected

(see page 53).

3 NIGHT indicator

Lights up when one of the night listening enhancers is

selected (see page 53).

4 SLEEP indicator

Lights up when the sleep timer is set (see page 54).

5 Decoder indicators

Light up when the corresponding decoder operates

(see page 46).

6 PCM indicator

Lights up when this unit is reproducing PCM (Pulse Code

Modulation) digital audio signals.

7 MULTI indicator

Lights up when this unit detects a multi channel digital

audio signal.

8 Volume level indicator

Displays the current volume level.

9 Multi-information display

Shows information with alphanumeric characters when

you adjust the parameters of this unit.

You can adjust the brightness and display setting of the front

panel display using the F.DISPLAY SET parameter in MANUAL

SETUP (see page 66).

Front panel display

1 2 3 4

6 7

Controls and functions

9 En

INTRODUCTION

English

1 VCR AUDIO INPUT jacks

Connect your VCR via an analog connection (see

page 19).

2 TV/STB AUDIO INPUT jacks

Connect your TV, digital satellite tuner, or cable TV tuner

via an analog connection (see pages 18 and 20).

3 SUBWOOFER OUT jack

Connect your subwoofer (see page 24).

4 VIDEO OUT jack

Connect to the video input jack of your TV to display the

OSD of this unit (see page 18).

5 TV/STB OPTICAL DIGITAL INPUT jack

Connect your TV, digital satellite tuner, or cable TV tuner

via an optical digital connection (see pages 18 and 20).

6 AUX OPTICAL DIGITAL INPUT jack

Connect an external component via an optical digital

connection (see page 23).

7 DVD COAXIAL DIGITAL INPUT jack

Connect your DVD player via a coaxial digital connection

(see page 19).

8 SYSTEM CONNECTOR jack

Use to connect a Yamaha subwoofer equipped with a

SYSTEM CONNECTOR jack to this unit (see page 24).

9 AC power supply cable

Connect to the AC wall outlet (see page 25).

Rear panel

VCR TV/STB VIDEO TV/STB AUX

OPTICAL COAXIAL

DIGITAL INPUTOUTAUDIO INPUT

DVD SYSTEM

CONNECTOR

SUBWOOFER

12 34 56 7 8

VCR TV/STB VIDEO TV/STB AUX

OPTICAL COAXIAL

DIGITAL INPUTOUTAUDIO INPUT

DVD SYSTEM

CONNECTOR

SUBWOOFER

Controls and functions

10 En

This section describes the functions of the remote control

used to control this unit. Some buttons marked with an

asterisk (*) share the common functions between the YSP

and TV/AV operation modes (N).

You can also control other components using the remote control

once you set the appropriate remote control codes. See

“Controlling other components” on page 80 for details.

1 Infrared window

Outputs infrared control signals. Aim this window at the

component you want to operate.

2 STANDBY/ON

Turns on the power of this unit or sets it to the standby

mode (see page 27).

3 Transmission indicator

Lights up when infrared control signals are being output.

4 Input selector buttons

Use to select an input source (STB, VCR, DVD, AUX, or

TV).

5 VOL MODE

Turns on or off the volume modes (see page 53).

6 AUTO SETUP

Enters the AUTO SETUP menu (see page 31).

7 CH LEVEL

Adjusts the volume level of each channel (see page 68).

8 Cursor buttons / / / , ENTER

Select and adjust SET MENU items.

9 TEST

Outputs a test tone when adjusting the output level of each

channel (see page 67).

0 VOLUME +/–

Increases or decreases the volume level of this unit (see

page 43).

A MUTE

Mutes the sound. Press again to restore the audio output to

the previous volume level (see page 43).

B TV INPUT

Toggles between the input sources on the TV (see

page 80).

C DVD player/VCR control buttons

Control your DVD player or VCR (see pages 81 and 82).

D My Beam microphone

Collects the test tones from this unit when using the My

Beam auto-adjust function (see page 51).

E TV POWER

Turns on the power of your TV or sets it to the standby

mode (see page 80).

F AV POWER

Turns on the power of the selected component or sets it to

the standby mode (see pages 81 and 82).

G INPUT1/INPUT2

Switches the input source on your TV (see page 80).

Remote control

321

+10

STEREO

MY BEAM

SLEEP

INPUTMODE

CH LEVEL MENU

RETURNTEST

TV VOL

VOLUME

MUTE

TV INPUT TV MUTE

CODE SET

5BEAM ST+3BEAM 3BEAM

VOL MODE

AUTO

SETUP

MACRO

INPUT2INPUT1

YSP

TV/AV

STB

VCR DVD AUX

TVAV

POWERPOWERSTANDBY/ON

ENTER

SUR. DECODE

MY SUR.

Controls and functions

11 En

INTRODUCTION

English

H MACRO

Use to set the TV macro (see page 83).

I SLEEP

Sets the sleep timer (see page 54).

J INPUTMODE

Toggles between input modes (AUTO, DTS, and

ANALOG) (see page 70).

K Beam mode buttons

Change the beam mode settings (see pages 44, 50, and

51).

L SUR. DECODE

Selects the surround mode for playback (see page 47).

M MENU

Displays the setup menu on your TV monitor (see

pages 33 and 57).

N Operation mode selector

Selects the operation mode of this unit. Select YSP when

operating this unit and select TV/AV when operating your

TV or other AV components.

O RETURN

Returns to the previous SET MENU screen.

P TV VOL +/–

Adjusts the volume level of your TV (see page 80).

Q CH +/–

Changes the channels of your TV, digital satellite tuner,

cable TV tuner, or VCR (see pages 80 and 82).

R TV MUTE, CODE SET

Mutes the audio output of your TV (see page 80).

Sets up remote control codes (see page 79).

Controls and functions

12 En

This section describes the functions of the remote control

used to control other components when the TV/AV mode

is selected with the operation mode selector (4).

1 Numeric buttons

Enter numbers.

2 Cursor buttons / / / , ENTER

Use to select DVD menu items.

3 MENU

Displays the DVD menu.

4 Operation mode selector

Selects the operation mode of this unit. Select YSP when

operating this unit and select TV/AV when operating your

TV or other AV components.

5 RETURN

Use to return to the previous DVD menu screen or exit

from the DVD menu.

321

+10

STEREO

MY BEAM

SLEEP

INPUTMODE

CH LEVEL MENU

RETURNTEST

TV VOL

VOLUME

MUTE

TV INPUT TV MUTE

CODE SET

5BEAM ST+3BEAM 3BEAM

VOL MODE

AUTO

SETUP

MACRO

INPUT2INPUT1

YSP

TV/AV

STB

VCR DVD AUX

TVAV

POWERPOWERSTANDBY/ON

ENTER

SUR. DECODE

MY SUR.

Installation

13 En

PREPARATION

English

This section describes a suitable installation location to install this unit using a rack.

Depending on your installation environment, connections with external components can be done before installing this

unit. We recommend that you temporarily place and arrange all components, including this unit, in order to decide which

procedure should come first.

This unit creates surround sound by reflecting projected

sound beams off the walls of your listening room. The

surround sound effects produced by this unit may not be

sufficient when this unit is installed in the following

locations.

• Rooms with walls inadequate for reflecting sound

beams

• Rooms with acoustically absorbent walls

• Rooms with measurements outside the following

range: W (3 to 7 m (10 to 23 ft)) x H (2 to 3.5 m (7 to

11.5 ft)) x D (3 to 7 m (10 to 23 ft))

• Rooms with less than 1.8 m (6 ft) from the listening

position to this unit

• Rooms where objects such as furniture are likely to

obstruct the path of sound beams

• Rooms where the listening position is close to the walls

• Rooms where the listening position is not in front of

this unit

• You can enjoy surround sound by selecting My Surround (see

page 45) as the beam mode even if your listening room may not

fulfill the above conditions (except when the listening position

is not directly facing toward the front of this unit).

• You can also enjoy surround sound by selecting stereo playback

(see page 50) or My Beam (see page 51) as the beam mode even

if your listening room may not fulfill the above conditions.

Make sure you leave an adequate amount of ventilation

space so that heat can escape. Make at least 5 cm (2 in) of

space above this unit.

• We do not recommend putting this unit directly on the floor of

your listening room. Please install this unit using a rack.

• This unit weights 8.5 kg (18 lbs 12 oz). Be sure to install this

unit where it will not fall subject to vibrations, such as from an

earthquake, and where it is out of the reach of children.

• When using a cathode-ray tube (CRT) TV, do not install this

unit directly above your TV.

• This unit is shielded against magnetic rays. However, if the

picture on your TV screen becomes blurred or distorted, we

recommend moving this unit away from your TV.

Install this unit where there are no obstacles such as

furniture obstructing the path of sound beams. Otherwise,

the desired surround sound effects may not be achieved.

You may install this unit in parallel with the wall or in the

corner.

Parallel installation

Install this unit in the exact center of the wall when it is

measured from the left and right corners.

Corner installation

Install this unit in the corner at a 40º to 50º angle from the

adjacent walls.

Installation

Before installing this unit

Notes

Installing this unit

An object, such as furniture

40° to 50°

An object, such as furniture

14 En

Installation

■ Installation examples

Example 1

Install this unit as close to the exact center of the wall as possible.

Example 2

Install this unit so that the sound beams can be reflected off the walls.

Example 3

Install this unit as close to the exact front of your normal listening position as possible.

15 En

Installation

PREPARATION

English

■ Using a rack

Install this unit under your TV in a commercially available

rack.

Make sure that the rack is large enough to allow adequate

ventilation space around this unit (see page 13) and that it is

strong enough to support the weight of both this unit and your TV.

Note

This unit

Connections

16 En

This unit is equipped with the following types of audio/video input/output jacks/terminal:

For audio input

• 2 optical digital input jacks

• 1 coaxial digital input jacks

• 2 sets of analog input jacks

For audio output

• 1 subwoofer output jack

For video output

• 1 analog output jack

Use these jacks/terminal to connect external components such as your TV, DVD player, VCR, digital satellite tuner, cable

TV tuner, digital air wave tuner, and game console. Further, by connecting a subwoofer to this unit, you can enjoy

reinforced low-bass sounds. For details on how to connect various types of external components to this unit, see pages 18

to 24.

• Do not connect this unit or other components to the mains power until all connections between components are

complete.

• Unplug the AC power supply cable before changing connections, moving or cleaning this unit.

Connections

CAUTION

This unit

Audio connection

Video connection

VCR or game consoleDVD player Subwoofer Digital satellite tuner

or cable TV tuner

17 En

Connections

PREPARATION

English

■ Cables used for connections

Audio pin cable (supplied)

Optical cable (supplied)

Digital audio pin cable (supplied)

Subwoofer pin cable

System connector cable

OSD video pin cable (supplied)

■ Notes on connecting the optical cable

• Pull out the cap before connecting the optical cable.

When you are not using the optical cable, be sure to put

the cap back in place.

• When inserting the cable into the optical digital jack,

make sure the direction is correct.

■ Affixing cables

To prevent cables from becoming unplugged, place the

supplied cable clamp with the open side facing upward,

attach it to the rear panel of this unit in a suitable position,

and then affix cables in the cable clamp.

Before connecting components

Audio

Video

(White)

(Red)

(White)

(Red)

(Orange)(Orange)

(Yellow)(Yellow)

Cap

Optical cable

Attach to this unit

18 En

Connections

For audio connection, connect the analog audio output jacks on your TV to the TV/STB AUDIO INPUT jacks on this

unit. If your TV has an optical digital output jack, connect the optical digital output jack on your TV to the TV/STB

OPTICAL DIGITAL INPUT jack on this unit.

For video connection, connect the video input jack on your TV to the VIDEO OUT jack on this unit to display the OSD

for easy viewing when you adjust the system parameters in SET MENU.

To prevent the optical cable from being unplugged, affix the optical cable in the supplied cable clamp (see page 17).

If you make analog and optical digital audio connections at the same time as shown in the illustration below, the digital audio signals

input at the TV/STB OPTICAL DIGITAL INPUT jack take priority over the analog audio signals input at the TV/STB AUDIO INPUT

jacks.

OSD video pin cable Audio pin cable

Optical cable

Connecting a TV

Note

VCR TV/STB VIDEO TV/STB AUX

OPTICAL COAXIAL

DIGITAL INPUTOUTAUDIO INPUT

DVD SYSTEM

CONNECTOR

SUBWOOFER

Rear panel of this unit

Optical

digital

output

Video

input

Analog

audio

output

Video Audio

19 En

Connections

PREPARATION

English

Connect the coaxial digital output jack on your DVD player/recorder to the DVD COAXIAL DIGITAL INPUT jack on

this unit. When you connect this unit to your DVD/VCR combo player/recorder, connect the analog audio output jacks on

your DVD/VCR combo player/recorder to the VCR AUDIO INPUT jacks on this unit in addition to the coaxial digital

audio connection.

To prevent the optical cable from being unplugged, affix the optical cable in the supplied cable clamp (see page 17).

• Check that your DVD player/recorder is properly set to output Dolby Digital and DTS digital audio signals. If not, adjust the system

settings of your DVD player/recorder. For details, refer to the operation manual supplied with your DVD player/recorder.

• If your DVD player/recorder does not have a coaxial digital output jack, make an optical digital audio connection instead (see

page 23).

Audio pin cable

Digital audio pin cable

Connecting a DVD player/recorder

Notes

VCR TV/STB VIDEO TV/STB AUX

OPTICAL COAXIAL

DIGITAL INPUTOUTAUDIO INPUT

DVD SYSTEM

CONNECTOR

SUBWOOFER

Coaxial

digital

output

Analog

audio

output

DVD player/recorder

Video signal to the TV

Rear panel of this unit

For the DVD/VCR combo

player/recorder

connection

Audio

20 En

Connections

Connect the optical digital output jack on your digital satellite tuner or cable TV tuner to the TV/STB OPTICAL

DIGITAL INPUT jack on this unit. Connect the analog audio output jacks on your digital satellite tuner or cable TV

tuner to the TV/STB AUDIO INPUT jacks on this unit.

To prevent the optical cable from being unplugged, affix the optical cable in the supplied cable clamp (see page 17).

Audio pin cable

Optical cable

Connecting a digital satellite tuner or a cable TV tuner

VCR TV/STB VIDEO TV/STB AUX

OPTICAL COAXIAL

DIGITAL INPUTOUTAUDIO INPUT

DVD SYSTEM

CONNECTOR

SUBWOOFER

Rear panel of this unit

Analog

audio

output

Optical

digital

output

Digital satellite tuner

or cable TV tuner

Video signal to the TV

This connection (except for a game console) is not

necessary if your TV has a built-in digital satellite

tuner, cable TV tuner, or digital airwave tuner.

Audio

21 En

Connections

PREPARATION

English

Connect the TV/STB AUDIO INPUT jacks on this unit to the analog audio output jacks on your TV. Connect the optical

digital output jack on your digital airwave tuner to the TV/STB OPTICAL DIGITAL INPUT jack on this unit in addition

to the analog audio connection. By doing so, you can enjoy both analog and digital broadcasts.

To prevent the optical cable from being unplugged, affix the optical cable in the supplied cable clamp (see page 17).

Audio pin cable

Optical cable

Connecting a digital airwave tuner

TV/STB AUX

OPTICAL COAXIAL

DIGITAL INPUT

VCR

TV/STB VIDEO

OUTAUDIO INPUT

DVD SYSTEM

CONNECTOR

SUBWOOFER

Digital airwave tuner

Connect to the analog

audio output jacks on

the TV.

Optical

digital

output

Rear panel of this unit

Video signal to the TV

This connection (except for a game console) is not

necessary if your TV has a built-in digital satellite

tuner, cable TV tuner, or digital airwave tuner.

Audio

22 En

Connections

To connect a VCR, connect the analog audio output jacks on your VCR to the analog audio input jacks (VCR L/R) on

this unit.

Connect red plugs to the right jacks and white plugs to the left jacks.

Audio pin cable

Connecting a VCR

VCR TV/STB VIDEO TV/STB AUX

OPTICAL COAXIAL

DIGITAL INPUTOUTAUDIO INPUT

DVD SYSTEM

CONNECTOR

SUBWOOFER

Video signal to the TV

Rear panel of this unit

VCR

Analog

audio

output

Audio

23 En

Connections

PREPARATION

English

If your component supports optical digital connections, connect the optical digital output jack on your component

(e.g., DVD player/recorder) to the AUX OPTICAL DIGITAL INPUT jack on this unit.

To prevent the optical cable from being unplugged, affix the optical cable in the supplied cable clamp (see page 17).

Optical cable

Connecting other external components

VCR TV/STB VIDEO TV/STB AUX

OPTICAL COAXIAL

DIGITAL INPUTOUTAUDIO INPUT

DVD SYSTEM

CONNECTOR

SUBWOOFER

Optical

digital

output

Video signal to the TV

DVD player/recorder,

game console, CD player, etc.

Rear panel of this unit

Audio

24 En

Connections

Connect the monaural input jack on your subwoofer to the SUBWOOFER jack on this unit.

This connection alone does not output sound from the connected subwoofer. To output sound from the connected

subwoofer, turn on the power of your subwoofer and then run AUTO SETUP (see page 31) or select SWFR for BASS

OUT in SUBWOOFER SET (see page 62).

When connecting a Yamaha subwoofer equipped with a SYSTEM CONNECTOR terminal, connect it to the SYSTEM

CONNECTOR terminal on this unit. If the subwoofer is connected using a system type connection, changing the power

mode of this unit controls the power mode of the subwoofer.

Subwoofer pin cable

System connector cable

Connecting a subwoofer

VCR TV/STB VIDEO TV/STB AUX

OPTICAL COAXIAL

DIGITAL INPUTOUTAUDIO INPUT

DVD SYSTEM

CONNECTOR

SUBWOOFER

4 5

Monaural

input

Subwoofer

System

connector

Rear panel of this unit

Audio

25 En

Connections

PREPARATION

English

Once all other connections are complete, plug the AC power supply cable into the AC wall outlet.

Connecting the AC power supply cable

To the AC wall outlet

GETTING STARTED

26 En

1 Press and hold the mark on the battery

cover and then open the cover.

2 Insert the two supplied batteries (AA, R6,

UM-3) into the battery compartment.

Make sure you insert the batteries according to the

polarity markings (+/–).

3 Close the battery cover.

• Change all of the batteries if you notice the following

conditions: the operation range of the remote control decreases

or the transmission indicator does not light up or becomes dim.

• Do not use old batteries together with new ones.

• Do not use different types of batteries (such as alkaline and

manganese batteries) together. Read the packaging carefully as

these different types of batteries may have the same shape and

color.

• Exhausted batteries may leak. If the batteries have leaked,

dispose of them immediately. Avoid touching the leaked

material or letting it come into contact with clothing, etc. Clean

the battery compartment thoroughly before installing new

batteries.

• Do not throw away batteries with general house waste. Dispose

of them correctly in accordance with your local regulations.

• The memory stored in the remote control may be erased in the

following cases:

– The remote control is left without batteries for more than two

minutes.

– Exhausted batteries remain in the remote control.

– The buttons on the remote control are accidentally pressed

when you change batteries.

• If the memory stored in the remote control is unwantedly

erased, insert new batteries and set the remote control codes

again.

Remove the transparent sheet before using the remote control.

The remote control transmits a directional infrared beam.

Use the remote control within 6 m (20 ft) of this unit and

point it toward the remote control sensor of this unit

during operation.

• Do not spill water or other liquids on the remote control.

• Do not drop the remote control.

• Do not leave or store the remote control in the following places:

– places of high humidity, such as near a bath

– places of high temperatures, such as near a heater or a stove

– places of extremely low temperatures

– dusty places

• Do not expose the remote control sensor of this unit to direct

sunlight or lighting such as inverted fluorescent lamps.

• If the batteries grow old, the effective operation range of the

remote control decreases considerably. If this happens, replace

the batteries with two new ones as soon as possible.

Getting started

Installing batteries in the remote

control

Notes

Press

Operation range of the remote

control

Notes

30 30

Approximately

6 m (20 ft)

Getting started

27 En

SETUP

English

1 Press STANDBY/ON to turn on the power of

this unit.

The volume level appears in the front panel display,

and the current input source and beam mode are

displayed.

2 Press STANDBY/ON again to set this unit to

the standby mode.

When this unit is in the standby mode, only STANDBY/ON on

the front panel or on the remote control is operational, and the

other control buttons on the front panel or on the remote control

are not operational until the power of this unit is turned on.

Turning on this unit or

setting it to the standby mode

INPUT VOLUME STANDBY/ON

MACRO

INPUT2INPUT1

STB

VCR DVD AUX

TVAV

POWERPOWERSTANDBY/ON

STANDBY/ON

Front panel

Remote control

XXVOLUMEXX30XX

Current volume level

XXDVDXXXMYX SUR

Current input

source

Current beam

mode

Note

USING SET MENU

28 En

This section describes how to display the OSD (on-screen display) of this unit on your TV screen and to set the

parameters for your listening room. Once this is complete, you can enjoy real surround sound while watching TV in the

comfort of your own home.

1 Check that the video input jack on your TV is

connected to the VIDEO OUT jack on this unit

to display the OSD of this unit.

2 Press STANDBY/ON to turn on the power of

this unit.

3 Turn on the power of your TV.

The following screen appears on your TV.

If the OSD does not appear, use the remote control

supplied with your TV to switch the video input until

the OSD appears.

Using SET MENU

Displaying the OSD (on-screen display)

STANDBY/ON

Front panel

Remote control

OSD screen example

Push [MENU] to begin set-up

YSP-500

Using SET MENU

29 En

SETUP

English

The following diagram illustrates the overall flow of the setup procedure.

The flow chart of SET MENU

Run AUTO SETUP (IntelliBeam).

See “AUTO SETUP (IntelliBeam)” on page 31.

Look for a remedy.

See “Error messages for AUTO SETUP” on page 37 for a complete list of error

messages and possible remedies.

Play back audio signals or adjust the settings for the beam mode.

See “Playback” on page 41, “Enjoying surround sound” on page 44.

Run MANUAL SETUP.

See “MANUAL SETUP” on page 56.

• If you cannot clearly hear a sound beam from a specific channel, adjust settings for

SETTING PARAMETERS (see page 58) or for BEAM ADJUSTMENT (see page 59) in

BEAM MENU.

• If there are acoustically absorbent objects such as curtains in the path of the sound beams,

adjust settings for TREBLE GAIN in BEAM MENU (see page 61).

If an error occurs

If you want to make additional settings

and adjustments

Run LANGUAGE SETUP.

See “Changing OSD language” on page 30.

CHANGING OSD LANGUAGE

30 En

This feature allows you to select the language of your choice that appears in SET MENU of this unit.

1 Set the operation mode selector to YSP.

2 Press MENU.

The SET MENU screen appears on your TV.

• The control buttons used for SET MENU are displayed at

the bottom of the screen.

• To return to the previous screen while using SET MENU,

press RETURN.

• To exit from SET MENU, press MENU once more.

• You can also perform the following operations while

viewing information in the front panel display.

3 Press / to select LANGUAGE SETUP,

and press ENTER.

The following screen appears on your TV.

4 Press / to select the desired language,

and press ENTER.

Choices: ENGLISH (English), DEUTSCH (German),

Français (French), ESPAÑOL (Spanish),

ITALIANO (Italian), NEDERLANDS (Dutch),

Русский (Russian)

Changing OSD language

YSP

TV/AV

;MEMORY

;AUTO SETUP

;MANUAL SETUP

;LANGUAGE SETUP

[ ]/[ ]:Up/Down

[ENTER]:Enter

SET MENU

ENTER

ENGLISH

DEUTSCH

Francais

ESPANOL

ITALIANO

NEDERLANDS

[ ]/[ ]:Select

[ENTER]:Return

;LANGUAGE SETUP

ENTER

AUTO SETUP (INTELLIBEAM)

31 En

SETUP

English

This unit creates a sound field by reflecting sound beams on the walls of your listening room and by broadening the

cohesion of all the channels. Just as you would arrange the speaker position of other audio systems, you need to set the

beam angle to enjoy the best possible sound from this unit.

This unit employs the beam optimization and sound optimization features with the aid of the supplied IntelliBeam

microphone, allowing you to avoid troublesome listening-based setup and achieving highly accurate sound adjustments

that best match your listening environment. We call these two features “IntelliBeam” generically.

Beam optimization:

This feature optimizes the beam angle so that the parameter best matches your listening environment.

Sound optimization:

This feature optimizes the beam delay, volume, and quality so that the parameters best match your listening environment.

This unit performs a series of checks to optimize the beam angle, delay, volume, and quality. You can choose to optimize

all or part of the parameters.

The beam angle checking procedure is skipped if SOUND

OPTIMZ only is selected.

The sound optimization procedure is skipped if BEAM

OPTIMZ only is selected.

The subwoofer checking procedure is skipped if BEAM

OPTIMZ only is selected.

AUTO SETUP (IntelliBeam)

The flow chart of AUTO SETUP

*2 *3

Checking the environment of

your listening room

Optimizing the beam angle

Checking the subwoofer and

optimizing the beam delay,

frequency, and volume

Beam

optimization

Sound

optimization

Notes

AUTO SETUP (IntelliBeam)

32 En

The supplied IntelliBeam microphone collects and analyzes the sound that this unit produces in your actual listening

environment. Follow the procedure below to connect the IntelliBeam microphone to this unit and make sure that the

IntelliBeam microphone is placed in a proper location and that there are no large obstacles between the IntelliBeam

microphone and the walls in your listening room.

• After you have completed the AUTO SETUP procedure, be sure to disconnect the IntelliBeam microphone.

• The IntelliBeam microphone is sensitive to heat.

– Keep it away from direct sunlight.

– Do not place it on top of this unit.

• Do not connect the IntelliBeam microphone to an extension cable as doing so may result in an inaccurate sound optimization.

• An error may occur during the AUTO SETUP procedure if the IntelliBeam microphone is not properly placed in your listening room.

To avoid the possibility of an error:

– Do not place the IntelliBeam microphone to the extreme right or left from the center of this unit.

– Do not place the IntelliBeam microphone within 1.8 m (6.0 ft) from the front of this unit.

– Do not place the IntelliBeam microphone more than 1 m (3.3 ft) upper or lower from the center height of this unit.

• Make sure that there are no obstacles between the IntelliBeam microphone and the walls in your listening room as these objects

obstruct the path of sound beams. However, any objects that are in contact with the walls will be regarded as a protruding part of the

walls.

• The best possible results are achieved if the IntelliBeam microphone is placed at the same height as your ears would be when you are

seated in your listening position. However, if this is not possible, you can manually fine-tune the sound beam angle and balance the

sound beam output levels using MANUAL SETUP (see page 56) once the AUTO SETUP procedure is completed.

• If a subwoofer with adjustable volume and crossover/high-cut frequency controls is connected to

this unit, set the volume between 10 and 12 o’clock as viewed on a conventional clockface and set

the crossover/high-cut frequency to the maximum.

1 Press STANDBY/ON to turn off the power of

this unit.

2 Connect the supplied IntelliBeam

microphone to the INTELLIBEAM MIC jack on

the front panel.

3 Place the IntelliBeam microphone on a flat

level surface more than 1.8 m (6.0 ft) from the

front of the unit and within 1 m (3.3 ft) upper

or lower from the center height of the unit

with the IntelliBeam microphone facing

upward at your normal listening position.

Be sure to place the IntelliBeam microphone on an

imaginary center line drawn from this unit.

You may want to use the supplied cardboard microphone

stand to affix the IntelliBeam microphone at the same height

as your ears would be when you are seated in your listening

position.

Installing the IntelliBeam microphone

Notes

VOLUME

MIN MAX MIN

MAX

CROSSOVER

HIGH CUT

Subwoofer

STANDBY/ON

Front panel

Remote control

INTELLIBEAM MIC

Note

IntelliBeam

microphone

More than

1.8 m (6.0 ft)

Within 1 m (3.3 ft)

upper or lower

from the center

height

Cardboard

microphone stand

Sofa

Upper bound

position of the

microphone

Lower bound

position of the

microphone

AUTO SETUP (IntelliBeam)

33 En

SETUP

English

■ Assembling the supplied cardboard

microphone stand

You will find three separate parts (one circular part and

two longitudinal parts) of the cardboard microphone stand

originally put together.

1 Disassemble the three parts of the cardboard

microphone stand originally put together.

2 Insert one of the longitudinal part into the

crevice of the other longitudinal part.

3 Place the circular part on top of the two

combined longitudinal parts.

4 Place the supplied IntelliBeam microphone

on top of the circular part.

Once the IntelliBeam microphone is firmly connected to

this unit and properly placed in your listening room,

follow the procedure below to start the AUTO SETUP

procedure.

You can also enter the AUTO SETUP procedure simply by

pressing and holding AUTO SETUP for more than two

seconds. In this case, this unit performs both of the beam

optimization and sound optimization procedures.

IntelliBeam

microphone

Center line

Using AUTO SETUP (IntelliBeam)

321

+10

789

STEREO

MY BEAM

SLEEP

INPUTMODE

CH LEVEL MENU

RETURNTEST

TV VOL

VOLUME

5BEAM ST+3BEAM 3BEAM

VOL MODE

AUTO

SETUP

MACRO

INPUT2INPUT1

YSP

TV/AV

STB

VCR DVD AUX

TVAV

POWERPOWERSTANDBY/ON

ENTER

SUR. DECODE

MY SUR.

INPUT VOLUME STANDBY/ON

AUTO SETUP (IntelliBeam)

34 En

• Make sure that your listening room is as quiet as possible while

this unit is performing the AUTO SETUP procedure.

• To achieve the best results possible, evacuate yourself from

your listening room until the AUTO SETUP procedure is

completed so that you may not obstruct the path of sound

beams.

• Be advised that it is normal for loud test tones to be output

during the AUTO SETUP procedure.

• The AUTO SETUP procedure may not be run successfully if

this unit is installed in one of the rooms described in “Before

installing this unit” on page 13. In such cases, run MANUAL

SETUP (see page 56) to manually adjust the corresponding

parameters.

• If an error occurs, an error buzzer is played, the AUTO SETUP

procedure stops, and an error message appears on the screen.

See “Error messages for AUTO SETUP” on page 37 for

appropriate remedies.

• The AUTO SETUP procedure takes about three minutes

maximum. A chime is played when the AUTO SETUP

procedure is run successfully.

• If there are curtains in your listening room, we recommend

following the procedure below.

1. Open the curtains to improve sound reflection.

2. Run BEAM OPTIMZ only.

3. Close the curtains.

4. Run SOUND OPTIMZ only.

• You can save the settings optimized by the AUTO SETUP

procedure (see page 38). A set of settings optimized according

to the specific conditions of your listening environment can be

recalled later depending on the varying conditions of your

listening environment (see page 39).

1 Press STANDBY/ON to turn on the power of

this unit.

If a subwoofer is connected to this unit, turn on the

power of the subwoofer.

2 Set the operation mode selector to YSP.

3 Press MENU.

The SET MENU screen appears on your TV.

• The control buttons used for SET MENU are displayed at

the bottom of the screen.

• To return to the previous screen while using SET MENU,

press RETURN.

• To exit from the SET MENU screen, press MENU again.

• You can start the BEAM+SOUND OPTIMZ procedure

simply by pressing and holding AUTO SETUP for more

than two seconds. Steps 4 and 5 are skipped and then the

screen shown in step 5 is displayed on your TV. Start the

AUTO SETUP procedure from step 6.

• You can also perform the following operations in the front

panel display.

4 Press / to select AUTO SETUP and

press ENTER.

The following screen appears on your TV.

Notes

STANDBY/ON

Front panel

Remote control

YSP

TV/AV

;MEMORY

;AUTO SETUP

;MANUAL SETUP

;LANGUAGE SETUP

[ ]/[ ]:Up/Down

[ENTER]:Enter

SET MENU

1)BEAM+SOUND OPTIMZ

2)BEAM OPTIMZ only

3)SOUND OPTIMZ only

[ ]/[ ]:Up/Down

[ENTER]:Enter

;AUTO SETUP

ENTER

AUTO SETUP (IntelliBeam)

35 En

SETUP

English

5 Press / to select BEAM+SOUND

OPTIMZ, BEAM OPTIMZ only, or SOUND

OPTIMZ only and then press ENTER.

The following screen appears on your TV.

BEAM+SOUND OPTIMZ

(Beam optimization and sound optimization)

Use to optimize the beam angle, delay, volume, and

quality so that the parameters best match your listening

environment.

It is recommended that you should select this optimization

feature in the following cases:

• If you make settings for the first time.

• If the unit has been relocated.

• If your listening room has been restructured.

• If the objects in your listening room (furniture, etc.)

have been rearranged.

This menu takes about three minutes.

BEAM OPTIMZ only

(Beam optimization only)

Use to optimize the beam angle so that the parameter best

matches your listening environment.

This menu takes about one minute.

SOUND OPTIMZ only

(Sound optimization only)

Use to optimize the beam delay, volume, and quality so

that the parameters best match your listening environment.

It is recommended that you should select this optimization

feature in the following cases:

• If you have opened or closed the curtains in your

listening room before using this unit.

• If you have manually set the beam angle.

This menu takes about two minutes.

You must optimize the beam angle in the BEAM OPTIMZ only

procedure before starting the SOUND OPTIMZ only procedure.

6 Check the following points once again before

starting the AUTO SETUP procedure.

• Is the IntelliBeam microphone firmly connected to

this unit?

• Is the IntelliBeam microphone placed in a proper

location?

• Are there any large obstacles in between the

IntelliBeam microphone and the walls in your

listening room?

7 Press ENTER to start the AUTO SETUP

procedure.

The following screen appears on your TV and the

AUTO SETUP procedure starts in 10 seconds.

Leave the room quietly before starting the AUTO

SETUP procedure.

If an error occurs, an error buzzer is played and an

error message is displayed. See “Error messages for

AUTO SETUP” on page 37 for a complete list of

error messages and their proper remedies. Follow the

instructions and perform the AUTO SETUP

procedure again.

Note

ENTER

PREPARATION & CHECK

Please connect the MIC.

Please place the MIC at least

1.8m/6ft away from the YSP

unit. The MIC should be set

at ear level when seated.

Measurement takes about 3min.

After [ENTER] is pressed,

please leave the room.

[ENTER]:Start [RETURN]:Cancel

AUTO SETUP

Will begin in 10sec

Please leave the room

**--------

[RETURN]:Cancel

AUTO SETUP START

ENTER

←

Flashes

AUTO SETUP (IntelliBeam)

36 En

8 Check that the following screen is displayed

on your TV.

The results of the AUTO SETUP procedure are

displayed on your TV.

• If “ENVIRONMENT CHECK [FAILED]” is

displayed, we recommend running the AUTO SETUP

procedure again. For details, see step 9.

• If “SUBWOOFER : NOT APPLICABLE” is displayed

even though a subwoofer is connected to this unit,

increase the volume level of the subwoofer and run the

AUTO SETUP procedure again.

• Depending on the environment of your listening room,

the beam angle of front left and right, and surround left

and right may be set to the same value even if

“5 BEAM” is displayed as a result.

9 Press ENTER to confirm the results or press

RETURN to cancel the results.

The following screen is displayed for two seconds

and then disappears from your TV.

If “ENVIRONMENT CHECK [FAILED]” is displayed in

step 8, the following screen is displayed after pressing

ENTER. In this case, see ERROR E-1 in “Error messages

for AUTO SETUP” on page 37. Press ENTER to exit

AUTO SETUP and then run the procedure again from

step 3.

10 Disconnect the IntelliBeam microphone from

the INTELLIBEAM MIC jack on the front

panel.

If you want to save and load settings, see “Using the system

memory” on page 38.

MEASUREMENT COMPLETE

BEAM MODE :5 BEAM

SUBWOOFER :NOT APPLICABLE

[ENTER]:Save set-up.

[RETURN]:Do not save set-up.

SHOW RESULT

Example 1

MEASUREMENT COMPLETE

ENVIRONMENT CHECK[FAILED]

BEAM MODE :5 BEAM

SUBWOOFER :YES

[ENTER]:Save set-up.

[RETURN]:Do not save set-up.

SHOW RESULT

Example 2

←

Flashes

ENTER

AUTO SETUP COMPLETE

Please remove the MIC from

the YSP and the listening

position.

AUTO SETUP COMPLETE

Your YSP unit may not be set

up correctly.

We recommend you try again.

Please press [ENTER] key to

exit.

←

Flashes

AUTO SETUP (IntelliBeam)

37 En

SETUP

English

■ Error messages for AUTO SETUP

Before the AUTO SETUP procedure starts

While the AUTO SETUP procedure is in progress

If one of the errors listed below except E-1 is displayed, press RETURN. In case you have started the AUTO SETUP

procedure by pressing AUTO SETUP in step 3, run the procedure again from step 3 after the screen disappears. In case

you have started the AUTO SETUP procedure by pressing MENU in step 3, run the procedure again from step 4 after the

screen in step 3 is displayed. Run MANUAL SETUP if the problem is difficult to be saved.

Error message Cause Remedy

See

page

ERROR E-2

No MIC detected. Please check

MIC connection and re-try.

The IntelliBeam microphone is not

connected to this unit.

Connect the IntelliBeam microphone to

this unit.

Error message Cause Remedy

See

page

ERROR E-1

Please test in quieter environment.

There is too much unwanted noise in

your listening room.

Make sure that your listening room is as

quiet as possible. You may want to

choose certain hours during the day

when there is not much noise coming

from outside.

—

ERROR E-2

No MIC detected. Please check

MIC connection and re-try.

The IntelliBeam microphone was

disconnected while the AUTO SETUP

procedure was in progress.

Make sure that the IntelliBeam

microphone is firmly connected to this

unit.

ERROR E-3

Unexpected control is detected.

Please re-try.

Some other operations were performed

on this unit while the AUTO SETUP

procedure was in progress.

Do not perform any other operations

while the AUTO SETUP procedure is in

progress.

—

ERROR E-4

Please check MIC position. MIC

should be set in front of YSP.

The IntelliBeam microphone is not

placed in front of this unit.

Make sure that the IntelliBeam

microphone is installed in front of this

unit.

ERROR E-5

Please check MIC position. MIC

should be set above 1.8m/6.0ft.

The IntelliBeam microphone is not

placed in the right distance from this

unit.

Make sure that the IntelliBeam

microphone is installed more than 1.8 m

(6.0 ft) from the front of this unit and

within 1 m (3.3 ft) from the center height

of this unit.

ERROR E-6

Volume level is lower than

expected. Please check MIC

position/connection and re-try.

The IntelliBeam microphone cannot

collect the sound produced by this unit

because the sound output level is too low.

Make sure that the IntelliBeam

microphone is firmly connected to this

unit and placed in a proper location. If

the problem persists, contact the nearest

authorized Yamaha service center for

assistance.

ERROR E-7

Unexpected error happened.

Please re-try.

An internal system error occurred. Repeat the AUTO SETUP procedure.

—

USING THE SYSTEM MEMORY

38 En

You can save the current settings adjusted in SET MENU

in the system memory of this unit. It is handy to save

certain settings according to the varying conditions of

your listening environment. For example, if there are

curtains in the path of sound beams, the effectiveness of

the sound beams will vary depending on whether the

curtains are open or closed.

1 Set the operation mode selector to YSP.

2 Press MENU.

The SET MENU screen appears on your TV.

• The control buttons used for SET MENU are displayed at

the bottom of the screen.

• To return to the previous screen while using SET MENU,

press RETURN.

• To exit from the SET MENU screen, press MENU once

more.

• You can also perform the following operations in the front

panel display.

3 Press / to select MEMORY and press

ENTER.

The following screen appears on your TV.

4 Press / to select SAVE and press

ENTER.

The following screen appears on your TV.

Using the system memory

Convenient usage of the system

memory

Saving settings

When the curtains are

open

When the curtains are

closed

YSP

TV/AV

;MEMORY

;AUTO SETUP

;MANUAL SETUP

;LANGUAGE SETUP

[ ]/[ ]:Up/Down

[ENTER]:Enter

SET MENU

ENTER

1)LOAD

2)SAVE

[ ]/[ ]:Up/Down

[ENTER]:Enter

;MEMORY

ENTER

MEMORY1

MEMORY2

MEMORY3

[ ]/[ ]:Select

[ENTER]:Enter

2)MEMORY SAVE

ENTER

Using the system memory

39 En

SETUP

English

5 Press / to select MEMORY1,

MEMORY2, or MEMORY3 and press ENTER.

The following screen appears on your TV.

6 Press ENTER again.

The new parameters are saved as MEMORY1,

MEMORY2, or MEMORY3. Once the parameters

are saved, the display returns to the SET MENU

screen.

7 Press MENU to exit.

The SET MENU screen disappears from your TV.

You can recall the settings saved in “Saving settings” on

page 38 according to the varying conditions of your

listening environment.

1 Set the operation mode selector to YSP.

2 Press MENU.

The SET MENU screen appears on your TV.

• The control buttons used for SET MENU are displayed at

the bottom of the screen.

• To return to the previous screen while using SET MENU,

press RETURN.

• To exit from the SET MENU screen, press MENU once

more.

• You can also perform the following operations in the front

panel display.

3 Press / to select MEMORY and press

ENTER.

The following screen appears on your TV.

MEMORY1 Save Now ?

Push [ENTER] to Save

2)MEMORY SAVE

ENTER

MEMORY1 Saving

2)MEMORY SAVE

ENTER

;MEMORY

;AUTO SETUP

;MANUAL SETUP

;LANGUAGE SETUP

[ ]/[ ]:Up/Down

[ENTER]:Enter

SET MENU

Loading settings

YSP

TV/AV

;MEMORY

;AUTO SETUP

;MANUAL SETUP

;LANGUAGE SETUP

[ ]/[ ]:Up/Down

[ENTER]:Enter

SET MENU

ENTER

1)LOAD

2)SAVE

[ ]/[ ]:Up/Down

[ENTER]:Enter

;MEMORY

ENTER

Using the system memory

40 En

4 Press / to select LOAD and press

ENTER.

The following screen appears on your TV.

5 Press / to select MEMORY1,

MEMORY2, or MEMORY3 and press ENTER.

The following screen appears on your TV.

6 Press ENTER again.

The new parameters saved as MEMORY1,

MEMORY2, or MEMORY3 are loaded. Once the

parameters are loaded, the display returns to the SET

MENU screen.

7 Press MENU to exit.

The SET MENU screen disappears from your TV.

ENTER

MEMORY1

MEMORY2

MEMORY3

[ ]/[ ]:Select

[ENTER]:Enter

1)MEMORY LOAD

ENTER

MEMORY1 Load Now ?

Push [ENTER] to Load

1)MEMORY LOAD

ENTER

MEMORY1 Loading

1)MEMORY LOAD

ENTER

;MEMORY

;AUTO SETUP

;MANUAL SETUP

;LANGUAGE SETUP

[ ]/[ ]:Up/Down

[ENTER]:Enter

SET MENU

PLAYBACK

41 En

BASIC

OPERATION

English

You can play back sound from the components connected

to this unit simply by pressing INPUT on the front panel

repeatedly or pressing one of the input selector buttons

(STB, VCR, DVD, AUX, or TV) on the remote control.

The name of the selected input source and the type of

corresponding input mode appear in the front panel

display.

■ Front panel operations

Press INPUT on the front panel repeatedly to

toggle between TV/STB, VCR, DVD, and AUX.

The name of the corresponding input source and the type

of current input mode are displayed in the front panel

display.

■ Remote control operations

In addition to controlling this unit, you can also operate other AV

components if you set up the remote control with the appropriate

remote control codes and set the operation mode selector to TV/

AV to change the control area (see page 79).

Press TV to play back a TV program.

Press STB to play back a satellite broadcast.

Press DVD to play back a DVD.

Playback

Selecting the input source

321

+10

789

STEREO

MY BEAM

SLEEP

INPUTMODE

CH LEVEL MENU

RETURNTEST

5BEAM ST+3BEAM 3BEAM

VOL MODE

AUTO

SETUP

MACRO

INPUT2INPUT1

YSP

TV/AV

STB

VCR DVD AUX

ENTER

SUR. DECODE

MY SUR.

INPUT VOLUME STANDBY/ON

X TV/STBX AUTO

Name of the selected

input source

Type of the selected

input mode

STB

X TV/STBX AUTO

DVD

XXDVDXXXAUTO

42 En

Playback

Press VCR to play back a component connected

to the VCR input jack on the rear panel of this

unit.

Press AUX to play back a component connected

to the AUX jack on the rear panel of this unit.

Once an input source is selected (see page 41), you can

play back the selected input source.

This section uses a DVD player as an example of the playback

source.

For details on your TV and DVD player, refer to the respective

owner’s manual.

1 Turn on the power of your DVD player.

2 Switch to the video input on your TV using

the remote control supplied with the TV and

display the DVD menu screen.

If necessary, turn down the volume of your TV until no

sound is heard.

3 Press DVD to select DVD as the input source.

4 Play back DVD on your DVD player using the

supplied remote control.

Audio signals from your DVD player are output from

this unit.

• You can use the supplied demonstration DVD to check the

digital signals being input at the DVD player with the digital

connection (optical/coaxial). The MULTI indicator lights up

when this unit detects the 5.1-channel signal input at the optical/

coaxial jack. If the indicator lights up, confirm the

settings of the digital output, bitstream output, and/or DTS

output of the DVD player.

• If the output volume is too low, increase the volume of this unit

to around 45.

• If you have set the appropriate remote control codes for your

TV and DVD player, you can use the remote control supplied

with this unit to operate these components. For details on how

to set remote control codes, see page 79.

Playing back sources

Note

VCR

X VCR

AUX

XXAUXXXXAUTO

Note

DVD

PCM

43 En

Playback

BASIC

OPERATION

English

Press VOLUME +/– to increase or decrease the

volume level.

The numeric value of the volume level appears in the front

panel display.

Control range: MIN (minimum), 01 to 99,

MAX (maximum)

• The volume level of all input sources (including multi-channel

as well as stereo sources) changes at the same time.

• One volume level increases or decreases each time you press

VOLUME +/–.

• You can continuously increase or decrease the volume level if

you press and hold VOLUME +/–.

■ Muting the sound

1 Press MUTE to mute the sound.

“AUDIO MUTE ON” appears in the front panel

display, and the volume level indicator flashes.

2 Press MUTE again (or press VOLUME +/–) to

resume the sound output.

“AUDIO MUTE OFF” appears temporarily in the

front panel display (or the numeric value of the

current volume level appears if you press VOLUME

+/–), and the volume level indicator lights up.

The sound output of all input sources (including multi-channel as

well as stereo sources) is muted at the same time.

You can select whether the sound output is to be muted

completely or by 20 dB when you press MUTE (see page 62).

Adjusting the volume

Notes

INPUT VOLUME STANDBY/ON

TV VOL

VOLUME

MUTE

TV INPUT TV MUTE

VOLUME

XXVOLUMEXX30XX

Front panel

Remote control

Note

TV VOL

VOLUME

MUTE

TV INPUT TV MUTE

CODE SET

XXDVDXXX

5BEAM

MUTE

AUDIOX MUTEX ON

Flashes

AUDIOX MUTEX OFF

VOLUME

Lights up

MUTE

ENJOYING SURROUND SOUND

44 En

You can enjoy multi-channel surround sound by changing the beam mode using the beam mode buttons on the remote

control. Select 5 Beam, Stereo plus 3 Beam, 3 Beam, or My Surround for multi-channel playback.

• When ANGLE TO WALL OR CORNER is set in MANUAL SETUP (see page 58), 5 Beam and 3 Beam cannot be selected.

• To enjoy 5 Beam, Stereo plus 3 Beam, or 3 Beam as the beam mode, you must perform AUTO SETUP or MANUAL SETUP so that

the parameters best match your listening environment.

1 Set the operation mode selector to YSP.

2 Press one of the beam mode buttons

(5BEAM, ST+3BEAM, 3BEAM, or MY SUR.) to

select the desired beam mode for 5.1-

channel play back.

Outputs sound beams from the front left, front right,

center, surround left, and surround right channels. This

mode is ideal for enjoying surround sound effects to the

fullest when you watch DVDs recorded in a multi-channel

format or play back 2-channel sources in a multi-channel

format.

Press 5BEAM to select 5 Beam.

• To achieve the best surround sound effect, make sure that there

are no obstacles placed in the path of sound beams in that the

objects may prevent the sound beams from rebounding directly

off the walls in your listening room.

• The front left and right sound beams are output toward the walls

in your listening room.

• “SP Pos. Corner!” appears in the front panel display if

INSTALLED POSITION is set to ANGLE TO WALL OR

CORNER (see page 58).

Enjoying surround sound

Notes

321

+10

789

STEREO

MY BEAM

SLEEP

INPUTMODE

CH LEVEL MENU

RETURNTEST

5BEAM ST+3BEAM 3BEAM

VOL MODE

AUTO

SETUP

YSP

TV/AV

ENTER

SUR. DECODE

MY SUR.

YSP

TV/AV

5BEAM

ST+3BEAM

3BEAM

MY SUR.

5 Beam

Notes

5BEAM

45 En

Enjoying surround sound

BASIC

OPERATION

English

Outputs normal sound from the front left and right

channels and sound beams from the center and surround

left and right channels. This mode is ideal for watching

live recordings on a DVD. Vocals and instrumental sounds

can be heard close to the center of the listening position

while sound reflections from the venue itself can be heard

on your right and left, giving you the feeling that you are

sitting right in front of the stage.

Press ST+3BEAM to select Stereo plus 3 Beam.

The front left and right sound beams are output directly toward

the listening position.

Outputs sound beams from the front left and right and

center channels. This mode is ideal for enjoying movies

with the whole family. Because the listening position area

is widened, you can enjoy excellent quality surround

sound over a wider area. In addition, you can use this

mode when the listening position is close to the backside

of the wall, and the surround left and right sound beams

cannot be reflected off the wall.

Press 3BEAM to select 3 Beam.

You can achieve a more realistic surround effect if you adjust

settings for IMAGE LOCATION in BEAM MENU (see page 61).

• When you play back multi-channel sources, surround left and

right signals are mixed down and output from the front left and

right channels.

• The front left and right sound beams are output toward the walls

in your listening room.

• “SP Pos. Corner!” appears in the front panel display if

INSTALLED POSITION is set to ANGLE TO WALL OR

CORNER (see page 58).

This mode enables surround system in a small listening

area which may not fulfill the listening room conditions

for other beam modes (see “Before installing this unit” on

page 13). Use this beam mode when you want to enjoy

surround sound near this unit, or when the other beam

modes are unavailable.

Press MY SUR. to select My Surround.

• Beam mode settings such as beam angles and distances are

ineffective in this mode.

• For the full effect of My Surround, your listening position must

face toward the front of this unit.

Stereo plus 3 Beam

Note

3 Beam

ST+3BEAM

3BEAM

Notes

My Surround

Notes

MY SUR.

46 En

Enjoying surround sound

■ Decoder indicators

Depending on the input source and the selected surround

mode, the decoder indicators in the front panel display

light up as follows:

• You can select an input mode (AUTO, DTS, or ANALOG) by

pressing INPUTMODE repeatedly (see page 70).

• Discs encoded in DTS-ES, Dolby Digital 5.1 EX, Dolby Digital

EX, or Dolby Digital Surround EX will be played back in DTS

or Dolby Digital.

■ Surround modes and recommended

sources

• When you select an input source (see page 41), the surround

mode used for the previously selected input source is

automatically selected.

• If the power of this unit is turned off and on again, the surround

mode used for the previously selected input source before the

power was turned off is automatically selected.

• If the surround modes are not available, “Prohibit” appears in

the front panel display when you press SUR. DECODE.

• The surround modes are available:

– when the beam mode is set to a setting other than the stereo

playback (see page 50), My Beam (see page 51), and My

Surround (see page 45).

– when 2-channel signals are being input.

Status Indicator

When PCM signals are being input

When DTS digital signals are being

input or DTS Neo:6 is selected as

the surround mode

When Dolby Digital signals are

being input

When Dolby Pro Logic is selected

as the surround mode

When Dolby Pro Logic II is selected

as the surround mode

PCM

DIGITAL

Surround mode

Recommended

source

DTS Neo:6

Cinema

Music

Movies

Music

Dolby Pro Logic – All sources

Dolby Pro Logic II

Movie

Music

Game

Movies

Music

Games

Notes

47 En

Enjoying surround sound

BASIC

OPERATION

English

This unit can decode 2-channel sources for 5.1-channel

playback so that you can enjoy a variety of surround sound

effects by switching the surround mode.

The beam mode must be set to 5 Beam, Stereo plus 3 Beam, or 3

Beam (see page 44).

1 Set the operation mode selector to YSP.

2 Press SUR. DECODE repeatedly (or press

SUR. DECODE and then press / ) to

switch between surround modes.

Choices: Neo:6 Cinema, Neo:6 Music, PRO LOGIC,

PLII Movie, PLII Music, PLII Game

Default setting: Neo:6 Cinema

Enjoying 2-channel sources

in surround sound

321

+10

789

STEREO

MY BEAM

CH LEVEL MENU

RETURNTEST

5BEAM ST+3BEAM 3BEAM

YSP

TV/AV

ENTER

SUR. DECODE

MY SUR.

YSP

TV/AV

SUR. DECODE

ENTER

Neo:6 Cinema

Neo:6 Music

PRO LOGIC

PLII Movie

PLII

Music

PLII

Game

48 En

Enjoying surround sound

You can enjoy analog audio signals output from your TV

in real surround sound.

Before performing the steps below, set the volume of this unit to

30. If necessary, adjust the volume level in step 4 below.

1 Select the TV channel you want to watch.

To select a TV channel, use the remote control

supplied with your TV.

2 Set the operation mode selector to YSP.

3 Press TV.

This unit outputs audio signals from your TV.

4 If you hear sound from your TV speakers,

reduce the volume level of your TV until you

can no longer hear any audio being output.

To reduce the TV volume level, use the remote

control supplied with your TV.

5 Press VOLUME +/– to adjust the volume

level.

6 Press SUR. DECODE repeatedly (or press

SUR. DECODE and then press / ) to

switch between surround modes.

Signals input from 2-channel sources are played back

in multi-channels.

For more information on surround modes, see

page 46.

Enjoying TV in surround sound

321

+10

789

STEREO

MY BEAM

SLEEP

INPUTMODE

CH LEVEL MENU

RETURNTEST

TV VOL

VOLUME

5BEAM ST+3BEAM 3BEAM

VOL MODE

AUTO

SETUP

MACRO

INPUT2INPUT1

YSP

TV/AV

ENTER

SUR. DECODE

MY SUR.

YSP

TV/AV

VOLUME

SUR. DECODE

ENTER

49 En

Enjoying surround sound

BASIC

OPERATION

English

You can configure the parameters for Dolby Pro Logic II

Music and DTS Neo:6 Music to fine-tune the surround

sound effect.

1 Repeat steps 1 and 2 in “Enjoying 2-channel

sources in surround sound” on page 47 and

select PL II Music or Neo:6 Music.

2 Press / to select the parameter.

3 Press / to configure the selected

parameter.

■ When Dolby Pro Logic II Music is

selected

PANORAMA

Gives the front left and right channel sound a

wraparound effect, distributed throughout the entire

surround sound field to give you an expansive feeling.

Choices: ON/OFF

Default setting: OFF

DIMENSION

Adjusts the difference in volume between the front

and surround channels to the desired volume balance.

Control range: –3 (toward the surround direction) to

+3 (toward the front direction)

Default setting: STD (standard)

C. WIDTH

Distributes the center channel sound to the left and

right. If 0 is selected, the center channel sound is

output only from the center channel.

Control range: 0 to 7

Default setting: 3

■ When DTS Neo:6 Music is selected

C. IMAGE

Adjusts the center image from three channels (front

left and right and center) to varying degrees.

Control range: 0.0 (wider) to 1.0 (toward the center)

Default setting: 0.3

Adjusting surround mode

parameters

+10

789

CH LEVEL MENU

RETURNTEST

YSP

TV/AV

ENTER

SUR. DECODE

ENTER

ENJOYING STEREO SOUND

50 En

You can enjoy 2-channel stereo playback as the beam modes by pressing STEREO on the remote control. Sounds are

output from the front right and left channels. This is ideal for playing back hi-fi sources, such as CDs, and can be used to

replace your TV speakers.

• When you play back Dolby Digital audio signals in the stereo playback, the dynamic range becomes compressed. If the volume level

decreases to the extreme, use other beam modes except My Beam.

• When the stereo playback is selected as the beam mode, the surround modes (see page 46) become ineffective.

1 Set the operation mode selector to YSP.

2 Press STEREO to select the stereo playback

as the beam mode.

“STEREO” appears in the front panel display.

When you play back multi-channel sources, all signals except

those from the front left and right channels are mixed down and

output from the front left and right channels. No audio is output

from the center and surround channels.

Enjoying stereo sound

Notes

321

+10

789

STEREO

MY BEAM

CH LEVEL MENU

RETURNTEST

YSP

TV/AV

ENTER

SUR. DECODE

MY SUR.

YSP

TV/AV

STEREO

X STEREOX MODE

Note

PLAYING BACK SOUND CLEARLY (MY BEAM)

51 En

BASIC

OPERATION

English

You can improve listenability in a noisy environment by changing the beam mode to My Beam, which outputs sound

beams directly toward the listening position in a single channel. In addition, My Beam is also ideal when you do not want

the sound beams to be reflected on the walls in your listening room or when you do not want to disturb other people

while enjoying music or movies at night.

If My Beam is selected as the beam mode, the surround modes (see page 46) and TruBass (see page 63) become ineffective. In addition,

no audio is output from the subwoofer connected to this unit.

The My Beam microphone on the remote control collects

the test tones from this unit so that the beam angle can be

automatically adjusted.

1 Set the operation mode selector to YSP.

2 Press and hold MY BEAM for more than two

seconds.

A test tone is output twice from this unit. Keep

pointing the remote control toward this unit while the

test tones are being output so that the My Beam

microphone can collect the test tones.

Control range: L50° to R50°

Operation guarantee range: 6 m (20 ft), L30° to R30°

• If an error occurs, an error buzzer is played and “MY BEAM

ERROR” is displayed in the front panel display.

• An error may occur if the listening room is noisy. Make sure

that the listening room is as quiet as possible while the test

tones are being output.

• Do not shake or move the remote control while the test tones are

being output.

• Do not cover the My Beam microphone on the remote control

while the test tones are being output.

• The batteries in the remote control may be weak if the remote

control does not function properly. In this case, replace all the

batteries and then try the procedure again.

• When the input signal with 64 kHz, 88.2kHz, or 96 kHz of

sampling frequency is being played back, the beam angle

cannot be automatically adjusted.

Playing back sound clearly (My Beam)

Note

321

+10

789

STEREO

MY BEAM

SLEEP

CH LEVEL MENU

RETURNTEST

5BEAM ST+3BEAM 3BEAM

YSP

TV/AV

TVAV

POWERPOWERSTANDBY/ON

ENTER

SUR. DECODE

MY SUR.

My Beam

microphone

Using auto-adjust function

YSP

TV/AV

MY BEAM

Notes

52 En

Playing back sound clearly (My Beam)

You can adjust the beam angle manually while playing

back an input source. This function is also ideal if the

listening position is out of the operation guarantee range

of the auto-adjust function.

1 Set the operation mode selector to YSP.

2 Press MY BEAM.

“MY BEAM” is displayed in the front panel display.

3 Press / while “MY BEAM” is displayed to

adjust the beam angle.

Control range: L90° to R90°

• Press repeatedly to increase the horizontal angle

on the left side.

• Press repeatedly to increase the horizontal angle

on the right side.

4 Press MY BEAM again to complete the beam

angle adjustment.

Using manual-adjust function

YSP

TV/AV

MY BEAM

ENTER

ANGLE 0

USING THE VOLUME MODE (NIGHT LISTENING ENHANCER/TV VOLUME EQUAL MODE)

53 En

BASIC

OPERATION

English

The night listening enhancers are designed to improve listenability at lower volumes or at night. In addition, you can limit

the volume level of the TV so that it will not vary suddenly to a great extent whenever the contents being broadcast

change (i.e. due to commercials, etc.).

1 Set the operation mode selector to YSP.

2 Press VOL MODE repeatedly to select

NIGHT:CINEMA, NIGHT:MUSIC, TV EQUAL

VOLUME, or OFF.

The NIGHT indicator lights up in the front panel

display when “NIGHT:CINEMA” or

“NIGHT:MUSIC” is selected.

The EQUAL indicator lights up in the front panel

display when “TV EQUAL VOLUME” is selected.

• Select NIGHT:CINEMA when watching films to

reduce the dynamic range of film soundtracks and

to make dialog easier to hear at lower volumes.

• Select NIGHT:MUSIC when listening to music

sources to preserve ease-of-listening for all sounds.

• Select TV EQUAL VOLUME when watching TV

programs.

• Select OFF to turn off the volume mode.

3 Press / to adjust the effect level of

compression while NIGHT:CINEMA,

NIGHT:MUSIC, or TV EQUAL VOLUME is

displayed.

• Select Effect.Lvl:MIN for minimum compression.

• Select Effect.Lvl:MID for standard compression.

• Select Effect.Lvl:MAX for maximum

compression.

• The volume mode settings are canceled if you press

STANDBY/ON or disconnect the AC power supply cable from

the AC wall outlet.

• The volume mode settings become ineffective when My

Surround is selected as the beam mode (see page 45).

Using the volume mode

(Night listening enhancer/TV volume equal mode)

321

+10

789

STEREO

MY BEAM

SLEEP

INPUTMODE

CH LEVEL MENU

RETURNTEST

5BEAM ST+3BEAM 3BEAM

VOL MODE

AUTO

SETUP

YSP

TV/AV

ENTER

SUR. DECODE

MY SUR.

YSP

TV/AV

NIGHT:CINEMA

NIGHT:MUSIC

TV EQUAL VOL

OFF

VOL MODE

Lights up

Notes

Lights up

Effect.Lvl:MIN

Effect.Lvl:MID

Effect.Lvl:MAX

ENTER

USING THE SLEEP TIMER

54 En

Use this feature to automatically set this unit to the standby mode after a specified period of time. The sleep timer is

useful if you are going to sleep after a certain amount of time while this unit is still playing back a source.

1 Set the operation mode selector to YSP.

2 Press SLEEP repeatedly to set the interval

for the sleep timer.

Choices: 120min, 90min, 60min, 30min, OFF

The SLEEP indicator flashes in the front panel

display while switching the interval for the sleep

timer.

Each time you press SLEEP, the front panel display

changes as shown below.

3 Wait for a few seconds without operating this

unit to confirm the setting for the sleep timer.

The SLEEP indicator lights up in the front panel

display, indicating that the sleep timer is activated.

Using the sleep timer

321

+10

789

STEREO

MY BEAM

SLEEP

INPUTMODE

CH LEVEL MENU

RETURNTEST

5BEAM ST+3BEAM 3BEAM

VOL MODE

AUTO

SETUP

MACRO

INPUT2INPUT1

YSP

TV/AV

ENTER

SUR. DECODE

MY SUR.

YSP

TV/AV

SLEEP

Flashes

SLEEP

SLEEP 120min

SLEEP 90min

SLEEP 60min

SLEEP 30min

SLEEP OFF

Lights up

55 En

Using the sleep timer

BASIC

OPERATION

English

■ Canceling the sleep timer

1 Set the operation mode selector to YSP.

2 Press SLEEP repeatedly until “SLEEP OFF”

appears in the front panel display.

3 Wait for a few seconds without operating this

unit to confirm the setting for the sleep timer.

The SLEEP indicator disappears from the front panel

display, indicating that the sleep timer is deactivated.

The previous setting for the sleep timer before you deactivate it is

stored in the system memory.

The sleep timer setting can also be deactivated if you press

STANDBY/ON to set this unit to the standby mode or unplug the

AC power supply cable from the AC outlet.

Note

YSP

TV/AV

SLEEP

X SLEEPXXOFF

Disappears

MANUAL SETUP

56 En

To achieve the best quality surround sound, you can use MANUAL SETUP to fine-tune the listening environment

parameters, as well as to make advanced settings for sound signals, sound beams, digital input, and the OSD. Change the

initial settings (indicated in bold under each parameter) to reflect the needs of your own listening environment.

• You can save the settings optimized by the AUTO SETUP procedure (see page 38). A set of settings optimized according to the

specific conditions of your listening environment can be recalled later depending on the varying conditions of your listening

environment (see page 39).

• Most of the parameters in SOUND MENU and BEAM MENU are automatically set when you run AUTO SETUP (see page 31). Use

SOUND MENU and BEAM MENU to make additional adjustments.

• BEAM MENU allows you to make settings for the surround sound effects normally available in the speaker settings menu.

• Make settings for the parameters in BEAM MENU first before making settings for the parameters in SOUND MENU, INPUT MENU,

and DISPLAY MENU.

SOUND MENU

Use to manually adjust the various parameters related to the sound output.

BEAM MENU

Use to manually adjust the various parameters related to the sound beam output.

INPUT MENU

Use to manually adjust the various parameters related to the audio and video input.

DISPLAY MENU

Use to manually adjust the various parameters related to the display.

MANUAL SETUP

Item Features Page

TONE CONTROL Adjusts the output level of high-frequency or low-frequency sound.

SUBWOOFER SET Adjusts the various subwoofer settings.

MUTE LEVEL Adjusts the muting level.

AUDIO DELAY Adjusts the audio delay.

DD/DTS Dynamic Range Adjusts the dynamic range of Dolby Digital or DTS signals.

TruBass Selects the bass sound enhancer.

Item Features Page

SETTING PARAMETERS Adjusts the listening room and listening position settings.

BEAM ADJUSTMENT Adjusts the various sound beam settings.

IMAGE LOCATION Adjusts the sound position of the front left and right channels.

Item Features Page

INPUT MODE Selects the initial input of the source.

INPUT TRIM Adjusts the input level of the source.

INPUT RENAME Renames the displayed input source.

Item Features Page

F.DISPLAY SET Adjusts the front panel display settings.

OSD SET Adjusts the OSD settings.

UNIT SET Changes the display unit of measurement.

57 En

MANUAL SETUP

ADVANCED

OPERATION

English

Use the remote control to access and adjust each

parameter.

You can adjust the SET MENU parameters while the unit is

reproducing sound.

1 Set the operation mode selector to YSP.

2 Press MENU.

The SET MENU screen appears on your TV.

• The control buttons used for SET MENU are displayed at

the bottom of the screen.

• To return to the previous screen while using SET MENU,

press RETURN.

• To exit from the SET MENU screen, press MENU once

more.

• You can also perform the following operations in the front

panel display.

3 Press / to select MANUAL SETUP and

press ENTER.

The following screen appears on your TV.

4 Press / to select a sub menu and press

ENTER.

5 Press / / / and ENTER to configure

each parameter.

6 Press MENU to exit.

The OSD disappears from your TV screen.

Using MANUAL SETUP

+10

789

CH LEVEL MENU

RETURNTEST

TV VOL

VOLUME

YSP

TV/AV

ENTER

SUR. DECODE

YSP

TV/AV

;MEMORY

;AUTO SETUP

;MANUAL SETUP

;LANGUAGE SETUP

[ ]/[ ]:Up/Down

[ENTER]:Enter

SET MENU

ENTER

1)SOUND MENU

2)BEAM MENU

3)INPUT MENU

4)DISPLAY MENU

[ ]/[ ]:Up/Down

[ENTER]:Enter

;MANUAL SETUP

ENTER

58 En

MANUAL SETUP

Use to manually adjust the various parameters related to

the sound beam output.

SET MENU → MANUAL SETUP → BEAM MENU

You can adjust the sound beam output level of each channel in

“Adjusting the audio balance” (see page 67).

■ SETTING PARAMETERS

(Setting parameters)

Use to set the position of this unit in your listening room

and the distance of this unit from the listening position.

When you make settings for each parameter, other related

parameters are automatically adjusted to best match your

listening environment.

If you make adjustments in SETTING PARAMETERS, the beam

optimization settings made in the AUTO SETUP procedure will

be lost. If you want to keep the beam optimization settings made

in the AUTO SETUP and make further adjustments, adjust

settings in BEAM ADJUSTMENT first (see page 59).

INSTALLED POSITION

(Installed position of this unit)

Use to adjust the installed position of this unit.

Choices: FLAT TO WALL (Parallel to wall installation),

ANGLE TO WALL OR CORNER

(Corner installation)

• Select FLAT TO WALL if this unit is installed in

parallel with the wall in your listening room. Adjust the

width and length of your listening room as well as the

distance of the listening position from this unit and the

distance of the center of this unit from the left wall.

Choices for the room width and length:

2.0 m to 12.0 m (6.5 ft to 40.0 ft)

Choices for the listening position from this unit:

1.8 m to 9.0 m (6.0 ft to 30.0 ft)

Choices for the listening position from the left wall:

0.6 m to 11.4 m (2.0 ft to 38.0 ft)

BEAM MENU

Note

A)SETTING PARAMETERS

B)BEAM ADJUSTMENT

C)IMAGE LOCATION

[ ]/[ ]:Up/Down

[ENTER]:Enter

2)BEAM MENU

INSTALLED POSITION

;;;;;;;FLAT TO WALL

[ ]/[ ]:Up/Down [ ]/[ ]:Sel

[ENTER]:Return

A)SETTING PARAMETERS 1/3

FLAT TO WALL

ANGLE TO WALL

OR CORNER

Listening position

from the left wall

Listening position

from the unit

Room width

Room length

A)SETTING PARAMETERS 2/3

-------[ 5.4m ]-

4.9m

[ ]/[ ]:Up/Down [ ]/[ ]:Sel

[ENTER]:Return

--------|

2.7m [ 2.5m ]

[ ]/[ ]:Up/Down [ ]/[ ]:Sel

[ENTER]:Return

A)SETTING PARAMETERS 3/3

Room width and

length

Listening position

from the unit and

the left wall

59 En

MANUAL SETUP

ADVANCED

OPERATION

English

• Select ANGLE TO WALL OR CORNER if this unit is

installed in the corner of your listening room. Adjust

the width and length of your listening room as well as

the distance of the listening position from this unit.

Choices for the room width and length:

2.0 m to 12.0 m (6.5 ft to 40.0 ft)

Choices for the listening position from this unit:

1.8 m to 9.0 m (6.0 ft to 30.0 ft)

When you set the INSTALLED POSITION parameter in

MANUAL SETUP (see page 58), the parameters newly set for

the width and length of your listening room are automatically set

as the factory default value.

■ BEAM ADJUSTMENT (Beam adjustment)

Use to manually adjust the various sound beam settings.

We recommend that you select 5 Beam as the beam mode

before adjusting these parameters (see page 44).

• When INSTALLED POSITION is adjusted in MANUAL

SETUP (see page 58), the factory default value is automatically

set for this parameter except Center in FOCAL LENGTH (see

page 60).

• Depending on the beam mode settings (see pages 44 and 50),

some channel positions may not be available for selection. In

this case, “– –” is displayed. When using Stereo plus 3 Beam as

the beam mode, set the surround left and right signals to be

output from the front left and right channels.

HORIZONTAL ANGLE (Horizontal angle)

Use to adjust the horizontal angle of sound beams for each

channel. By adjusting the horizontal angle of the sound

beams, you can optimize the sound beam paths. A test

tone is automatically output.

Choices: L90° to R90°

Adjust toward L (left) to move the direction of the output

to the left and adjust toward R (right) to move it to the

right.

Note

Listening position

from the unit

Room length

Room width

----- 5.4m ---

[ 5.4m ]

[ ]/[ ]:Up/Down [ ]/[ ]:Sel

[ENTER]:Return

A)SETTING PARAMETERS 2/3

[ 2.5m ]

[ ]/[ ]:Up/Down [ ]/[ ]:Sel

[ENTER]:Return

A)SETTING PARAMETERS 3/3

Room width and

length

Listening

position from the

unit

Notes

a)HORIZONTAL ANGLE

b)BEAM TRAVEL LENGTH

c)FOCAL LENGTH

d)TREBLE GAIN

[ ]/[ ]:Up/Down

[ENTER]:Enter

B)BEAM ADJUSTMENT

( )

(+)

( )

5 beam

Front L L90 R90

L65deg

0(deg)

[ ]/[ ]:Up/Down [ ]/[ ]:Sel

[ENTER]:Return

a)HORIZONTAL ANGLE 1/5

60 En

MANUAL SETUP

BEAM TRAVEL LENGTH (Beam travel length)

A certain amount of delay must be applied to the sound

from each channel so that all sounds can arrive at the

listening position at the same time. This menu sets the

distance that sound beams travel after being output and

reflected off the wall until they arrive at the listening

position and adjusts the delay applied to the respective

channel.

The lines in the illustration below indicate the distance.

Choices: 0.3 m to 24.0 m (1.0 ft to 80.0 ft)

• Front L adjusts the distance the front left channel

sound beams travel.

• Front R adjusts the distance the front right channel

sound beams travel.

• Center adjusts the distance the center channel sound

beams travel.

• Surround L adjusts the distance the surround left

channel sound beams travel.

• Surround R adjusts the distance the surround right

channel sound beams travel.

We recommend that you use the setting optimized by AUTO

SETUP (see page 31). Adjust this parameter only when you

changed HORIZONTAL ANGLE (see page 59).

FOCAL LENGTH (Focal length)

Use to set the distance from the front of this unit to the

focal point of output for each channel to achieve an

expansive feeling for each channel.

The focal points except for the center channel should be

set near the reflection points on the walls. The shorter the

distance, the larger the expansion.

Choices: –1.0 m to +13.0 m (–3.5 ft to +43.5 ft)

Adjust toward – (minus) to move the focus outward and

adjust toward + (plus) to move the focus toward the

normal position.

• Front L adjusts the focal length for the front left sound

beams.

• Front R adjusts the focal length for the front right

sound beams.

• Center adjusts the focal length for the center sound

beams. Initial setting: –0.3 m (–1.0 ft)

• Surround L adjusts the focal length for the surround

left sound beams.

• Surround R adjusts the focal length for the surround

right sound beams.

We recommend that you use the initial setting (–0.3 m

(or –1.0 ft)) for the center channel.

5 beam

Front L;;;;;;;6.0m

Front R;;;;;;;6.0m

Center;;;;;;;;2.5m

Surround L;;;;9.1m

Surround R;;;;9.1m

[ ]/[ ]:Up/Down [ ]/[ ]:Sel

[ENTER]:Return

b)BEAM TRAVEL LENGTH

focal length

focal point

sweet spot

Front left channel Center channel

5 beam

Front L;;;;;;+1.5m

Front R;;;;;;+1.5m

Center;;;;;;;-0.3m

Surround L;;;+2.3m

Surround R;;;+2.3m

[ ]/[ ]:Up/Down [ ]/[ ]:Sel

[ENTER]:Return

c)FOCAL LENGTH

61 En

MANUAL SETUP

ADVANCED

OPERATION

English

TREBLE GAIN (Treble gain)

Use to adjust the high-frequency output level of each

channel.

If the reflection points of the front left and right or surround left

and right sound beams are on curtain or other acoustically

absorbent surfaces, you can achieve more effective surround

sound by increasing the treble level for those sound beams.

Choices: –12.0 dB to +12.0 dB

Initial setting: 0 dB

• Front L adjusts the high-frequency output level of the

front left channel.

• Front R adjusts the high-frequency output level of the

front right channel.

• Center adjusts the high-frequency output level of the

center channel.

• Surround L adjusts the high-frequency output level

of the surround left channel.

• Surround R adjusts the high-frequency output level

of the surround right channel.

■ IMAGE LOCATION (Image location)

Use to adjust the direction from which the front left and

right channel sound is heard so that each sound can be

heard closer to the center channel.

Use this feature to redirect audio signals if the sound

coming from the front left and right channels seems

unnatural, such as when your listening position is not the

center of your listening room.

You can only adjust this parameter when 3 Beam or 5

Beam is selected as the beam mode (see page 44).

Choices: ON, OFF

Setting range: 0% to 95%

Initial setting: 0%

LEFT (Left)

Adjusts audio signals toward the left.

The higher the percentage, the louder the output from the

center.

RIGHT (Right)

Adjusts audio signals toward the right.

The higher the percentage, the louder the output from the

center.

- +

Front L;;;;;;;;0dB

Front R;;;;;;;;0dB

Center;;;;;;;;;0dB

Surround L;;;;;0dB

Surround R;;;;;0dB

[ ]/[ ]:Up/Down [ ]/[ ]:Sel

[ENTER]:Return

d)TREBLE GAIN

------

OFF )ON

LCR

LEFT;;;;;;;;;;;0%

RIGHT;;;;;;;;;;0%

[ ]/[ ]:Up/Down [ ]/[ ]:Sel

[ENTER]:Return

C)IMAGE LOCATION

Without adjustment

With the front left

channel adjusted

Without adjustment

With the front right

channel adjusted

62 En

MANUAL SETUP

Use to manually adjust the various parameters related to

the sound output.

SET MENU → MANUAL SETUP → SOUND MENU

■ TONE CONTROL (Tone control)

You can adjust the tonal quality of sound beams.

TREBLE (Treble)

Use to adjust the high-frequency response.

Choices: –12 dB to +12 dB

Initial setting: 0 dB

BASS (Bass)

Use to adjust the low-frequency response.

Choices: –12 dB to +12 dB

Initial setting: 0 dB

■ SUBWOOFER SET (Subwoofer settings)

Use to manually adjust the various subwoofer

settings.

BASS OUT (Bass out)

Low-frequency (bass) signals can be directed to the

subwoofer and/or the front left and right channels. This

setting also determines the routing of LFE (low-frequency

effect) signals found in Dolby Digital or DTS sources.

Choices: SWFR (Subwoofer), FRONT

• Select SWFR if you connect a subwoofer. LFE and

low-frequency signals from other channels are directed

to the subwoofer.

• Select FRONT if you do not use a subwoofer. LFE and

low-frequency signals from other channels are directed

to the front left and right channels.

CROSS OVER (Crossover)

When BASS OUT is set to SWFR, you can use this

feature to select a crossover (cutoff) frequency for all low-

frequency signals. All frequencies below the selected

frequency will be sent to the subwoofer position.

Choices: 100Hz, 120Hz, 150Hz

LFE LEVEL (Low-frequency effect level)

Select to adjust the output level of the LFE (low-frequency

effect) channel according to the capacity of your

subwoofer. The LFE channel carries low-frequency

special effects which are only added to certain scenes.

This setting is effective only when this unit decodes Dolby

Digital or DTS signals.

Choices: –20 to 0 dB

DISTANCE (Distance)

Select to adjust the distance of the subwoofer from the

listening position.

Choices: 0.3 to 15.0 m (1.0 ft to 50.0 ft)

Initial setting: 3.0 m (10.0 ft)

■ MUTE LEVEL (Muting level)

Use to adjust how much the mute function reduces the

volume level.

Choices: MUTE, –20 dB

• Select MUTE to completely halt all sound output.

• Select –20 dB to reduce the current volume level by

20 dB.

SOUND MENU

A)TONE CONTROL

B)SUBWOOFER SET

C)MUTE LEVEL

D)AUDIO DELAY

E)DD/DTS Dynamic Range

F)TruBass

[ ]/[ ]:Up/Down

[ENTER]:Enter

1)SOUND MENU

TREBLE;;;;;0dB

BASS;;;;;;;0dB

[ ]/[ ]:Up/Down [ ]/[ ]:Sel

[ENTER]:Return

A)TONE CONTROL

------

BASS OUT;;;;;FRONT

CROSS OVER;;;100Hz

LFE LEVEL;;;;;;0dB

DISTANCE;;;;;;3.0m

[ ]/[ ]:Up/Down [ ]/[ ]:Sel

[ENTER]:Return

B)SUBWOOFER SET

MUTE -20dB

[ ]/[ ]:Select

[ENTER]:Return

C)MUTE LEVEL

63 En

MANUAL SETUP

ADVANCED

OPERATION

English

■ AUDIO DELAY (Audio delay)

Use to delay the sound output and synchronize it with the

video image. This may be necessary when using certain

LCD monitors or projectors.

Choices: 0 to 160 msec

■ DD/DTS Dynamic Range

(Dynamic range of Dolby Digital and

DTS signals)

Use to select the amount of dynamic range compression.

This setting is effective only when the unit is decoding

Dolby Digital and DTS signals. Dynamic range is the

difference between the smallest sound that can be heard

above the noise of the equipment and the biggest sound

that can be heard without distortion.

Choices: MIN (minimum), STD (standard),

MAX (maximum)

Select to adjust the dynamic range compression.

• Select MIN for listening to sources at low volume

levels.

• Select STD for general use.

• Select MAX for feature films.

■ TruBass

Use to turn on or off the bass sound enhancer. The SRS

TruBass technology improves bass even without a

subwoofer and provides deeper, richer bass in the presence

of a subwoofer.

Choices: OFF, ON

TruBass is not available when My Beam (see page 51) or My

Surround (see page 45) is selected as the beam mode.

AUDIO DELAY;;;;;0msec

[ ]/[ ]:Select

[ENTER]:Return

D)AUDIO DELAY

MIN STD MAX

[ ]/[ ]:Select

[ENTER]:Return

E)DD/DTS Dynamic Range

Note

OFF ON

[ ]/[ ]:Select

[ENTER]:Return

F)TruBass

64 En

MANUAL SETUP

Use to manually adjust the various parameters related to

the audio and video input.

SET MENU → MANUAL SETUP → INPUT MENU

■ INPUT MODE (Input mode)

Use to designate the input mode for the input sources

connected to the DIGITAL INPUT jacks when you turn on

the power of this unit. For information on the types of

audio signals that can be output by this unit, see “Selecting

the input mode” on page 70.

Choices: AUTO, LAST

• Select AUTO to set this unit to automatically detect the

type of input signals and select the appropriate input

mode.

• Select LAST to set this unit to automatically select the

last input mode used for that input source. If the type of

input signals is different from the setting, no sounds

will be produced.

■ INPUT TRIM (Input trim)

Use to adjust the input level of the input source.

• Select TV/STB ANALOG to adjust the level of audio

and video signals input at the TV/STB AUDIO INPUT

jacks of this unit.

Control range: –6.0 dB to 0.0 dB

Initial setting: –3.0 dB

• Select TV/STB DIGITAL to adjust the level of audio

and video signals input at the TV/STB OPTICAL

DIGITAL INPUT jack of this unit.

Control range: –6.0 dB to 0.0 dB

Initial setting: –3.0 dB

• Select VCR ANALOG to adjust the level of audio and

video signals input at the VCR AUDIO INPUT jacks

of this unit.

Control range: –6.0 dB to 0.0 dB

Initial setting: –3.0 dB

• Select DVD DIGITAL to adjust the level of audio and

video signals input at the DVD COAXIAL DIGITAL

INPUT jack of this unit.

Control range: –6.0 dB to 0.0 dB

Initial setting: –3.0 dB

• Select AUX DIGITAL to adjust the level of audio and

video signals input at the AUX OPTICAL DIGITAL

INPUT jack of this unit.

Control range: –6.0 dB to 0.0 dB

Initial setting: –3.0 dB

INPUT MENU

A)INPUT MODE

B)INPUT TRIM

C)INPUT RENAME

[ ]/[ ]:Up/Down

[ENTER]:Enter

3)INPUT MENU

AUTO LAST

[ ]/[ ]:Select

[ENTER]:Return

A)INPUT MODE

TV/STB ANALOG;;;-3.0dB

DIGITAL;;-3.0dB

VCR ANALOG;;;-3.0dB

DVD DIGITAL;;-3.0dB

AUX DIGITAL;;-3.0dB

[ ]/[ ]:Up/Down [ ]/[ ]:Sel

[ENTER]:Return

B)INPUT TRIM

65 En

MANUAL SETUP

ADVANCED

OPERATION

English

■ INPUT RENAME (Input rename)

Use to change the name of the input source in the OSD

and the front panel display. Press an input selector button

(e.g., DVD) to select the component you want to change

the name for and perform the following procedure.

1 Press / to place the _ (underscore) under

the space or the character you want to edit.

The _ (underscore) flashes.

2 Press / to select the desired character.

• You can use up to 8 characters for each input.

• Press to change the character in the following

order or press to go in the reverse order:

A to Z, a space, 0 to 9, a space, a to z, a space, #, *,

+, etc.

3 Repeat steps 1 to 2 to rename each input.

4 Press ENTER to exit.

The new names are registered, and the display returns

to the previous screen.

DVD -> DVD

[ ]/[ ]:Position

[ ]/[ ]:Character

[ENTER]:Return

C)INPUT RENAME

ENTER

66 En

MANUAL SETUP

Use to manually adjust the various parameters related to

the display.

SET MENU → MANUAL SETUP → DISPLAY MENU

■ F.DISPLAY SET

(Front panel display settings)

Use to adjust the brightness and display settings of the

front panel display.

STANDARD DIMMER (Standard dimmer)

Use to adjust the brightness of the front panel display

when you operate this unit by using the control buttons on

the front panel or on the remote control.

Choices: –2, –1, OFF

AUTO DIMMER (Auto dimmer)

If no operation is performed for a specified period of time,

the front panel display dims. Use to adjust the brightness

of the front panel display in this case.

Choices: OFF (the same brightness as the STANDARD

DIMMER setting), –1 to –3 (based on the

STANDARD DIMMER setting), DISPLAY OFF

■ OSD SET (OSD settings)

Use to adjust the display position and to set the display

time of the OSD.

OSD SHIFT (OSD shift)

Use to adjust the vertical position of the OSD. Adjust

toward the – (minus) direction to raise the position of the

OSD, and adjust toward the + (plus) direction to lower it.

Choices: –5 to +5

Initial setting: 0

■ UNIT SET (Unit settings)

Use this to change the display unit of measurement.

Choices: METERS, FEET

• Select METERS to enter distances in meters.

• Select FEET to enter distances in feet.

If you change this setting, the adjusted sound beam settings may

change.

DISPLAY MENU

A)F.DISPLAY SET

B)OSD SET

C)UNIT SET

[ ]/[ ]:Up/Down

[ENTER]:Enter

4)DISPLAY MENU

STANDARD DIMMER;;;;;OFF

AUTO DIMMER

;;;;;;;;;;;;;OFF

[ ]/[ ]:Up/Down [ ]/[ ]:Sel

[ENTER]:Return

A)F.DISPLAY SET

Note

OSD SHIFT;;;;;;;;;;0

[ ]/[ ]:Select

[ENTER]:Return

B)OSD SET

METERS FEET

[ ]/[ ]:Select

[ENTER]:Return

C)UNIT SET

Adjusting the audio balance

67 En

ADVANCED

OPERATION

English

You can adjust the sound beam output level of each channel by using the test tone or the audio output being played back

in each beam mode to achieve a more true-to-life surround sound experience.

You can use the test tone feature to output a test tone from

each channel to manually balance the channel levels.

Use this to set the channel levels so that the volume level

of each channel is identical when heard from your

listening position.

1 Set the operation mode selector to YSP.

2 Press TEST.

“TEST LEFT” appears in the front panel display and

a test tone is output from the front left channel.

3 Press / to select the channel you want

to adjust.

The front panel display changes as follows:

“TEST SUBWOOFER” is only available when a subwoofer

is connected to this unit and SWFR is selected for BASS

OUT in SOUND MENU (see page 62).

4 Press / to adjust the channel volume.

Control range: –10.0 dB to +10.0 dB

Adjusting the audio balance

Using the test tone

CH LEVEL MENU

RETURNTEST

YSP

TV/AV

ENTER

YSP

TV/AV

TEST

TESTX LEFT

Note

ENTER

TEST FRONT L

TEST CENTER

TEST FRONT R

TEST SUR.R

TEST SUR.L

TEST SUBWOOFER

ENTER

68 En

Adjusting the audio balance

5 Press TEST when you have completed all

your adjustments.

• All channel levels cannot be adjusted when the stereo playback

(see page 50), My Beam (see page 51), or My Surround (see

page 45) is selected as the beam mode.

• “FRONT L/R” cannot be adjusted when Stereo plus 3 Beam is

selected as the beam mode (see page 45).

• “FRONT L/R” are automatically adjusted depending on the

settings of the other channels when Stereo plus 3 Beam or

stereo playback is selected as the beam mode (see pages 45 and

50).

If the level of a particular channel cannot be adjusted, “– –dB”

appears in the front panel display.

You can also manually adjust the channel levels while

playing back an input source such as a DVD.

1 Set the operation mode selector to YSP.

2 Press CH LEVEL repeatedly (or press

CH LEVEL and / ) to select the channel

you want to adjust.

The front panel display changes as follows.

“SWFR” is available only when a subwoofer is connected to

this unit and SWFR is selected for BASS OUT in SOUND

MENU (see page 62).

Notes

Using the audio output being

played back

TEST

CH LEVEL MENU

RETURNTEST

YSP

TV/AV

ENTER

Note

YSP

TV/AV

CH LEVEL

ENTER

CH LEVEL

FRONT L +1.0dB

CENTER -2.5dB

FRONT R +1.0dB

SUR.R +2.0dB

SUR.L +2.0dB

SWFR --dB

69 En

Adjusting the audio balance

ADVANCED

OPERATION

English

3 Press / to adjust the channel volume.

Control range: –10.0 dB to +10.0 dB

4 Wait for a few seconds without operating this

unit when you have completed your

adjustment.

• All channel levels cannot be adjusted when the stereo playback

(see page 50), or My Surround (see page 45) is selected as the

beam mode.

• “FRONT L/R” cannot be adjusted when Stereo plus 3 Beam is

selected as the beam mode (see page 41).

• Only CENTER can be adjusted when My Beam is selected as

the beam mode (see page 51).

• “FRONT L/R” are automatically adjusted depending on the

settings of the other channels when Stereo plus 3 Beam or

stereo playback is selected as the beam mode (see pages 45 and

50).

If the level of a particular channel cannot be adjusted, “– –dB”

appears in the front panel display.

Notes

ENTER

Selecting the input mode

70 En

You can select the type of audio input signals of the selected input source according to your preference or the conditions

of the input source. This function is available for TV/STB, DVD, and AUX.

We recommend setting the input mode to AUTO in most cases.

1 Set the operation mode selector to YSP.

2 Press one of the input selector buttons to

select the desired input source.

3 Press INPUTMODE repeatedly to toggle

between input modes.

ANALOG is not available as the input mode of DVD and

AUX.

•AUTO

Automatically selects audio input signals in the following

priority order:

1) Dolby Digital or DTS

2) PCM

3) Analog

Use this input mode in most cases.

•DTS

Selects only digital signals encoded in DTS.

Compared to AUTO, this input mode provides greater

stability while playing back CDs or LDs encoded in DTS.

•ANALOG

Selects only analog signals.

Even when both digital and analog signals are input

simultaneously, only analog signals are selected.

You can adjust the default input mode to be selected when the

power of this unit is turned on by adjusting INPUT MODE in

INPUT MENU (see page 64).

Selecting the input mode

321

+10

789

STEREO

MY BEAM

SLEEP

INPUTMODE

CH LEVEL MENU

RETURNTEST

5BEAM ST+3BEAM 3BEAM

VOL MODE

AUTO

SETUP

MACRO

INPUT2INPUT1

YSP

TV/AV

STB

VCR DVD AUX

TVAV

ENTER

SUR. DECODE

MY SUR.

YSP

TV/AV

AUX

DVDVCRSTB

Note

TV/STB AUTO

TV/STB DTS

TV/STB ANALOG

DVD AUTO

DVD DTS

INPUTMODE

When TV or STB is selected

as the input source

When DVD is selected

as the input source

AUX AUTO

AUX DTS

When AUX is selected as

the input source

Adjusting the system parameters

71 En

ADVANCED

OPERATION

English

This unit has additional menus that are displayed in the front panel display. These menus offer additional operations to

adjust and customize the way this unit operates.

When “F.PANEL KEY” is set to “F.PANEL: OFF” (see page 76), STANDBY/ON on the front panel is ineffective. Use STANDBY/ON

on the remote control instead to adjust the system parameters.

Follow the procedure below to enter the system

parameters.

1 Press STANDBY/ON on the remote control to

turn off the power of this unit.

2 Press and hold INPUT on the front panel and

press STANDBY/ON on the remote control to

turn on the power of this unit.

“MEMORY PROTECT” is displayed in the front

panel display.

3 Release INPUT on the front panel.

Adjusting the system parameters

Note

Using the system parameters

INPUT VOLUME STANDBY/ON

CH LEVEL MENU

RETURNTEST

YSP

TV/AV

ENTER

MACRO

INPUT2INPUT1

STB

VCR DVD AUX

TVAV

POWERPOWERSTANDBY/ON

STANDBY/ON

INPUT

STANDBY/ON

MEMORYX PROTECT

INPUT

72 En

Adjusting the system parameters

You can protect the settings you saved in the system

memory of this unit from being accidentally erased or

unwantedly changed.

1 Repeat steps 1 to 3 in “Using the system

parameters” on page 71.

2 Set the operation mode selector to YSP.

3 Confirm that “MEMORY PROTECT” is

displayed in the front panel display and

press ENTER.

4 Press / to switch between “PROTECT:

ON” and “PROTECT: OFF”.

• Select PROTECT: ON to activate the protection

feature.

• Select PROTECT: OFF to deactivate the protection

feature.

5 Press STANDBY/ON on the remote control to

set this unit to the standby mode.

The new setting will be activated when you turn on

the power of this unit next time.

Setting the MEMORY PROTECT

YSP

TV/AV

ENTER

MEMORYX PROTECT

ENTER

X PROTECT:X ON

X PROTECT:X OFF

STANDBY/ON

73 En

Adjusting the system parameters

ADVANCED

OPERATION

English

You can set the maximum volume level so that this unit

will not output sound beyond the limited volume level.

1 Repeat steps 1 to 3 in “Using the system

parameters” on page 71.

2 Set the operation mode selector to YSP.

“

3 Press / so that “MAX VOLUME SET” is

displayed in the front panel display.

4 Press ENTER.

5 Press / to adjust the maximum volume

level.

Control range: MAX, 99 to 01, MIN

Control step: 1

6 Press STANDBY/ON on the remote control to

set this unit to the standby mode.

The new setting for the maximum volume level will

be activated when you turn on the power of this unit

next time.

You can set the initial volume level when the power of this

unit is turned on.

1 Repeat steps 1 to 3 in “Using the system

parameters” on page 71.

2 Set the operation mode selector to YSP.

Setting the MAX VOLUME

YSP

TV/AV

ENTER

MAXX VOLUMEX SET

ENTER

Setting the TURN ON VOLUME

ENTER

STANDBY/ON

YSP

TV/AV

74 En

Adjusting the system parameters

3 Press / so that “TURN ON VOLUME” is

displayed in the front panel display.

4 Press ENTER.

5 Press / to adjust the initial volume level.

Control range: MAX, 99 to 01, OFF

Control step: 1

6 Press STANDBY/ON on the remote control to

set this unit to the standby mode.

The new setting for the maximum volume level will

be activated when you turn on the power of this unit

next time.

You can test the sound beam output from this unit to

experience the sound beam.

1 Repeat steps 1 to 3 in “Using the system

parameters” on page 71.

2 Set the operation mode selector to YSP.

3 Press / so that “DEMO MODE” is

displayed in the front panel display.

4 Press ENTER.

ENTER

TURNX ONX VOLUME

ENTER

STANDBY/ON

Setting the DEMO MODE

YSP

TV/AV

ENTER

DEMOX MODE

ENTER

75 En

Adjusting the system parameters

ADVANCED

OPERATION

English

5 Press / to switch between “DEMO: ON”

and “DEMO: OFF”.

• Select DEMO: ON to activate the demo mode.

• Select DEMO: OFF to deactivate the demo mode.

6 Press STANDBY/ON on the remote control to

set this unit to the standby mode.

The new setting will be activated when you turn on

the power of this unit next time.

Press ENTER while playing back sources to test the

sound beam.

The sound beam being output shuttles between left

and right. Press ENTER again to stop shuttling.

You can disable the INPUT on the front panel when you

adjust the system parameters.

1 Repeat steps 1 to 3 in “Using the system

parameters” on page 71.

2 Set the operation mode selector to YSP.

3 Press / so that “PANEL INP. KEY” is

displayed in the front panel display.

4 Press ENTER.

ENTER

X DEMO:XXON

X DEMO:XXOFF

STANDBY/ON

Setting the PANEL INP. KEY

YSP

TV/AV

ENTER

PANELX INP.X KEY

ENTER

76 En

Adjusting the system parameters

5 Press / to switch between “P.INPUT: ON”

and “P.INPUT: OFF”.

• Select P.INPUT: ON to enable the INPUT key on

the front panel.

• Select P.INPUT: OFF to disable the INPUT key on

the front panel. “F.PANEL KEY” is automatically

set to “ON”.

6 Press STANDBY/ON on the remote control to

set this unit to the standby mode.

The new setting will be activated when you turn on

the power of this unit next time.

You can disable the front panel keys except when you

adjust the system parameters.

1 Repeat steps 1 to 3 in “Using the system

parameters” on page 71.

2 Set the operation mode selector to YSP.

3 Press / so that “F.PANEL KEY” is

displayed in the front panel display.

4 Press ENTER.

ENTER

X P.INPUT:X ON

X P.INPUT:X OFF

STANDBY/ON

Disabling the front panel keys

YSP

TV/AV

ENTER

F.PANELX KEY

ENTER

77 En

Adjusting the system parameters

ADVANCED

OPERATION

English

5 Press / to switch between “F.PANEL:

ON” and “F.PANEL: OFF”.

• Select F.PANEL: ON to enable the front panel

keys.

• Select F.PANEL: OFF to disable the front panel

keys. “P.INPUT” is automatically set to “ON”.

6 Press STANDBY/ON on the remote control to

set this unit to the standby mode.

The new setting will be activated when you turn on

the power of this unit next time.

You can reset all of the parameters of this unit to the

factory presets. This procedure completely resets ALL the

parameters in SET MENU.

After performing the following procedure you must run AUTO

SETUP again to match your surround sound environment.

1 Repeat steps 1 to 3 in “Using the system

parameters” on page 71.

2 Set the operation mode selector to YSP.

3 Press / so that “FACTORY PRESET” is

displayed in the front panel display.

4 Press ENTER.

ENTER

X F.PANEL:X ON

X F.PANEL:X OFF

STANDBY/ON

Setting the FACTORY PRESET

Note

YSP

TV/AV

ENTER

FACTORYX PRESET

ENTER

78 En

Adjusting the system parameters

5 Press / to switch between “PRESET:

RESET” and “PRESET: CANCEL”.

• Select PRESET: RESET to reset all of the current

settings.

• Select PRESET: CANCEL to cancel the resetting

procedure.

6 Press STANDBY/ON on the remote control to

set this unit to the standby mode.

The new setting will be activated when you turn on

the power of this unit next time.

ENTER

X PRESET:X RESET

X PRESET:CANCEL

STANDBY/ON

Remote control features

79 En

ADVANCED

OPERATION

English

In addition to controlling this unit, the remote control can also operate other AV components made by Yamaha and other

manufacturers. To control other components, you must set up the remote control with the appropriate remote control

codes and set the operation mode selector to TV/AV to change the control area.

Depending on the external AV component you are using, you may not be able to operate the component with the remote control, even if

a remote control code is set. In this case, operate the component using the supplied remote control.

You can control other components by setting the

appropriate remote control codes. Codes can be set up for

each input area (STB, VCR, DVD, AUX, and TV).

For a complete list of available remote control codes, refer

to “List of remote control codes” at the end of this manual.

1 Press and hold CODE SET and press one of

the input selector buttons to select the input

source you want to set a remote control code

for.

The transmission indicator flashes twice and remains

lit.

Proceed to step 2 while holding down CODE SET.

2 Press the numeric buttons to enter the

remote control code while holding down

CODE SET.

3 Refer to “Controlling other components” on

page 80 to operate the external component

using the remote control.

If the external component functions correctly the

remote control code setup is successful.

If the external component does not function correctly,

the remote control code may be incorrect. Confirm

that the remote control code is correct. See “List of

remote control codes” at the end of this manual and

start over from step 1.

If the manufacturer of your component has more than one code,

try each of them until you find the correct one.

Remote control features

Note

Setting remote control codes

321

+10

789

STEREO

MY BEAM

SLEEP

INPUTMODE

MUTE

TV INPUT TV MUTE

CODE SET

5BEAM ST+3BEAM 3BEAM

VOL MODE

AUTO

SETUP

MACRO

INPUT2INPUT1

STB

VCR DVD AUX

TVAV

SUR. DECODE

MY SUR.

Transmission indicator

TV MUTE

CODE SET

While holding

down, press

AUX

DVDVCRSTB

Note

If the remote control is without batteries for more than

two minutes, or if exhausted batteries remain in the

remote control, the contents of the memory may be

cleared. When the memory is cleared, insert new

batteries and reset the remote control codes.

When changing the batteries, be careful not to press

any of the buttons on the remote control. Doing so will

clear the contents of the memory.

MY SUR.

Setting example: Yamaha DVD input area

TV MUTE

CODE SET

While holding

down, press

80 En

Remote control features

■ Operating your TV

Set the operation mode selector to TV/AV, and

press TV to select TV as the input source.

The control area of the remote control changes to the TV

operation mode.

1 Numeric buttons

Selects a TV channel for playback.

2 CH +/–

Switches between the available TV channels.

3 TV INPUT

Switches the input source for your TV.

4 TV POWER

Turns on or off the power of your TV.

5 TV INPUT1/2

Selects the input source of your TV.

6 TV VOL +/–

Adjusts the audio output level of your TV.

7 TV MUTE

Temporarily mutes audio output from your TV.

Controlling other components

YSP

TV/AV

321

+10

STEREO

MY BEAM

SLEEP

INPUTMODE

CH LEVEL MENU

RETURNTEST

TV VOL

VOLUME

MUTE

TV INPUT TV MUTE

CODE SET

5BEAM ST+3BEAM 3BEAM

VOL MODE

AUTO

SETUP

MACRO

INPUT2INPUT1

YSP

TV/AV

STB

VCR DVD AUX

TVAV

POWERPOWERSTANDBY/ON

ENTER

SUR. DECODE

MY SUR.

81 En

Remote control features

ADVANCED

OPERATION

English

■ Operating your DVD player/recorder

Set the operation mode selector to TV/AV and

press DVD to select DVD as the input source.

The control area of the remote control changes to the DVD

operation mode.

1 Numeric buttons

Enter numeric digits.

2 Cursor buttons / / / , ENTER

Use to select DVD menu items.

3 Operation buttons for DVD players

Operate your DVD player/recorder, such as play and stop.

4 AV POWER

Turns on or off the power of your DVD player/recorder.

5 MENU

Displays the DVD menu.

6 RETURN

Use to return to the previous DVD menu screen or exit

from the DVD menu.

■ Operating your STB

(CATV/Satellite tuner)

Set the operation mode selector to TV/AV and

press STB to select STB as the input source.

The control area of the remote control changes to the STB

operation mode.

1 Numeric buttons

Enter numeric digits.

2 CH +/–

Switches between the available STB channels.

3 AV POWER

Turns on or off the power of your STB.

DVD

YSP

TV/AV

321

+10

STEREO

MY BEAM

SLEEP

INPUTMODE

CH LEVEL MENU

RETURNTEST

TV VOL

VOLUME

MUTE

TV INPUT TV MUTE

CODE SET

5BEAM ST+3BEAM 3BEAM

VOL MODE

AUTO

SETUP

MACRO

INPUT2INPUT1

YSP

TV/AV

STB

VCR DVD AUX

TVAV

POWERPOWERSTANDBY/ON

ENTER

SUR. DECODE

MY SUR.

STB

YSP

TV/AV

321

+10

789

STEREO

MY BEAM

SLEEP

INPUTMODE

CH LEVEL MENU

RETURNTEST

TV VOL

VOLUME

MUTE

TV INPUT TV MUTE

CODE SET

5BEAM ST+3BEAM 3BEAM

VOL MODE

AUTO

SETUP

MACRO

INPUT2INPUT1

YSP

TV/AV

STB

VCR DVD AUX

TVAV

POWERPOWERSTANDBY/ON

ENTER

SUR. DECODE

MY SUR.

82 En

Remote control features

■ Operating your VCR

Set the operation mode selector to TV/AV and

press VCR to select VCR as the input source.

The control area of the remote control changes to the VCR

operation mode.

1 Numeric buttons

Enter numeric digits.

2 CH +/–

Switches between the available VCR channels.

3 Operation buttons for VCR

Operate your VCR, such as play and stop.

4 AV POWER

Turns on or off the power of your VCR.

VCR

YSP

TV/AV

321

+10

STEREO

MY BEAM

SLEEP

INPUTMODE

CH LEVEL MENU

RETURNTEST

TV VOL

VOLUME

MUTE

TV INPUT TV MUTE

CODE SET

5BEAM ST+3BEAM 3BEAM

VOL MODE

AUTO

SETUP

MACRO

INPUT2INPUT1

YSP

TV/AV

STB

VCR DVD AUX

TVAV

POWERPOWERSTANDBY/ON

ENTER

SUR. DECODE

MY SUR.

83 En

Remote control features

ADVANCED

OPERATION

English

The TV macro feature makes it possible to perform a

series of operations with the press of a single button. For

example, when you want to play a DVD, you would

normally turn on the component, select DVD as the input

source, and press the play button to start playback. The TV

macro feature lets you perform all of these operations

simply by pressing the DVD macro button.

• Be sure to set up a remote control code for your TV before

setting macros.

• The ways to set macros differ if your TV does not have the

tuning capability.

• If you press any control buttons on the remote control other than

the ones used to set macros while setting macros, the setting

procedure is automatically canceled.

• If it takes more than 10 seconds in steps 2 and 3, the setting

procedure is automatically canceled. In this case, repeat from

step 1.

■ Setting macros for the TV with the

tuning capability

1 Press and hold CODE SET and press one of

the input selector buttons to select the input

source you want to set macros for.

Proceed to step 2 while holding down CODE SET.

2 Press MACRO while holding down CODE

SET.

3 Press CH +/– or the numeric buttons to select

the TV channel.

Check that the TV screen changes to the tuner screen.

4 Press TV INPUT repeatedly until the screen

changes to the display of the input source

selected in step 1.

5 Press ENTER to confirm the macro setting.

Using the TV macro

Notes

321

+10

STEREO

MY BEAM

SLEEP

INPUTMODE

CH LEVEL MENU

RETURNTEST

TV VOL

VOLUME

MUTE

TV INPUT TV MUTE

CODE SET

5BEAM ST+3BEAM 3BEAM

VOL MODE

AUTO

SETUP

MACRO

INPUT2INPUT1

YSP

TV/AV

STB

VCR DVD AUX

TVAV

POWERPOWERSTANDBY/ON

ENTER

SUR. DECODE

MY SUR.

TV MUTE

CODE SET

AUX

DVDVCRSTB

While holding

down, press

TV MUTE

CODE SET

MACRO

While holding

down, press

STEREO

789

+10

5BEAM

ST+3BEAM

3BEAM

MY SUR.

MY BEAM

TV INPUT

ENTER

84 En

Remote control features

■ Setting macros for the TV without the

tuning capability

1 Press and hold CODE SET and press one of

the input selector buttons to select the input

source you want to set macros for.

Proceed to step 2 while holding down CODE SET.

2 Press MACRO while holding down CODE

SET.

3 Press INPUT1.

Check that the TV screen changes to the input 1

screen.

4 Press TV INPUT repeatedly until the screen

changes to the display of the input source

selected in step 1.

5 Press ENTER to confirm the setting.

■ Operating macros

Press and hold one of the input selector buttons

for approximately two seconds to select the input

source you want to operate macros for.

The TV input changes at the same time the input mode

changes.

■ Canceling the macros

1 Press and hold CODE SET and press one of

the input selector buttons to select the input

source you want to cancel the macros for.

Proceed to step 2 while holding down CODE SET.

2 Press MACRO while holding down CODE

SET.

3 Press ENTER to cancel the macros.

TV MUTE

CODE SET

While holding

down, press

AUX

DVDVCRSTB

TV MUTE

CODE SET

MACRO

While holding

down, press

INPUT1

TV INPUT

ENTER

AUX

DVDVCRSTB

TV MUTE

CODE SET

While holding

down, press

AUX

DVDVCRSTB

TV MUTE

CODE SET

MACRO

While holding

down, press

ENTER

Troubleshooting

85 En

ADDITIONAL

INFORMATION

English

Refer to the chart below when this unit does not function properly. If the problem you are experiencing is not listed below

or if the instruction below does not help, set this unit to the standby mode, disconnect the AC power supply cable, and

contact the nearest authorized Yamaha dealer or service center.

■ General

Troubleshooting

Problem Cause Remedy

See

page

This unit fails to turn on

when STANDBY/ON is

pressed, or enters the

standby mode soon after the

power has been turned on.

The AC power supply cable is not firmly

connected to the AC wall outlet.

Connect the AC power supply cable firmly

to the AC wall outlet.

This unit has been exposed to a strong

external electric shock (such as lightning

and strong static electricity).

Set this unit to the standby mode, disconnect

the AC power supply cable, plug it back in

after 30 seconds, and use it normally.

—

This unit suddenly enters the

standby mode.

The internal temperature becomes too high

and the overheat protection circuitry has

been activated.

Wait for about one hour for this unit to cool

down and turn it back on.

—

The sleep timer has turned the unit off. Turn on the power and play back the source

again.

—

No sound. Incorrect input or output cable connections. Connect the cables properly. If the problem

persists, the cables may be defective.

No appropriate input source has been

selected.

Select an appropriate input source with

INPUT or the input selector buttons.

The volume is turned down. Turn up the volume.

The sound is muted. Press MUTE or VOLUME +/– to resume

audio output and adjust the volume level.

The signals this unit cannot reproduce (such

as PCM signals with more than 96 kHz of

sampling frequency) are being received

from the source component.

Play a source whose signals can be

reproduced by this unit.

—

Change the system settings of the source

component.

—

The sound suddenly goes

off.

The sleep timer has turned this unit off. Turn on the power and play back the source

again.

—

The sound is muted. Press MUTE or VOLUME +/– to resume

audio output and adjust the volume level.

No sound from the effect

channels.

You are playing back the source or program

in the stereo playback or My Beam mode.

Press one of the beam mode buttons on the

remote control to select a multi-channel

playback mode and play back the source or

program once more.

No sound from the center

channel.

The output level of the center channel is set

to minimum.

Raise the level of the center channel.

No sound from the surround

channels.

The output level of the surround channels is

set to minimum.

Raise the output level of the surround

channels.

86 En

Troubleshooting

Problem Cause Remedy

See

page

No sound from the

subwoofer.

BASS OUT in SUBWOOFER SET is set to

FRONT.

Select SWFR.

The source does not contain low bass

signals.

Distorted or too little bass

sound.

CROSS OVER in SUBWOOFER SET is set

incorrectly.

Set CROSS OVER correctly.

One of the night listening enhancers is

currently selected.

Turn off the night listening enhancers.

Too much bass sound. TruBass is currently turned on. Turn off TruBass.

The volume level of the subwoofer is too

high.

Turn down the volume level of the

subwoofer.

—

Surround sound effects are

insubstantial.

The listening room is not a regular shape. Install this unit in a square or rectangular

shaped room.

—

There is no wall in the path of the sound

beam.

Try placing a flat object, such as a board, in

the path of the sound beam.

—

Dolby Digital or DTS sources

cannot be played back.

(Dolby Digital or DTS

indicator does not light up in

the front panel display.)

The connected component is not set to

output Dolby Digital or DTS digital signals.

Make an appropriate setting following the

operating instructions for your component.

—

The input mode is set to ANALOG. Set the input mode to AUTO.

There is noise interference

when a subwoofer is not

connected to this unit.

The protection circuitry was in operation

because a source with strong bass elements

was played back.

Turn down the volume level.

Select SWFR for BASS OUT.

Connect a subwoofer and adjust settings for

SUBWOOFER SET.

Low-frequency sounds are

distorted.

CROSS OVER in SUBWOOFER SET is set

incorrectly.

Set CROSS OVER correctly.

On-screen display does not

appear.

The OSD video pin cable is not connected

properly.

Connect the cable properly.

This unit does not operate

properly.

The internal microcomputer has been frozen

by an external electric shock (such as

lightning or excessive static electricity) or

by a power supply with low voltage.

Disconnect the AC power supply cable from

the outlet and plug it in again after about 30

seconds.

—

There is noise interference

from digital or high-

frequency equipment.

This unit is too close to the digital or high-

frequency equipment.

Move this unit farther away from such

equipment.

—

This unit does not output

effect sounds properly.

The original source includes surround

effects.

Disable the surround effect settings of this

unit.

—

My Beam auto-adjust

function does not work.

The listening room is too noisy. Keep the listening room as quiet as possible.

—

Try manual-adjust function.

The remote control may be operated outside

of the remote control operation range.

The remote control functions within a

maximum range of 6 m (20 ft) and no more

than 30 degrees off-axis from the front

panel.

The function does not work properly

because of the condition of the connected

components.

Select My Beam and then try again.

87 En

Troubleshooting

ADDITIONAL

INFORMATION

English

■ Remote control

Problem Cause Remedy

See

page

The remote control does not

work and/or function

properly.

Wrong distance or angle. The remote control functions within a

maximum range of 6 m (20 ft) and no more

than 30 degrees off-axis from the front

panel.

Direct sunlight or lighting (from an inverter

type of fluorescent lamp, etc.) is striking the

remote control sensor of this unit.

Reposition this unit.

—

The batteries are weak. Replace all batteries.

Cannot operate external

components with the remote

control of this unit.

The external component you want to operate

is not selected as the input source.

Press INPUT on the front panel or the input

selector buttons on the remote control to

select the external component you want to

operate.

The remote control code was not correctly

set.

Set the remote control code correctly or try

another code for the same manufacturer

using the “List of remote control codes” at

the end of this manual.

Even if the remote control code is correctly

set, there are some models that do not

respond to the remote control.

Use the remote control supplied with the

external component.

—

The cursor buttons do not

work during SET MENU

operation.

The operation mode selector was

unwantedly set to TV/AV.

Set the operation mode selector to YSP.

—

Cannot use the My Beam

auto-adjust function.

Wrong distance or angle. The remote control functions within a

maximum range of 6 m (20 ft) and no more

than 30 degrees off-axis from the front

panel.

Glossary

88 En

■ Dolby Digital

Dolby Digital is a digital surround sound system that gives

you completely independent multi-channel audio. With 3

front channels (left, center, and right) and 2 surround

stereo channels, Dolby Digital provides 5 full-range audio

channels. With an additional channel especially for bass

effects, called LFE (low-frequency effect), the system has

a total of 5.1-channels (LFE is counted as 0.1-channel).

By using 2-channel stereo for the surround channels, more

accurate moving sound effects and surround sound

environment are possible than with Dolby Surround. The

wide dynamic range (from maximum to minimum

volume) reproduced by the 5 full-range channels and the

precise sound orientation generated using digital sound

processing provide listeners with excitement and realism

previously unheard of.

With this unit, any sound environment from monaural up

to a 5.1-channel configuration can be freely selected for

your enjoyment.

■ Dolby Pro Logic II

Dolby Pro Logic II is an improved technique used to

decode vast numbers of existing Dolby Surround software.

This new technology enables a discrete 5-channel

playback with 2 front left and right channels, 1 center

channel, and 2 surround left and right channels (instead of

only 1 surround channel for conventional Pro Logic

technology). Music and Game modes are also available for

2-channel sources in addition to the Movie mode.

■ Dolby Surround

Dolby Surround uses a 4-channel analog recording system

to reproduce realistic and dynamic sound effects: 2 front

left and right channels (stereo), a center channel for dialog

(monaural), and a surround channel for special sound

effects (monaural). The surround channel reproduces

sound within a narrow frequency range.

Dolby Surround is widely used with nearly all video tapes

and laser discs, and in many TV and cable broadcasts as

well. The Dolby Pro Logic decoder built into this unit

employs a digital signal processing system that

automatically stabilizes the volume on each channel to

enhance moving sound effects and directionality.

■ DTS Digital Surround

DTS digital surround was developed to replace the analog

soundtracks of movies with a 6-channel digital sound

track, and is now rapidly gaining popularity in movie

theaters around the world. DTS, Inc. has developed a

home theater system so that you can enjoy the depth of

sound and natural spatial representation of DTS digital

surround in your home. This system produces practically

distortion-free 6-channel sound (technically, left, right,

and center channels, 2 surround channels, plus an LFE

0.1-channel as a subwoofer, for a total of 5.1 channels).

The unit incorporates a DTS-ES decoder that enables 6.1-

channel reproduction by adding the surround back channel

to existing 5.1-channel format.

■ DTS Neo:6

Neo:6 decodes the conventional 2-channel sources for 6-

channel playback by the specific decoder. It enables

playback with the full-range channels with higher

separation just like digital discrete signal playback. Two

modes are available: Music mode for playing music

sources and Cinema mode for movies.

■ EUPHONY

Euphony is a revolutionary sound field reproduction

system implemented with state-of-the-art sound

technologies developed under the basic concept of

enjoying beautiful sound. It can reproduce surround sound

optimized without depending on the number of input

channels, the number of speakers (two or more speakers)

or the speaker’s dimensions. In addition, it features steady

center localization. It also can reproduce the surround

sound for the headphones with natural sound and “out-of-

head” localization so that the listener feels an expanded

sound and will not tire, even when listening to music or a

movie for long time.

Glossary

89 En

Glossary

ADDITIONAL

INFORMATION

English

■ LFE 0.1-channel

This channel is for the reproduction of low bass signals.

The frequency range for this channel is 20 Hz to 120 Hz.

This channel is counted as 0.1 because it only enforces a

low-frequency range compared to the full-range

reproduction by the other 5/6 channels in Dolby Digital or

DTS 5.1/6.1-channel systems.

■ PCM (Linear PCM)

Linear PCM is a signal format under which an analog

audio signal is digitized, recorded, and transmitted

without using any compression. This is used as a method

of recording CDs and DVD audio. The PCM system uses

a technique for sampling the size of the analog signal per

very small unit of time. Standing for pulse code

modulation, the analog signal is encoded as pulses and

then modulated for recording.

■ SRS TruBass

SRS TruBass is a psychoacoustic bass enhancement

technology developed by SRS Labs, Inc. for speakers and

headphone systems that delivers bass up to an octave

below the physical capabilities of the speaker’s driver.

SRS TruBass technology takes advantage of a

spontaneous tendency of the human ears to infer low-

range audio data when presented with higher-frequency

harmonic signals. As a result, our ears can hear the

original low-range sound that the speaker system is

incapable of producing.

90 En

■ Numerics

3 Beam............................................................................45

5 Beam............................................................................44

■ A

AC power supply cable...................................................25

Audio pin cable...............................................................17

AUTO SETUP (IntelliBeam)..........................................31

■ B

Battery............................................................................. 26

BEAM MENU ................................................................ 58

Beam mode .........................................................44, 50, 51

■ C

Cable clamp ....................................................................17

Cardboard microphone stand.......................................... 33

■ D

DEMO MODE................................................................ 74

Demonstration DVD......................................................... 6

Digital audio pin cable....................................................17

DISPLAY MENU ...........................................................66

Dolby Digital ..................................................................46

Dolby Pro Logic.............................................................. 46

Dolby Pro Logic II.......................................................... 46

DTS................................................................................. 46

DTS Neo: 6 .....................................................................46

Dynamic range................................................................ 63

■ E

EUPHONY .....................................................................88

■ F

FACTORY PRESET ....................................................... 77

Front panel........................................................................ 7

Front panel display ........................................................... 8

■ I

IntelliBeam .....................................................................31

IntelliBeam microphone .................................................32

■ L

LFE 0.1-channel .............................................................89

■ M

MANUAL SETUP ..........................................................56

MEMORY .......................................................................38

My Beam.........................................................................51

■ N

Night listening enhancer .................................................53

■ O

On-screen display (OSD)................................................28

Optical cable ...................................................................17

OSD video pin cable .......................................................17

■ P

PCM ................................................................................89

Power...............................................................................27

■ R

Rear panel .........................................................................9

Remote control................................................................10

Remote control code .......................................................79

Remote control sensor.....................................................26

■ S

SET MENU.....................................................................28

Sleep timer ......................................................................54

Stereo plus 3 Beam .........................................................45

Surround mode................................................................46

Surround sound ...............................................................44

SOUND MENU ..............................................................62

Stereo sound....................................................................50

System parameter............................................................71

■ T

Test tone ..........................................................................67

TruBass............................................................................63

TV macro ........................................................................83

TV volume equal mode...................................................53

■ V

Volume ............................................................................43

Volume mode ..................................................................53

Index

Specifications

91 En

ADDITIONAL

INFORMATION

English

AMP SECTION

• Maximum Output Power (JEITA)

................................................. 2 W (1 kHz, 10% THD, 4 Ω) × 16

15 W (100 Hz, 10% THD, 4 Ω) × 2

SPEAKER SECTION

•Driver

Small dia. speakers

................... 2.8 cm (1-3/32 in) cone magnetic shielding type × 16

Woofers

........................ 8 cm (3-5/32 in) cone magnetic shielding type × 2

CONNECTIONS

• Input Jacks

TV/STB, VCR AUDIO IN (1 V, 32 kΩ) ............. 2 pairs (Analog)

TV/STB, AUX OPTICAL DIGITAL IN .......... 2 (Optical digital)

DVD COAXIAL DIGITAL IN ......................... 1 (Coaxial digital)

• Output Jacks

SUBWOOFER OUT (1.5 V, less than 120 Hz) ...... 1 (Subwoofer)

VIDEO OUT (1 Vp-p, 75 Ω) ............................................ 1 (OSD)

• System Connector Jack

INTELLIBEAM MIC .................................. 1 (Microphone input)

SYSTEM CONNECTOR ..................................1 (System control)

GENERAL

• Power Supply

[Australia model] ................................. AC 220–240 V, 50/60 Hz

[U.K. and Europe models] ................... AC 220–240 V, 50/60 Hz

[Korea model] ...................................... AC 220–240 V, 50/60 Hz

[General model] ................................... AC 110–120 V, 50/60 Hz

[Asia model] .......................................... AC 220–240 V, 50/60 Hz

• Power Consumption ................................................................. 22 W

• Standby Power Consumption ...................................... 0.1 W or less

• Dimensions (W x H x D) ................................ 610 × 120 × 220 mm

(24 x 4-23/32 x 8-21/32 in)

• Weight ............................................................. 8.5 kg (18 lbs 12 oz)

Specifications are subject to change without notice.

Specifications

92 En

Limited Guarantee for European Economic Area (EEA) and Switzerland

Thank you for having chosen a Yamaha product. In the unlikely event that your Yamaha product needs guarantee service, please contact the dealer from

whom it was purchased. If you experience any difficulty, please contact Yamaha representative office in your country. You can find full details on our

website (http://www.yamaha-hifi.com/ or http://www.yamaha-uk.com/ for U.K. resident).

The product is guaranteed to be free from defects in workmanship or materials for a period of two years from the date of the original purchase. Yamaha

undertakes, subject to the conditions listed below, to have the faulty product or any part(s) repaired, or replaced at Yamaha’s discretion, without any charge

for parts or labour. Yamaha reserves the right to replace a product with that of a similar kind and/or value and condition, where a model has been

discontinued or is considered uneconomic to repair.

Conditions

1. The original invoice or sales receipt (showing date of purchase, product code and dealer’s name) MUST accompany the defective product, along with a

statement detailing the fault. In the absence of this clear proof of purchase, Yamaha reserves the right to refuse to provide free of charge service and the

product may be returned at the customer’s expense.

2. The product MUST have been purchased from an AUTHORISED Yamaha dealer within the European Economic Area (EEA) or Switzerland.

3. The product must not have been the subject of any modifications or alterations, unless authorised in writing by Yamaha.

4. The following are excluded from this guarantee:

a. Periodic maintenance and repair or replacement of parts due to normal wear and tear.

b. Damage resulting from:

(1) Repairs performed by the customer himself or by an unauthorised third party.

(2) Inadequate packaging or mishandling, when the product is in transit from the customer. Please note that it is the customer’s responsibility to

ensure the product is adequately packaged when returning the product for repair.

(3) Misuse, including but not limited to (a) failure to use the product for its normal purpose or in accordance with Yamaha’s instructions on the proper

use, maintenance and storage, and (b) installation or use of the product in a manner inconsistent with the technical or safety standards in force in

the country where it is used.

(4) Accidents, lightning, water, fire, improper ventilation, battery leakage or any cause beyond Yamaha’s control.

(5) Defects of the system into which this product is incorporated and/or incompatibility with third party products.

(6) Use of a product imported into the EEA and/or Switzerland, not by Yamaha, where that product does not conform to the technical or safety

standards of the country of use and/or to the standard specification of a product sold by Yamaha in the EEA and/or Switzerland.

(7) Non AV (Audio Visual) related products.

(Products subject to “Yamaha AV Guarantee Statement” are defined in our website at http://www.yamaha-hifi.com/ or

http://www.yamaha-uk.com/ for U.K. resident.)

5. Where the guarantee differs between the country of purchase and the country of use of the product, the guarantee of the country of use shall apply.

6. Yamaha may not be held responsible for any losses or damages, whether direct, consequential or otherwise, save for the repair or replacement of the

product.

7. Please backup any custom settings or data, as Yamaha may not be held responsible for any alteration or loss to such settings or data.

8. This guarantee does not affect the consumer’s statutory rights under applicable national laws in force or the consumer’s rights against the dealer arising

from their sales/purchase contract.

TOSHIBA 335, 389

TOTEVISION 363, 396

UNITECH 363

UNIVERSUM 396, 327, 376

VIDEOSONIC 363

W.WHOUSE 396

WARDS 395, 396, 336,

362, 397, 363

YAMAHA 399, 392, 393, 394

ZERITH 344, 361, 368,

371, 379, 396, 397

CABLE TV TUNER

ABC 739, 752, 753,

755, 758, 759, 762

GENERAL INSTRUMENT

722

HAMIN 723, 724, 725,

726, 727

HITACHI 722

JEROLD 722, 728, 729,

732, 733, 734,

735, 736, 737

MAGNAVOX 738

MOTOROLA 748

OAK 739, 742, 743

PANASONIC 744, 745, 746,

747, 783, 784

PHILLIPS 763, 764, 765,

766, 767, 768

PIONEER 748, 785, 747

RADIO SHACK749

SCIENTIFIC ATLANTA

752, 753, 754

SONY 756, 757

TOCOM 755

UNIVERSAL 769, 772, 773,

774, 775

VIEWSTAR 764, 766, 776,

777, 778, 779, 782

SATELLITE TUNER

ECHOSTAR 822

GE 837, 838, 839

GENERAL INSTRUMENT

823

HITACHI 824

HUGHES 843, 844, 845, 846

JVC 822

MAGNAVOX 825

PANASONIC 826, 829

PHILLIPS 825, 843, 844,

845, 846, 847,

848, 849

PRIMESTAR 827

PROSCAN 837, 838, 839, 842

RADIO SHACK

828

RCA 837, 838, 839, 842

SAMSUNG 852

SONY 832, 835

TOSHIBA 833, 836

UNIDEN 825

ZENITH 834

YAMAHA ELECTRONICS CORPORATION, USA

6660 ORANGETHORPE AVE., BUENA PARK, CALIF. 90620, U.S.A.

YAMAHA CANADA MUSIC LTD.

135 MILNER AVE., SCARBOROUGH, ONTARIO M1S 3R1, CANADA

YAMAHA ELECTRONIK EUROPA G.m.b.H.

SIEMENSSTR. 22-34, 25462 RELLINGEN BEI HAMBURG, GERMANY

YAMAHA ELECTRONIQUE FRANCE S.A.

RUE AMBROISE CROIZAT BP70 CROISSY-BEAUBOURG 77312 MARNE-LA-VALLEE CEDEX02, FRANCE

YAMAHA ELECTRONICS (UK) LTD.

YAMAHA HOUSE, 200 RICKMANSWORTH ROAD WATFORD, HERTS WD18 7GQ, ENGLAND

YAMAHA SCANDINAVIA A.B.

J A WETTERGRENS GATA 1, BOX 30053, 400 43 VÄSTRA FRÖLUNDA, SWEDEN

YAMAHA MUSIC AUSTRALIA PTY, LTD.

17-33 MARKET ST., SOUTH MELBOURNE, 3205 VIC., AUSTRALIA

Printed in Malaysia WM28790

YSP-500

Digital Sound Projector

Système Acoustique Numérique

OWNER’S MANUAL

MODE D’EMPLOI

BEDIENUNGSANLEITUNG

BRUKSANVISNING

GEBRUIKSAANWIJZING

ИНСТРУКЦИЯ ПО ЭКСПЛУАТАЦИИ

YSP-500_G-cv.fm Page 1 Thursday, September 20, 2007 8:49 AM

Connecting external components such as a TV or DVD player to this unit.

Connect your TV or DVD player to this unit using appropriate cables as shown below. After all connections are complete, plug the power supply cable into the AC wall outlet.

For further information on connecting other components, see pages 16 to 24 in the Owner’s Manual.

YSP-500

QUICK REFERENCE GUIDE

Printed in Malaysia WM28850 [En]

VCR TV/STB VIDEO TV/STB AUX

OPTICAL COAXIAL

DIGITAL INPUTOUTAUDIO INPUT

DVD SYSTEM

CONNECTOR

SUBWOOFER

COAXIAL

AUDIO OUTPUT

VIDEO

INPUT

ANALOG AUDIO

OUTPUT

OPTICAL

AUDIO OUTPUT

VCR TV/STB VIDEO TV/STB AUX

OPTICAL COAXIAL

DIGITAL INPUTOUTAUDIO INPUT

DVD SYSTEM

CONNECTOR

SUBWOOFER

DVD player

Decide where to install this unit.

Install this unit where there are no objects such as furniture obstructing the path of sound beams. Otherwise, the desired

surround sound effects may not be achieved. You may install this unit in parallel with the wall or in the corner.

YSP-500

Connecting external components to this unit

Installing this unit

This quick reference guide explains steps to connect a TV and a DVD player to this unit and achieve the

surround sound effects in a quick, easy manner. For detailed operation, refer to the Owner’s Manual.

Install this unit using a rack, etc.

Depending on your installation environment, connections with external components (see “2 Connecting external components to this unit”) can be done before

installing this unit. We recommend that you temporarily place and arrange all components in order to decide which procedure must come first.

For further information on installation, see page 13 in the Owner’s Manual.

Install this unit in the exact center of the wall when it is

measured from the left and right corners.

Install this unit in the corner at a 40˚ to 50˚ angle from the

adjacent walls.

40˚ to 50˚

An object, such as furniture An object, such as furniture

To the AC wall

outlet

132

Do not plug the power

supply cable into an AC

wall outlet until all

connections are complete.

Items used for connections and operations

in this guide

Audio pin cable (x1)

OSD* video pin cable (x1)

Optical cable (x1)

Digital audio pin cable (x1)

IntelliBeam microphone (x1)

Cardboard microphone stand (x1)

Demonstration DVD (x1)

*OSD: On-Screen Display

1. Pull out the cap

2. Check the direction

Front left channel

Center channel

Front right channel

Surround left channel

Surround right channel

Front left channel

Center channel

Front right channel

Surround left channel

Surround right channel

This connection example shows a way to connect external components such as a TV or DVD player to this unit by using the supplied cable. You can enjoy the multi-channel audio from the DVD player and the analog/digital audio from the TV.

Use the video pin cable supplied with your DVD player to make a video connection between your DVD player and TV.

Connect the supplied cables in the following order.

3 Install this unit in the

rack.

1 Place this unit in front of

the rack.

If you have connected external components,

follow the steps on the backside to start the

AUTO SETUP procedure.

Continued

on the back

2 Connect this unit

to your TV and DVD player.

y Hint

To enjoy better surround effects, place this unit on the upper shelf to keep it away from the floor.

Note

Be careful not to leave scratches on this unit or the rack.

Video connection

1 Audio pin cable

(Outputs TV analog audio sounds from this unit)

2 OSD video pin cable

(Displays the YSP-500 menu screen on the TV)

3 Optical cable

(Outputs TV digital audio sounds from this unit)

4 Digital audio pin cable

(Outputs DVD digital audio sounds from this unit)

4 Installation is completed.

The following is an example of installing this unit in a rack.

Note

Check whether the digital audio output of your TV and DVD

player is turned on.

Audio connection

Subwoofer

Optical cable

Pull out the cap

before connecting

the optical cable,

and then check the

direction to insert

the cable.

If a subwoofer is connected to this unit, turn on the power of your

subwoofer and then carry out the AUTO SETUP procedure (see the

backside) or select “SWFR” for “BASS OUT” in “SUBWOOFER SET” (see

page 62 in the Owner’s Manual).

System connection

0906_YSP-500_En_guide.p65 9/7/07, 11:18 AM1

Press ENTER to start the AUTO

SETUP procedure, and then

leave the room within 10 seconds.

The following screen appears on the TV. Leave the room

within 10 seconds before the AUTO SETUP procedure

starts.

The setup screen automatically changes during the AUTO

SETUP procedure.

When the AUTO SETUP procedure is completed, the

following screen appears on the TV.

If “ENVIRONMENT CHECK (FAILED) is displayed, see page

36 in the Owner’s Manual and then run the procedure again.

y Hint

• The result may differ depending on the environment.

• If any error occurs, the corresponding error message appears

on the screen. In this case, see “Error messages for AUTO

SETUP” on page 37 in the Owner’s Manual and then follow

the instructions. To start the AUTO SETUP procedure once

again, press RETURN.

Press ENTER.

The following screen appears on the TV for 2 seconds and

then the menu screen disappears from the TV.

Disconnect the IntelliBeam

microphone.

The AUTO SETUP has completed. Keep the IntelliBeam

microphone in a safe place.

The settings are automatically saved in the system memory.

Enjoy TV or DVD digital audio in surround sound.

For instructions on how to operate or set your TV or DVD player, refer to the owner’s manual supplied with each component.

Enjoying surround sound

Carry out the AUTO SETUP to adjust the settings that best match your

listening environment

The IntelliBeam technology allows you to achieve sound adjustments that best match your listening environment. It is normal for loud test tones to be output

during the AUTO SETUP procedure. Make sure that there are no children around in the listening room while the AUTO SETUP procedure is in progress.

Press STANDBY/ON on the

remote control.

The power of this unit turns on.

Before operations, insert batteries into the remote control

(see page 26 in the Owner’s Manual).

If necessary, adjust the volume level of this unit.

If you have connected the subwoofer, set the volume and

crossover/high cut frequency. Refer to the note on page

32 in the Owner’s Manual.

Check the multi-channel digital signal being output at this unit.

The MULTI indicator and/or (see page 42 in the Owner’s Manual) is lit in the front panel display. If the sound is

output from your TV speakers, mute the volume on your TV. For details about digital audio input signals, see

page 46 in the Owner’s Manual.

Press VOLUME +/

on the remote control to adjust the volume

level of this unit.

Press one of the beam mode buttons on the remote control

to select the desired beam mode.

Select one of the six beam modes that best matches the current input source of this unit.

For further information on the beam modes, see page 44 in the Owner’s Manual.

To fine-tune the listening environment parameters manually or make advanced settings for speaker positions,

sound beams, etc., see “MANUAL SETUP” on page 56 in the Owner’s Manual.

AUTO SETUP START

Will begin in 10sec

Please leave the room

**--------

[RETURN]:Cancel

Enjoying TV in surround sound

SHOW RESULT

MEASUREMENT COMPLETE

BEAM MODE :5 BEAM

SUBWOOFER :NOT APPLICABLE

[ENTER]:Save set-up

[RETURN]:Do not save set-up

AUTO SETUP COMPLETE

Please remove the MIC from

the YSP and the listening

position.

CH LEVEL MENU

RETURNTEST

YSP

TV/AV

ENTER

CH LEVEL MENU

RETURNTEST

YSP

TV/AV

ENTER

Select the TV channel using the

remote control supplied with

your TV.

Set the operation mode selector

to YSP.

This unit switches to the YSP operation mode.

Press TV on the remote control

of this unit.

This unit switches to the TV playback mode.

More than 1.8 m (6.0 ft)

Within 1 m

(3.3 ft)

IntelliBeam

microphone

Cardboard

microphone

stand

Listening

position

Place the IntelliBeam microphone on

the extended center line of this unit

and 1.8 m (6.0 ft) or more away from

it. Also, make sure place the

IntelliBeam microphone within 1 m

(3.3 ft) upper or lower from the center

height of this unit.

IntelliBeam

microphone

Center line

Carry out the AUTO SETUP (IntelliBeam)

INTELLIBEAM MIC INPUT VOLUME STANDBY/ON

INTELLIBEAM MIC

1234

Set the IntelliBeam microphone at your normal listening position.

Use the supplied cardboard microphone stand or a tripod to place the IntelliBeam microphone at the same height as your ears would

be when you are seated.

IntelliBeam microphone (supplied)

Connect the supplied IntelliBeam microphone to the INTELLIBEAM MIC

jack on the front panel.

You may want to use the supplied cardboard microphone stand for the AUTO SETUP. Assemble the stand and place the IntelliBeam

microphone on top of it as shown below.

TV VOL

VOLUME

MUTE

TV INPUT TV MUTE

Enjoying DVDs in surround sound

Select the DVD video input on

your TV.

Set the operation mode selector

to YSP.

This unit switches to the YSP operation mode.

1) Press DVD on the remote

control of this unit.

This unit switches to the DVD playback mode.

Play back the supplied demonstration

DVD on the DVD player.

Set the operation mode selector

to YSP.

This unit switches to the YSP operation mode.

Press and hold AUTO SETUP for

more than 2 seconds.

The menu screen appears on the TV.

If the menu screen does not appear, check the OSD video

pin cable (see the connection example on the front page).

Check the following points.

About the IntelliBeam microphone

• Is the microphone placed on an imaginary center line drawn

from this unit?

• Is the microphone placed within 1 m (3.3 ft) upper or lower

from the center height of this unit?

• Is the microphone placed more than 1.8 m (6.0 ft) from the

front of this unit?

About the room environment

• Is your listening room kept as quiet as possible?

Prepare to leave the room.

The best setting may not be done if you are in the room.

Prepare to leave the room in 10 seconds after pressing

ENTER in step 10.

y Hint

• When leaving the room, bring this guide with you.

• Wait outside the room during the AUTO SETUP procedure.

• The AUTO SETUP procedure takes about 3 minutes.

• To cancel the AUTO SETUP procedure after it is started,

press RETURN.

Turn on the power of your TV.

Select the appropriate video

input on your TV.

“YSP-500” appears on your TV. If the OSD video pin cable

is connected to the video input 1 on the TV as shown in the

connection example, switch the video input to “1”.

Within 1 m

(3.3 ft)

CH LEVEL MENU

RETURNTEST

YSP

TV/AV

ENTER

AUTO SETUP

PREPARATION & CHECK

Please connect the MIC.

Please place the MIC at least

1.8m/6ft away from the YSP

unit. The MIC should be set

at ear level when seated.

After [ENTER] is pressed,

please leave the room.

[ENTER]:Start [RETURN]:Cancel

Measurement takes about 3min.

321

SLEEP

INPUTMODE

5BEAM ST+3BEAM 3BEAM

VOL MODE

AUTO

SETUP

MACRO

INPUT2INPUT1

INTELLIBEAM MIC INPUT VOLUME STANDBY/ON

INTELLIBEAM MIC

RETURNTEST

YSP

TV/AV

ENTER

RETURNTEST

YSP

TV/AV

ENTER

MACRO

INPUT2INPUT1

STB

VCR DVD AUX

321

SLEEP

INPUTMODE

5BEAM ST+3BEAM 3BEAM

VOL MODE

AUTO

SETUP

MACRO

INPUT2INPUT1

STB

VCR DVD AUX

321

STEREO

MY BEAM

5BEAM ST+3BEAM 3BEAM

MY SUR.

Cardboard

microphone stand

Upper bound

position of the

microphone

Lower bound position

of the microphone

TVAV

POWERPOWERSTANDBY/ON

VOLUME

MIN MAX

CROSSOVER/

HIGH CUT

MIN MAX

Subwoofer

Center height of

this unit

Continued from the front

Cardboard microphone stand (supplied)

MULTI indicator

0905_YSP-500_En_guide.p65 9/6/07, 5:05 PM2

Raccordement de composants, tel qu’un téléviseur ou un lecteur de DVD à cet appareil.

Raccordez votre téléviseur ou lecteur de DVD à cet appareil en utilisant les câbles appropriés, comme indiqué ci-dessous. Lorsque tous les appareils sont raccordés, branchez le câble d’alimentation sur une prise secteur.

Pour de plus amples informations sur le raccordement d’autres composants, reportez-vous aux pages 16 à 24 du mode d’emploi.

YSP-500

GUIDE DE REFERENCE RAPIDE

Printed in Malaysia

WM28860 [Fr]

VCR TV/STB VIDEO TV/STB AUX

OPTICAL COAXIAL

DIGITAL INPUTOUTAUDIO INPUT

DVD SYSTEM

CONNECTOR

SUBWOOFER

COAXIAL

AUDIO OUTPUT

VIDEO

INPUT

ANALOG AUDIO

OUTPUT

OPTICAL

AUDIO OUTPUT

VCR TV/STB VIDEO TV/STB AUX

OPTICAL COAXIAL

DIGITAL INPUTOUTAUDIO INPUT

DVD SYSTEM

CONNECTOR

SUBWOOFER

Graveur de DVD

Déterminez l’emplacement de cet appareil.

Installez l’appareil à un endroit où des meubles ou d’autres objets ne risquent pas de faire obstacle aux faisceaux sonores émis. Sinon, vous

n’obtiendrez pas les effets d’ambiance souhaités. Vous pouvez installer cet appareil parallèlement à un mur ou dans un angle de la pièce.

YSP-500

Raccordement de composants à cet appareil

Installation de l’appareil

Ce guide de référence rapide explique comment procéder pour raccorder un téléviseur et un lecteur de DVD à cet appareil et obtenir rapidement,

de la manière la plus simple, des effets ambiophoniques. Pour de plus amples informations à ce sujet, reportez-vous au mode d’emploi.

Installez cet appareil dans un meuble, etc.

Selon la situation, les raccordements aux composants pourront être effectués avant l’installation de cet appareil (voir “2 Raccordement de composants à cet

appareil”). Il est conseillé de placer et de disposer provisoirement tous les appareils de manière à voir ce qu’il convient de faire en premier.

Pour de plus amples informations sur l’installation, reportez-vous à la page 13 du mode d’emploi.

Installez cet appareil au centre du mur dans le sens de la

longueur.

Installez cet appareil dans un angle du mur à 40° à 50° des

murs adjacents.

40° à 50°

Un objet, par exemple un meuble Un objet, par exemple un meuble

À une prise

secteur

132

Ne branchez le câble

d’alimentation sur une prise

secteur que lorsque tous

les appareils ont été

raccordés.

Articles utilisés pour les raccordements et

les opérations

Câble audio à fiches cinch (x1)

Câble vidéo à fiches cinch pour affichage des informations OSD*

(x1)

Câble à fibres optiques (x1)

Câble audionumérique à fiches cinch (x1)

Microphone IntelliBeam (x1)

Support de microphone plat (x1)

DVD de démonstration (x1)

OSD: Affichage des menus sur l’écran de télévision

1. Déposez le capuchon.

2. Vérifiez le sens.

Voie avant gauche

Voie centrale

Voie avant droite

Voie d’ambiance gauche

Voie d’ambiance droite

Voie avant gauche

Voie centrale

Voie avant droite

Voie d’ambiance gauche

Voie d’ambiance droite

Cet exemple montre comment raccorder des composants, tels qu’un téléviseur ou un lecteur de DVD à cet appareil à l’aide du câble fourni. Vous pourrez profiter du son multivoies du lecteur de DVD et du son analogique ou numérique du téléviseur.

Utilisez le câble cinch vidéo fourni avec votre lecteur de DVD pour établir une liaison vidéo entre le lecteur de DVD et le téléviseur.

3 Installez l’appareil dans

le meuble.

1 Posez cet appareil devant

le meuble.

Si vous avez raccordé des composants,

suivez les étapes au verso pour effectuer la

procédure AUTO SETUP.

Suite au

verso

2 Raccordez cet appareil au

téléviseur et au lecteur de

DVD.

y Conseil

Pour bénéficier d’un meilleur effet ambiophonique, posez l’appareil sur l’étagère supérieure du meuble de manière à ce qu’il soit le plus loin possible du sol.

Remarque

Attention de ne pas rayer l’appareil ou le meuble.

Liaison vidéo

1 Câble audio à fiches cinch

(Transmet les signaux audio analogiques du téléviseur via cet appareil)

Câble vidéo à fiches cinch pour affichage des informations OSD

(Affiche les menus du YSP-500 sur l’écran du téléviseur)

3 Câble à fibres optiques

(Transmet les signaux audio numériques du téléviseur via cet appareil)

4 Câble audionumérique à fiches cinch

(Transmet les signaux audio numériques du lecteur de

DVD via cet appareil)

4 L’installation est terminée.

L’installation dans un meuble est expliquée dans l’exemple suivant.

Remarque

Vérifiez si la sortie audio numérique de votre téléviseur et de

votre lecteur de DVD est en service.

Liaison audio

Caisson de graves

Câble à fibres

optiques

Déposez le

capuchon avant de

brancher le câble

optique, puis

vérifiez le sens

d’insertion de la

fiche.

Si un caisson de graves est connecté à l’appareil, mettez votre caisson

de graves sous tension et exécutez la procédure AUTO SETUP (voir au

verso) ou sélectionnez “SWFR” pour “BASS OUT” dans “SUBWOOFER

SET” (voir page 62 du Mode d’emploi).

Connexion système

Raccordez les câbles fournis dans l’ordre suivant.

0906_YSP-500_Fr_guide.p65 9/6/07, 5:08 PM1

Appuyez sur ENTER pour lancer la

procédure AUTO SETUP, puis quittez

la pièce dans les 10 secondes.

L’écran suivant apparaît sur le téléviseur. Quittez la pièce

dans les 10 secondes, avant que la procédure AUTO

SETUP démarre.

L’écran de configuration change automatiquement pendant

toute la procédure AUTO SETUP.

Lorsque la procédure AUTO SETUP est terminée, l’écran

suivant apparaît sur l’écran de télévision.

Si “ENVIRONMENT CHECK (FAILED)” apparaît, reportez-vous à la

page 36 du mode d’emploi et effectuez une nouvelle fois la procédure.

y Conseil

• Le résultat peut être différent selon l’environnement.

• En cas d’erreur, le message d’erreur correspondant apparaît

sur l’écran. Dans ce cas, reportez-vous à “Message d’erreur

pour AUTO SETUP” à la page 37 du mode d’emploi et suivez

les instructions. Pour relancer la procédure AUTO SETUP,

appuyez sur RETURN.

Appuyez sur ENTER.

L’écran suivant apparaît sur le téléviseur pendant

2 secondes, puis il disparaît.

Débranchez le microphone

IntelliBeam.

La procédure AUTO SETUP est terminée. Rangez le

microphone Intellibeam en lieu sûr.

Les réglages sont automatiquement sauvegardés dans la

mémoire du système.

Écoutez le son numérique de la télévision ou de vos DVD en ambiophonie.

Pour le détail sur le fonctionnement ou le réglage du téléviseur ou du lecteur de DVD, reportez-vous à leur manuel respectif.

Écoute du son ambiophonique

Exécutez AUTO SETUP pour obtenir les réglages les mieux adaptés à votre

environnement.

La technologie IntelliBeam permet d’obtenir les réglages les mieux adaptés à votre environnement. Pendant la procédure AUTO SETUP, il est normal

d’entendre des signaux d’essai puissants. Ne laissez pas d’enfants dans la pièce pendant l’exécution de AUTO SETUP.

Appuyez sur STANDBY/ON sur

le boîtier de télécommande.

L’appareil se met sous tension.

N’oubliez de mettre auparavant des piles dans le boîtier de

télécommande (voir page 26 du mode d’emploi).

Si nécessaire, réglez le niveau de sortie de cet appareil.

Si vous avez raccordé le caisson de graves, réglez le

volume et la fréquence de coupure des hautes fréquences.

Reportez-vous à la remarque à la page 32 du mode

d’emploi.

Vérifiez le signal numérique multivoies fourni par cet appareil.

Le témoin MULTI (voir page 42 du mode d’emploi) s’éclaire sur l’afficheur de la face avant. Si le son est fourni

par les enceintes de votre téléviseur, coupez le son sur votre téléviseur. Pour de plus amples informations sur

les signaux d’entrée audio numérique, reportez-vous à la page 46 du mode d’emploi.

Appuyez sur VOLUME +/– du boîtier de télécommande pour

régler le niveau de sortie de cet appareil.

Appuyez sur une des touches du mode de faisceaux sur le boîtier

de télécommande pour sélectionner le mode de faisceaux souhaité.

Sélectionnez le mode de faisceaux le mieux adapté à la source actuellement sélectionnée parmi les six modes proposés.

Pour de plus amples informations sur les modes de faisceaux, reportez-vous à la page 44 de mode d’emploi.

Pour régler plus finement les paramètres de l’environnement d’écoute ou pour faire des réglages encore plus sophistiqués pour les positions

des enceintes, les faisceaux sonores, etc. reportez-vous à “MANUAL SETUP” (Configuration manuelle) à la page 56 du mode d’emploi.

Regarder la télévision en ambiophonie

CH LEVEL MENU

RETURNTEST

YSP

TV/AV

ENTER

CH LEVEL MENU

RETURNTEST

YSP

TV/AV

ENTER

Sélectionnez la chaîne de télévision

avec le boîtier de télécommande

fourni avec votre téléviseur.

Réglez le sélecteur de mode de

fonctionnement sur YSP.

L’appareil se met en mode de fonctionnement YSP.

Appuyez sur TV sur le boîtier de

télécommande de cet appareil.

L’appareil se met en mode Télévision.

Plus de 1,8 m

Moins de 1 m

Microphone

IntelliBeam

Support de

microphone

plat

Position

d’écoute

Placez le microphone IntelliBeam sur

l’axe central à 1,8 m au minimum de

l’appareil. Assurez-vous aussi que le

microphone IntelliBeam est à moins

de 1 m au-dessus ou au-dessous de

la hauteur centrale de cet appareil.

Microphone

IntelliBeam

Axe

Exécution de AUTO SETUP (IntelliBeam)

INTELLIBEAM MIC INPUT VOLUME STANDBY/ON

INTELLIBEAM MIC

1234

Posez le microphone IntelliBeam à votre position d’écoute habituelle.

Utilisez le support de microphone en carton fourni ou un trépied pour placer le microphone IntelliBeam à la hauteur de vos oreilles

lorsque vous êtes assis.

Microphone IntelliBeam (Fourni)

Raccordez le microphone IntelliBeam fourni à la prise INTELLIBEAM MIC

sur la face avant.

Vous pouvez utiliser le support de microphone en carton fourni lors de la procédure AUTO SETUP. Assemblez le support et posez le

microphone IntelliBeam dessus, comme indiqué ci-dessous.

TV VOL

VOLUME

MUTE

TV INPUT TV MUTE

Regarder des DVD en ambiophonie

Sélectionnez l’entrée vidéo du

DVD sur votre téléviseur.

Réglez le sélecteur de mode de

fonctionnement sur YSP.

L’appareil se met en mode de fonctionnement YSP.

Appuyez sur DVD du boîtier de

télécommande de cet appareil.

L’appareil se met en mode de lecture de DVD.

Reproduisez le DVD de démonstration

fourni sur le lecteur de DVD.

Réglez le sélecteur de mode de

fonctionnement sur YSP.

L’appareil se met en mode de fonctionnement YSP.

Appuyez sur AUTO SETUP et maintenez

la pression plus de 2 secondes.

Le menu apparaît sur l’écran de télévision.

S’il n’apparaît pas, vérifiez le câble cinch vidéo OSD

(voir l’exemple de raccordement sur le recto).

Vérifiez les points suivants.

En ce qui concerne le microphone IntelliBeam

• Est-ce que le microphone est placé dans l’axe de cet

appareil?

• Est-ce que le microphone est à moins de 1 m au-dessus ou

au-dessous de la hauteur centrale de cet appareil?

•

Est-ce que le microphone est à plus de 1,8 m de l’avant de cet

appareil?

En ce qui concerne l’environnement de la pièce

• Est-ce que la pièce est la plus silencieuse possible?

Préparez-vous à quitter la pièce.

Vous n’obtiendrez peut-être pas le meilleur réglage possible si

vous restez dans la pièce. Préparez-vous à quitter la pièce dans

les 10 secondes après avoir appuyé sur ENTER à l’étape 10.

y Conseil

• Lorsque vous quittez la pièce, emportez le guide avec vous.

• Attendez à l’extérieur de la pièce pendant toute la durée de la

procédure AUTO SETUP.

• La procédure AUTO SETUP dure 3 minutes environ.

• Pour annuler la procédure AUTO SETUP en cours d’exécution,

appuyez sur RETURN.

Mettez le téléviseur sous tension.

Sélectionnez l’entrée vidéo

appropriée sur votre téléviseur.

“YSP-500” apparaît sur votre téléviseur. Si le câble cinch vidéo

OSD est raccordé à l’entrée vidéo 1 du téléviseur, comme indiqué

dans l’exemple de raccordement, réglez l’entrée vidéo sur “1”.

Moins de 1 m

CH LEVEL MENU

RETURNTEST

YSP

TV/AV

ENTER

321

SLEEP

INPUTMODE

5BEAM ST+3BEAM 3BEAM

VOL MODE

AUTO

SETUP

MACRO

INPUT2INPUT1

INTELLIBEAM MIC INPUT VOLUME STANDBY/ON

INTELLIBEAM MIC

RETURNTEST

YSP

TV/AV

ENTER

RETURNTEST

YSP

TV/AV

ENTER

MACRO

INPUT2INPUT1

STB

VCR DVD AUX

321

SLEEP

INPUTMODE

5BEAM ST+3BEAM 3BEAM

VOL MODE

AUTO

SETUP

MACRO

INPUT2INPUT1

STB

VCR DVD AUX

321

STEREO

MY BEAM

5BEAM ST+3BEAM 3BEAM

MY SUR.

Support de

microphone plat

Limite supérieure

du microphone

Limite inférieure du

microphone

TVAV

POWERPOWERSTANDBY/ON

VOLUME

MIN MAX

CROSSOVER/

HIGH CUT

MIN MAX

Subwoofer

Hauteur centrale

de cet appareil

Suite du recto

Support de microphone plat (Fourni)

Témoin MULTI

y Conseil

Vous pouvez sélectionner la langue indiquée dans les

informations OSD en procédant de la façon suivante.

Réglez le sélecteur de mode de fonctionnement sur YSP. ➞

Appuyez sur MENU. ➞ Appuyez sur / pour sélectionner

LANGUAGE SETUP. ➞ Appuyez sur ENTER. ➞ Appuyez sur

/ pour sélectionner la langue. ➞ Appuyez sur ENTER.

0906_YSP-500_Fr_guide.p65 9/6/07, 5:08 PM2

Verbinden des Geräts mit externen Komponenten wie Fernsehgerät und DVD-Player.

Schließen Sie Fernsehgerät, DVD-Player u. dgl. mit geeigneten Kabeln wie nachfolgend beschrieben an. Nach Herstellen aller anderen Verbindungen schließen Sie dann noch das Netzkabel an eine Steckdose an.

Weitere Informationen zum Anschluss anderer Komponenten finden Sie in der Bedienungsanleitung auf den Seiten 16 bis 24.

YSP-500

KURZ-ANLEITUNG

Printed in Malaysia

WM28870 [De]

VCR TV/STB VIDEO TV/STB AUX

OPTICAL COAXIAL

DIGITAL INPUTOUTAUDIO INPUT

DVD SYSTEM

CONNECTOR

SUBWOOFER

COAXIAL

AUDIO OUTPUT

VIDEO

INPUT

ANALOG AUDIO

OUTPUT

OPTICAL

AUDIO OUTPUT

VCR TV/STB VIDEO TV/STB AUX

OPTICAL COAXIAL

DIGITAL INPUTOUTAUDIO INPUT

DVD SYSTEM

CONNECTOR

SUBWOOFER

DVD-Player

Bestimmung des richtigen Aufstellungsorts

Installieren Sie dieses Gerät an einem Ort, wo der Schallstrahlengang durch keine Hindernisse, wie z.B. Möbelstücke, beeinträchtigt wird. Anderenfalls

werden die gewünschten Surroundklangeffekte möglicherweise nicht erzielt. Sie können dieses Gerät parallel zur Wand oder in einer Ecke installieren.

YSP-500

Anschluss externer Komponenten an diesem Gerät

Installieren dieses Gerätes

Diese Kurz-Anleitung erläutert in kurzer und übersichtlicher Form, wie Sie dieses Geräts mit einem Fernsehgerät und einem DVD-Player

verbinden und Surroundklang-Effekte genießen. Ausführliche Anweisungen zur Bedienung finden Sie in der Bedienungsanleitung.

Installation des Geräts in einem Gestell o. dgl.

Die Verbindungen mit externen Komponenten (siehe „2 Anschluss externer Komponenten an diesem Gerät“) können je nach Installationsumgebung vor der

Aufstellung des Geräts erfolgen. Wir empfehlen Ihnen, dieses Gerät und alle anderen Komponenten zunächst provisorisch anzuordnen um zu sehen, in

welcher Reihenfolge Sie vorgehen müssen.

Ausführliche Anweisungen zur Installation finden Sie in der Bedienungsanleitung auf Seite 13.

Installieren Sie dieses Gerät genau in der Mitte der Wand,

von der linken und rechten Ecke aus gemessen.

Installieren Sie dieses Gerät in einer Ecke in einem Winkel

von 40˚ bis 50˚ zu den angrenzenden Wänden.

40˚ bis 50˚

Ein Hindernis, wie zum Beispiel ein Möbelstück Ein Hindernis, wie zum Beispiel ein Möbelstück

An die

Wandsteckdose

132

Schließen Sie das Netzkabel

erst an die Steckdose an,

nachdem alle anderen

Verbindungen hergestellt

wurden.

Teile für Anschluss und Betrieb

Audio-Cinchkabel (x1)

OSD*-Video-Cinchkabel (x1)

Optokabel (x1)

Digitales Audio-Cinchkabel (x1)

IntelliBeam Mikrofon (x1)

Pappständer für Mikrofon (x1)

Demo-DVD (x1)

*OSD: Bildschirmanzeige (On-Screen Display)

1. Kappe herausziehen

2. Korrekt ausrichten

Vorderer linker Kanal

Center-Kanal

Vorderer rechter Kanal

Linker Surround-Kanal

Rechter Surround-Kanal

Vorderer linker Kanal

Center-Kanal

Vorderer rechter Kanal

Linker Surround-Kanal

Rechter Surround-Kanal

Dieses Anschlussbeispiel veranschaulicht eine Möglichkeit für den Anschluss externer Komponenten wie Fernsehgerät und DVD-Player mit den mitgelieferten Kabeln. Mehrkanalton vom DVD-Player und analoge/dititale Tonsignale vom Fernsehgerät genießen.

Stellen Sie mit Hilfe des mit dem DVD-Player gelieferten Video-Cinchkabels eine Video-Verbindung zwischen dem DVD-Player und dem Fernsehgerät her.

3 Stellen Sie das Gerät in

das Gestell.

1 Stellen Sie das Gerät vor

dem Gestell auf dem Boden

ab.

Nachdem Sie die externen Komponenten

angeschlossen haben, folgen Sie den Schritten auf

der Rückseite, um das AUTO SETUP zu starten.

Fortsetzung auf

der Rückseite

2 Schließen Sie dieses

Gerät an Ihren Fernseher und

DVD-Player an.

y Tipp

Zur Optimierung der Surroundeffekte stellen Sie das Gerät in das obere Regalbrett. Ein gewisser Abstand zum Fußboden ist von Vorteil.

Hinweis

Arbeiten Sie vorsichtig, damit weder am Gerät noch am Gestell Kratzer entstehen.

Video-Verbindung

1 Audio-Cinchkabel

(Zur Ausgabe analoger Fernseh-Audiosignale über dieses Gerät.)

2 OSD-Video-Cinchkabel

(Zum Einblenden der YSP-500 Menüanzeige am Fernsehbildschirm.)

3 Optokabel

(Zur Ausgabe digitaler Fernseh-Audiosignale über dieses Gerät.)

4 Digitales Audio-Cinchkabel

(Zur Ausgabe digitaler DVD-Audiosignale über dieses Gerät.)

4 Die Aufstellung ist damit

abgeschlossen

Das folgende Beispiel zeigt die Aufstellung in einem Gestell.

Hinweis

Sehen Sie nach, ob der digitale Audio-Ausgang an

Fernsehgerät und DVD-Player eingeschaltet ist.

Audio-Verbindung

Subwoofer

(Tieftöner)

Optokabel

Ziehen Sie vor

dem Anschluss

des Optokabels

die Kappe heraus

und richten Sie

den Stecker beim

Anschluss korrekt

aus.

Wenn ein Subwoofer an dieses Gerät angeschlossen ist, schalten Sie

Ihren Subwoofer ein und führen dann das AUTO Setup-Verfahren aus

(siehe Rückseite) oder wählen Sie „SWFR“ für „BASS OUT“ in

„SUBWOOFER SET“ (siehe Seite 62 im Bedienungshandbuch).

Systemanschluss

Schließen Sie das mitgelieferte Kabel in der folgenden Reihenfolge her.

0906_YSP-500_De_guide.p65 9/6/07, 8:21 PM1

Drücken Sie ENTER, um den

AUTO SETUP-Vorgang zu starten,

und verlassen Sie den Hörraum

dann innerhalb von 10 Sekunden.

Die folgende Anzeige erscheint am Fernsehbildschirm.

Verlassen Sie den Raum innerhalb von 10 Sekunden, bevor

der AUTO SETUP-Vorgang startet.

Die Setup-Anzeigen wechseln während des AUTO SETUP-

Vorgangs automatisch.

Nach Abschluss des AUTO SETUP-Vorgangs ist auf dem

Fernsehbildschirm die folgende Anzeige zu sehen.

Falls „ENVIRONMENT CHECK FAILED“ angezeigt wird,

lesen Sie auf Seite 36 in der Bedienungsanleitung nach und

führen den Vorgang danach noch einmal durch.

y Tipp

• Das Ergebnis kann je nach Hörumgebung anders ausfallen.

•

Wenn ein Fehler auftritt, erscheint eine entsprechende Fehlermeldung auf

dem Bildschirm. Folgen Sie in einem solchen Fall den Anweisungen unter

„Fehlermeldungen für AUTO SETUP“ auf Seite 37 der Bedienungsanleitung.

Zum erneuten Starten des AUTO SETUP-Vorgangs drücken Sie RETURN.

Drücken Sie ENTER.

Die folgende Anzeige erscheint 2 Sekunden lang am

Fernsehbildschirm, wonach die Menüanzeige ausgeblendet wird.

Trennen Sie das IntelliBeam-Mikrofon ab.

Das AUTO SETUP ist hiermit beendet. Bewahren Sie das

IntelliBeam-Mikrofon an einem sicheren Platz auf.

Die Einstellungen werden automatisch im Systemspeicher

festgehalten.

Genießen Sie digitale Fernseh- oder DVD-Tonsignale mit Surroundklang.

Anweisungen zur Bedienung und Einstellung Ihres Fernsehers oder DVD-Players entnehmen Sie bitte der Bedienungsanleitung der betreffenden Komponente.

Surroundklang-Wiedergabe

Führen Sie das AUTO SETUP durch, um die Einstellungen der

Geräteparameter optimal an Ihre Hörumgebung anzupassen

Die IntelliBeam-Technologie erlaubt Ihnen eine automatische Ermittlung der für Ihren Hörraum optimalen Soundeinstellungen. Während des AUTO SETUP-

Vorgangs werden laute Testtöne ausgegeben. Achten Sie darauf, dass sich im Verlauf des AUTO SETUP-Vorgangs keine Kinder im Hörraum befinden.

Drücken Sie STANDBY/ON auf

der Fernbedienung.

Das Gerät wird dadurch eingeschaltet.

Legen Sie zunächst Batterien in die Fernbedienung ein

(siehe Seite 26 in der Bedienungsanleitung).

Stellen Sie, sofern erforderlich, den Lautstärkepegel dieses

Geräts ein.

Wenn ein Subwoofer angeschlossen ist, stellen Sie dessen

Lautstärke und Übergangs-/Tiefpassfrequenz ein. Mehr dazu

finden Sie im Hinweis auf Seite 32 der Bedienungsanleitung.

Prüfen Sie das an diesem Gerät ausgegebene mehrkanalige Digitalsignal.

Die MULTI-Anzeige (siehe Seite 42 in der Bedienungsanleitung) leuchtet im Frontblendendisplay auf. Falls

auch Ton vom Fernseher selbst erzeugt wird, schalten Sie ihn stumm. Genauere Angaben zu digitalen Audio-

Eingangssignalen finden Sie in der Bedienungsanleitung auf Seite 46.

Stellen Sie den Lautstärkepegel dieses Geräts mit VOLUME

+/– an der Fernbedienung ein.

Drücken Sie eine der Schallstahlmodustasten an der Fernbedienung,

um den gewünschten Schallstrahlmodus zu wählen.

Wählen Sie den der sechst Schallstrahlmodi, der sich für die aktuelle Eingangsquelle am besten eignet.

Weitergehende Informationen zu den Schallstrahlmodi finden Sie in der Bedienungsanleitung auf Seite 44.

Zur manuellen Feinabstimmung der Hörumgebungsparameter oder zum Vornehmen weitergehender Einstellungen für

Lautsprecherpositionen, Schallstrahlen usw. lesen Sie auf Seite 56 der Bedienungsanleitung unter „MANUAL SETUP“ nach.

Fernsehprogramme mit Surroundklang

CH LEVEL MENU

RETURNTEST

YSP

TV/AV

ENTER

CH LEVEL MENU

RETURNTEST

YSP

TV/AV

ENTER

Wählen Sie mit der Fernbedienung

des Fernsehgeräts das

gewünschte Fernsehprogramm.

Stellen Sie den

Betriebsmoduswähler auf YSP.

Das Gerät schaltet in den YSP-Betriebsmodus.

Drücken Sie TV an der

Fernbedienung dieses Geräts.

Das Gerät schaltet in den TV-Wiedergabemodus.

Mehr als 1,8 m

Innerhalb 1 m

IntelliBeam

Mikrofon

Pappständer

für Mikrofon

Hörposition

Stellen Sie das IntelliBeam mikrofon

entlang der verlängerten Mittenlinie

des Geräts in mindestens 1,8 m

Entfernung auf. Achten Sie unbedingt

darauf, dass die Höhe des IntelliBeam

mikrofons nicht mehr als 1 m von der

Mittenlinie des Geräts abweicht.

IntelliBeam

Mikrofon

Mittellinie

Durchführung von AUTO SETUP (IntelliBeam)

INTELLIBEAM MIC INPUT VOLUME STANDBY/ON

INTELLIBEAM MIC

1234

Stellen Sie das IntelliBeam mikrofon an Ihrer normalen Hörposition auf.

Verwenden Sie den mitgelieferten Karton-Mikrofonständer oder ein Stativ, damit das Mikrofon sich in derselben Höhe befindet wie Ihre

Ohren, wenn Sie an Ihrer Hörposition Platz nehmen.

IntelliBeam Mikrofon (mitgeliefert)

Schließen Sie das mitgelieferte IntelliBeam-Mikrofon an die INTELLIBEAM

MIC-Buchse an der Frontblende an.

Wir empfehlen die Verwendung des mitgelieferten Karton-Mikrofonständers für das AUTO SETUP. Bauen Sie den Ständer zusammen

und legen Sie das Mikrofon wie in der Abbildung oben auf den Ständer.

TV VOL

VOLUME

MUTE

TV INPUT TV MUTE

DVD-Wiedergabe mit Surroundklang

Wählen Sie den DVD-Eingang

am Fernsehgerät.

Stellen Sie den

Betriebsmoduswähler auf YSP.

Das Gerät schaltet in den YSP-Betriebsmodus.

1) Drücken Sie DVD an der

Fernbedienung dieses Geräts.

Das Gerät schaltet dabei in den DVD-Wiedergabemodus.

Spielen Sie die mitgelieferte Demo-

DVD auf dem DVD-Player ab.

Stellen Sie den

Betriebsmoduswähler auf YSP.

Das Gerät schaltet in den YSP-Betriebsmodus.

Halten Sie AUTO SETUP mindestens

2 Sekunden lang gedrückt.

Die Menüanzeige erscheint am Fernsehbildschirm.

Sollte die Menüanzeige nicht eingeblendet werden,

überprüfen Sie das OSD-Video-Cinchkabel (siehe

Anschlussbeispiel auf der Vorderseite).

Prüfen Sie folgende Punkte.

Bezüglich des IntelliBeam-Mikrofons

• Ist das Mikrofon entlang der imaginären, vom Gerät

gezogenen Mittenlinie aufgestellt?

• Befindet sich das Mikrofon innerhalb 1 m ober- bzw.

unterhalb der Mittenlinie des Geräts?

• Ist das Mikrofon mindestens 1,8 m vom Gerät entfernt?

Bezüglich der Raumumgebung

• Herrscht im Hörraum die erforderliche Ruhe?

Bereiten Sie sich vor, den Raum zu verlassen.

Die bestmögliche Einstellung wird unter Umständen nicht

erzielt, wenn Sie im Hörraum bleiben. Bereiten Sie alles vor,

so dass Sie den Hörraum nach Drücken von ENTER in

Schritt 10 innerhalb von 10 Sekunden verlassen können.

y Tipp

• Nehmen Sie diese Anleitung beim Verlassen des Raums mit.

•

Warten Sie draußen, bis der AUTO SETUP-Vorgang beendet ist.

• Das AUTO SETUP dauert etwa 3 Minuten.

• Sie können den gestarteten AUTO SETUP-Vorgang durch

einen Druck auf RETURN abbrechen.

Schalten Sie das Fernsehgerät ein.

Wählen Sie den richtigen

Videoeingang am Fernsehgerät.

„YSP-500“ erscheint auf dem Fernsehbildschirm. Wenn das

OSD-Video-Cinchkabel wie im Anschlussbeispiel an

Videoeingang 1 des Fernsehgeräts angeschlossen wurde,

wählen Sie den Videoeingang „1“.

Innerhalb 1 m

CH LEVEL MENU

RETURNTEST

YSP

TV/AV

ENTER

321

SLEEP

INPUTMODE

5BEAM ST+3BEAM 3BEAM

VOL MODE

AUTO

SETUP

MACRO

INPUT2INPUT1

INTELLIBEAM MIC INPUT VOLUME STANDBY/ON

INTELLIBEAM MIC

RETURNTEST

YSP

TV/AV

ENTER

RETURNTEST

YSP

TV/AV

ENTER

MACRO

INPUT2INPUT1

STB

VCR DVD AUX

321

SLEEP

INPUTMODE

5BEAM ST+3BEAM 3BEAM

VOL MODE

AUTO

SETUP

MACRO

INPUT2INPUT1

STB

VCR DVD AUX

321

STEREO

MY BEAM

5BEAM ST+3BEAM 3BEAM

MY SUR.

Pappständer für

Mikrofon

Obere

Grenzposition

des Mikrofons

Obere Grenzposition

des Mikrofons

TVAV

POWERPOWERSTANDBY/ON

VOLUME

MIN MAX

CROSSOVER/

HIGH CUT

MIN MAX

Subwoofer (Tieftöner)

Mittenhöhe

dieses Geräts

Fortsetzung von der Vorderseite

Pappständer für Mikrofon (mitgeliefert)

MULTI Anzeige

y Tipp

Sie können die in der Bildschirmanzeige gezeigte Sprache mit

den folgenden Schritten wählen.

Stellen Sie den Betriebsmoduswahlschalter auf YSP ➞ Drücken

Sie MENU ➞ Drücken Sie / zum Wählen von LANGUAGE

SETUP ➞ Drücken Sie ENTER ➞ Drücken Sie / zum

Auswählen der Sprache ➞ Drücken Sie ENTER

0906_YSP-500_De_guide.p65 9/6/07, 8:21 PM2

Anslut externa komponenter, t.ex. en tv och en DVD-spelare, till ljudprojektor.

Använd lämpliga kablar till att ansluta tv:n och DVD-spelaren till ljudprojektorn enligt nedan. Anslut nätkabeln till ett nätuttag efter att alla övriga anslutningar är klara.

För vidare information om anslutning av andra komponenter hänvisas till sidorna 16 till 24 i bruksanvisningen.

YSP-500

SNABBREFERENSGUIDE

Printed in Malaysia

WM86580 [Sv]

VCR TV/STB VIDEO TV/STB AUX

OPTICAL COAXIAL

DIGITAL INPUTOUTAUDIO INPUT

DVD SYSTEM

CONNECTOR

SUBWOOFER

COAXIAL

AUDIO OUTPUT

VIDEO

INPUT

ANALOG AUDIO

OUTPUT

OPTICAL

AUDIO OUTPUT

VCR TV/STB VIDEO TV/STB AUX

OPTICAL COAXIAL

DIGITAL INPUTOUTAUDIO INPUT

DVD SYSTEM

CONNECTOR

SUBWOOFER

DVD-spelare

Bestäm var ljudprojektorn ska installeras.

Installera ljudprojektorn på en plats där inga hinder, såsom möbler, är i vägen för ljudstrålarna. Sådana hinder kan medföra att

önskade surroundljudseffekter inte kan uppnås. Ljudprojektorn kan installeras längs en vägg eller i ett hörn.

YSP-500

Anslutning av externa komponenter till ljudprojektorn

Installering av ljudprojektorn

I denna snabbreferensguide beskrivs hur man kan ansluta en tv och en DVD-spelare till ljudprojektorn och erhålla

surroundljudseffekter på ett snabbt och enkelt sätt. För närmare information om manövrering hänvisas till bruksanvisningen.

Installera ljudprojektorn i ett rack e.dyl.

Beroende på aktuell installationsmiljö kan anslutningar till externa komponenter (se “2 Anslutning av externa komponenter till ljudprojektorn”) utföras innan

ljudprojektorn installeras. Det rekommenderas att samtliga komponenter placeras ut temporärt på önskade platser för att det ska gå lättare att avgöra vilken

åtgärd som behöver utföras först.

För vidare information om installation hänvisas till sidan 13 i bruksanvisningen.

Installera ljudprojektorn exakt på mitten av väggen, mätt från

hörnen till vänster och höger.

Installera ljudprojektorn i 40° till 50° vinkel från de

angränsande väggarna.

40° till 50°

Möbel etc. Möbel etc.

Till ett nätuttag

132

Anslut inte nätkabeln till ett

nätuttag förrän samtliga övriga

anslutningar är klara.

Artiklar som behövs för anslutningar och

manövrering

Ljudkabel med stiftkontakter (x1)

Videokabel med stiftkontakter (x1)

Optisk kabel (x1)

Digital ljudkabel med stiftkontakter (x1)

IntelliBeam-mikrofon (x1)

Mikrofonställ av hårdpapp (x1)

Demonstrations-DVD (x1)

1. Ta bort dammskyddet

2. Kontrollera riktningen

Vänster framkanal

Mittkanall

Höger framkanal

Vänster surroundkanal

Höger surroundkana

Vänster framkanal

Mittkanall

Höger framkanal

Vänster surroundkanal

Höger surroundkana

I detta anslutningsexempel visas hur sådana externa komponenter som en tv och en DVD-spelare kan anslutas till ljudprojektorn med hjälp av medföljande kablar. Med denna anslutning kan flerkanaligt ljud från DVD-spelaren och analogt/digitalt ljud från tv:n återges.

Använd den videokabel med stiftkontakter som följer med DVD-spelaren till att utföra en videoanslutning mellan DVD-spelaren och tv:n.

3 Installera ljudprojektorn i

racket.

1 Placera ljudprojektorn

framför racket.

Utför åtgärderna på baksidan för att starta

AUTO SETUP-inställning, när externa

komponenter har anslutits.

Fortsättning

på baksidan

2 Anslut denna enhet tv:n

och DVD-spelaren.

y Tips

Placera ljudprojektorn på den övre hyllan, så att den hålls borta från golvet, för att uppnå bättra surroundeffekter.

Anmärkning

Var försiktig med att inte orsaka repor på ljudprojektorn eller racket.

Videoanslutning

1 Ljudkabel med stiftkontakter

(för utmatning av analoga tv-ljudsignaler via ljudprojektorn)

2 Videokabel med stiftkontakter

(för visning av menyn till YSP-500 på tv:n)

3 Optisk kabel

(för utmatning av digitala tv-ljudsignaler via ljudprojektorn)

4 Digital ljudkabel med stiftkontakter

(för utmatning av digitala DVD-ljudsignaler via

ljudprojektorn)

4 Installationen är klar.

Nedan visas ett exempel på hur ljudprojektorn kan installeras i ett rack.

Anmärkning

Kontrollera huruvida digital ljudutmatning på tv:n och DVD-

spelaren är inkopplat.

Ljudanslutning

Subwoofer

Optisk kabel

Ta bort

dammskyddet och

kontrollera att

kontakten är

korrekt vänd, när

en kontakt på den

optiska kabeln ska

anslutas.

Om en subwoofer är ansluten till denna enhet, slå av strömmen till

subwoofern och utför därefter proceduren AUTO SETUP (se baksidan)

eller välj “SWFR” för “BASS OUT” i “SUBWOOFER SET” (se sid. 62 i

bruksanvisningen).

Systemanslutning

Anslut de medföljande kablar i följande ordning.

0906_YSP-500_Sv_guide.p65 9/6/07, 5:18 PM1

Tryck på ENTER för att starta

AUTO SETUP-inställningen och

lämna rummet inom 10 sekunder.

Följande meddelande visas på tv-skärmen. Lämna rummet

inom 10 sekunder, innan AUTO SETUP-inställningen startar.

Inställningsmenyerna ändras automatiskt under pågående

AUTO SETUP-inställning.Inställningsmenyerna ändras

automatiskt under pågående AUTO SETUP-inställning.

När AUTO SETUP-inställningen är klar visas följande meny på tv-skärmen.

Om “ENVIRONMENT CHECK (FAILED)” visas, så läs

anvisningarna på sidan 36 i bruksanvisningen och kör sedan

inställningen igen.

y Tips

• Resultet kan variera beroende på miljö.

•

Om ett fel uppstår, så visas motsvarande felmeddelande på skärmen. Kontrollera i

så fall orsaken till felet med hjälp av “Felmeddelanden för AUTO SETUP” på sidan

37 i bruksanvisningen och följ anvisningen för lämplig åtgärd. Tryck på RETURN för

att starta om AUTO SETUP-inställningen.

Tryck på ENTER.

Följande meddelande visas i två sekunder på tv-skärmen

varefter menyvisningen avbryts.

Koppla loss IntelliBeam-mikrofonen.

AUTO SETUP-inställningen är därmed klar. Spara

IntelliBeam-mikrofonen på ett säkert ställe.

Inställningarna sparas automatiskt i systemminnet.

Upplev digitalt surroundljud från tv eller DVD-skivor.

Angående manövrering av den tv eller den DVD-spelare som används hänvisas till bruksanvisningen till respektive komponent.

Återgivning av surroundljud

Utför AUTO SETUP-inställningen för att anpassa inställningar till aktuell

lyssningsmiljö.

IntelliBeam-tekniken gör det möjligt att uppnå optimala ljudinställningar i förhållande till den aktuella lyssningsmiljön. Det är normalt att höga testtoner matas

ut under pågående AUTO SETUP-inställning. Se till att inga barn finns i närheten av lyssningsrummet medan AUTO SETUP-inställningen genomförs.

Tryck på STANDBY/ON på

fjärrkontrollen.

Strömmen till ljudprojektorn slås på.

Sätt i batterier i fjärrkontrollen före manövrering (se sid.

26 i bruksanvisningen).

Reglera vid behov volymnivån på ljudprojektorn.

Om en lågbashögtalare har anslutits, så ställ in volym

och övergångsfrekvens/övre gränsfrekvens. Vi hänvisar

till anmärkningarna på sidan 32 i bruksanvisningen.

Kontrollera den flerkanaliga digitala signalen som matas ut via denna enhet.

Indikeringen MULTI (se sid. 42 i bruksanvisningen) visas på frontpanelens display. Om ljud återges via tv-

högtalarna, så stäng av ljudet på tv:n. Vi hänvisar till sidan 46 i bruksanvisningen angående detaljer kring

inmatning av digitala ljudsignaler.

Tryck på VOLUME +/– på fjärrkontrollen för att reglera

volymnivån på ljudprojektorn.

Tryck på lämplig strållägesknapp på fjärrkontrollen för att

välja önskat strålläge.

Välj det av de sex strållägena som passar bäst för aktuell ingångskälla på ljudprojektorn.

För vidare information om strållägen hänvisas till sidan 44 i bruksanvisningen.

Angående manuell finjustering av parametrarna för lyssningsmiljö samt avancerade inställningar för

högtalarpositioner, ljudstrålar m.m. hänvisas till “MANUAL SETUP” på sidan 56 i bruksanvisningen.

AUTO SETUP START

Will begin in 10sec

Please leave the room

**--------

[RETURN]:Cancel

Återgivning av surroundljud från tv

SHOW RESULT

MEASUREMENT COMPLETE

BEAM MODE :5 BEAM

SUBWOOFER :NOT APPLICABLE

[ENTER]:Save set-up

[RETURN]:Do not save set-up

AUTO SETUP COMPLETE

Please remove the MIC from

the YSP and the listening

position.

CH LEVEL MENU

RETURNTEST

YSP

TV/AV

ENTER

CH LEVEL MENU

RETURNTEST

YSP

TV/AV

ENTER

Använd fjärrkontrollen som följer

med tv:n till att välja önskad tv-

kanal.

Ställ manövreringslägesväljaren

i läget YSP.

Manövreringsläget YSP kopplas in på ljudprojektorn.

Tryck på TV på fjärrkontrollen till

ljudprojektorn.

Återgivningsläget TV kopplas in på ljudprojektorn.

Över 1,8 m

Inom 1 m

IntelliBeam-

mikrofon

Mikrofonställ

hårdpapp

Lyssningsplats

Placera IntelliBeam-mikrofonen längs

en utdragen mittlinje från

ljudprojektorn och på minst 1,8 meters

avstånd från ljudprojektorns framsida.

Se också till att den placeras inom en

meter ovanför eller nedanför

ljudprojektorns mitthöjd.

IntelliBeam-

mikrofon

Mittlinje

Utförande av AUTO SETUP-inställning (IntelliBeam)

INTELLIBEAM MIC INPUT VOLUME STANDBY/ON

INTELLIBEAM MIC

1234

Placera IntelliBeam-mikrofonen på den normala lyssningsplatsen.

Använd det medföljande mikrofonstället av hårdpapp eller ett stativ till att placera IntelliBeam-mikrofonen på samma höjd som

lyssnarens öronen är när lyssnaren sitter på lyssningsplatsen.

IntelliBeam-mikrofon (medföljer)

Anslut den medföljande IntelliBeam-mikrofonen till ingången

INTELLIBEAM MIC på frontpanelen.

Det medföljande mikrofonstället av hårdpapp kan användas vid AUTO SETUP-inställning. Montera ihop stället och placera

IntelliBeam-mikrofonen ovanpå stället enligt illustrationen nedan.

TV VOL

VOLUME

MUTE

TV INPUT TV MUTE

Återgivning av surroundljud från DVD-skivor

Välj videoingången för DVD-

spelaren på tv:n.

Ställ manövreringslägesväljaren

i läget YSP.

Manövreringsläget YSP kopplas in på ljudprojektorn.

Tryck på DVD på fjärrkontrollen

till ljudprojektorn.

Återgivningsläget DVD kopplas in på ljudprojektorn.

Spela upp den medföljande

demonstrations-DVD:n på DVD-spelaren.

Ställ manövreringslägesväljaren i

läget YSP.

Manövreringsläget YSP kopplas in på ljudprojektorn.

Tryck in och håll AUTO SETUP

intryckt i över 2 sekunder.

En meny visas på tv-skärmen.

Om menyn inte visas, så kontrollera OSD-videokabeln med

stiftkontakter (se anslutningsexemplen på framsidan).

Kontrollera följande punkter.

Angående IntelliBeam-mikrofonen

• Är mikrofonen placerad längs en tänkt mittlinje dragen från

ljudprojektorn?

• Är mikrofonen placerad inom en meter ovanför eller nedanför

ljudprojektorns mitthöjd?

• Är mikrofonen placerad över 1,8 meter från ljudprojektorns

framsida?

Angående rumsmiljön

• Är lyssningsrummet så tyst som möjligt?

Gör dig beredd att lämna rummet.

Inställningsresultatet kan bli sämre, om någon befinner sig i

rummet. Var beredd att lämna rummet inom 10 sekunder

efter tryckning på ENTER i punkt 10.

y Tips

• Ta med denna guide ut ur rummet.

• Vänta utanför rummet tills AUTO SETUP-inställningen är klar.

• AUTO SETUP-inställningen tar cirka 3 minuter.

• Tryck på RETURN för att vid behov avbryta en påbörjad AUTO

SETUP-inställning.

Slå på strömmen till tv:n.

Välj lämplig videoingång på tv:n.

“YSP-500” visas på tv-skärmen. Om OSD-videokabeln med

stiftkontakter har anslutits till videoingång 1 på tv:n enligt

anslutningsexemplen, så se till att välja videoingång “1”.

Inom 1 m

CH LEVEL MENU

RETURNTEST

YSP

TV/AV

ENTER

AUTO SETUP

PREPARATION & CHECK

Please connect the MIC.

Please place the MIC at least

1.8m/6ft away from the YSP

unit. The MIC should be set

at ear level when seated.

After [ENTER] is pressed,

please leave the room.

[ENTER]:Start [RETURN]:Cancel

Measurement takes about 3min.

321

SLEEP

INPUTMODE

5BEAM ST+3BEAM 3BEAM

VOL MODE

AUTO

SETUP

MACRO

INPUT2INPUT1

INTELLIBEAM MIC INPUT VOLUME STANDBY/ON

INTELLIBEAM MIC

RETURNTEST

YSP

TV/AV

ENTER

RETURNTEST

YSP

TV/AV

ENTER

MACRO

INPUT2INPUT1

STB

VCR DVD AUX

321

SLEEP

INPUTMODE

5BEAM ST+3BEAM 3BEAM

VOL MODE

AUTO

SETUP

MACRO

INPUT2INPUT1

STB

VCR DVD AUX

321

STEREO

MY BEAM

5BEAM ST+3BEAM 3BEAM

MY SUR.

Mikrofonställ av

hårdpapp

Övre gräns för

mikrofonens

placering

Nedre gräns för

mikrofonens placering

TVAV

POWERPOWERSTANDBY/ON

VOLUME

MIN MAX

CROSSOVER/

HIGH CUT

MIN MAX

Subwoofer

Ljudprojektorns

mitthöjd

Fortsättning från framsidan

Mikrofonställ av hårdpapp (medföljer)

Indikatorn MULTI

0906_YSP-500_Sv_guide.p65 9/6/07, 5:18 PM2

Aansluiten van externe apparatuur, zoals een tv of DVD-speler, op dit toestel.

Sluit uw tv of DVD-speler zoals hieronder aangegeven staat aan op dit toestel met behulp van de juiste kabels. Doe de stekker pas in het stopcontact wanneer u alle aansluitingen gemaakt heeft.

Zie de bladzijden 16 t/m 24 in de Handleiding voor meer informatie omtrent het aansluiten van andere apparatuur.

YSP-500

SNELGIDS

Printed in Malaysia

WM28880 [Nl]

VCR TV/STB VIDEO TV/STB AUX

OPTICAL COAXIAL

DIGITAL INPUTOUTAUDIO INPUT

DVD SYSTEM

CONNECTOR

SUBWOOFER

COAXIAL

AUDIO OUTPUT

VIDEO

INPUT

ANALOG AUDIO

OUTPUT

OPTICAL

AUDIO OUTPUT

VCR TV/STB VIDEO TV/STB AUX

OPTICAL COAXIAL

DIGITAL INPUTOUTAUDIO INPUT

DVD SYSTEM

CONNECTOR

SUBWOOFER

DVD-speler

Bepaal waar u dit toestel wilt installeren.

Installeer het toestel zo dat de geluidsbundels niet gehinderd worden door obstakels, zoals meubilair. Anders is het mogelijk

dat het surroundeffect tegenvalt. U kunt dit toestel parallel aan de wand of in een hoek installeren.

YSP-500

Aansluiten van externe apparatuur op dit toestel

Installeren van dit toestel

Deze Snelgids legt stap voor stap uit hoe u uw tv en DVD-speler kunt aansluiten op dit toestel en snel en

makkelijk kunt gaan genieten van surroundweergave. Voor details verwijzen we u naar de Handleiding.

Installeer dit toestel in een rek of kast o.i.d.

Afhankelijk van de manier waarop u dit toestel wilt installeren, kunt u misschien het beste van tevoren de externe apparatuur erop aansluiten (zie “2

Aansluiten van externe apparatuur op dit toestel”). We raden u aan eerst alle betrokken apparatuur tijdelijk bij elkaar te brengen en aan te sluiten zodat u

gemakkelijker kunt beslissen wat u het eerst zult moeten doen.

Zie bladzijde 13 in de Handleiding voor meer informatie over de installatie.

Installeer dit toestel exact in het midden van de wand, zoals

gemeten vanaf de linker en rechter hoek.

Installeer dit toestel in de hoek, met een hoek van 40° tot 50°

ten opzichte van de beide wanden.

40° t/m 50°

Voorwerpen zoals meubelstukken Voorwerpen zoals meubelstukken

Naar het

stopcontact

132

Doe de stekker niet in het

stopcontact voordat alle

aansluitingen gemaakt zijn.

Items gebruikt voor de aansluitingen en te

verrichten handelingen

Audio penstekkerkabel (x1)

Videokabel voor het in-beeld display (x1)

Optische kabel (x1)

Digitale audio penstekkerkabel (x1)

IntelliBeam microfoon (x1)

Kartonnen microfoonstandaard (x1)

Demonstratie-DVD (x1)

1. Trek het dopje eraf.

Controleer of het stekkertje de

goede kant op zit.

Linker voorkanaal

Middenkanaal

Rechter voorkanaal

Linker surroundkanaal

Rechter surroundkanaal

Linker voorkanaal

Middenkanaal

Rechter voorkanaal

Linker surroundkanaal

Rechter surroundkanaal

Dit aansluitvoorbeeld laat u een manier zien om externe apparatuur, zoals een tv en een DVD-speler, aan te sluiten op dit toestel via de meegeleverde kabel. U kunt zo genieten van de multikanaals audio van uw DVD-speler en van de analoge/digitale audio van uw tv.

Gebruik de videokabel (pen-/tulpstekker) die werd meegeleverd met uw DVD-speler om een videoverbinding te maken tussen uw DVD-speler en uw tv.

3 Plaats het toestel in de

kast.

1 Plaats het toestel voor de

kast.

Als u externe apparatuur heeft aangesloten,

dient u de stappen aan de achterkant te volgen

om de AUTO SETUP procedure te starten.

Zie

ommezijde

2 Sluit dit toestel aan op uw

tv en op uw DVD-speler.

y Tip

Voor een betere surroundweergave kunt u dit toestel het beste op de bovenste plank plaatsen, zodat het niet te dicht bij de vloer staat.

Opmerking

Wees voorzichtig dat er geen krassen komen op dit toestel of op het kastje of rek.

Videoverbinding

1 Audio penstekkerkabel

(Voor weergave door dit toestel van de analoge

audiosignalen van de tv)

2 Videokabel voor het in-beeld display

(Voor weergave van het YSP-500 menuscherm op de tv)

3 Optische kabel

(Voor weergave door dit toestel van digitale audiosignalen van de tv)

4 Digitale audio penstekkerkabel

(Voor weergave door dit toestel van de digitale audiosignalen van de DVD-speler)

4 De installatie is gereed.

Hieronder volgt een voorbeeld waarin dit toestel in een rek of kast geplaatst wordt.

Opmerking

Controleer of de digitale uitgangssignalen van uw tv en uw

DVD-speler inderdaad zijn ingeschakeld.

Audioverbinding

Subwoofer

Optische kabel

Haal het dopje van

de aansluiting voor

u de optische

kabel gaat

aansluiten en let

erop dat het

stekkertje de

goede kant op zit.

Als er een subwoofer is aangesloten op dit toestel, zet deze subwoofer

dan aan en voer vervolgens de AUTO SETUP procedure uit (zie

achterzijde), of selecteer “SWFR” bij “BASS OUT” onder “SUBWOOFER

SET” (zie bladzijde 62 in de Handleiding).

Systeemverbinding

Sluit de meegeleverde kabels aan in deze volgorde.

0906_YSP-500_Nl_guide.p65 9/6/07, 5:10 PM1

Druk op ENTER om de AUTO SETUP

procedure te laten beginnen en verlaat

vervolgens binnen 10 seconden de kamer.

Het volgende scherm zal op de tv verschijnen. U heeft 10

seconden de tijd om de kamer te verlaten voordat de AUTO

SETUP procedure begint.

Het instelscherm verandert automatisch terwijl de AUTO

SETUP procedure bezig is.

Wanneer de AUTO SETUP procedure klaar is, zal het

volgende scherm op de tv verschijnen.

Als de melding “ENVIRONMENT CHECK (FAILED)” op het

scherm verschijnt, raadpleeg dan bladzijde 36 van de

Handleiding en probeer de procedure vervolgens opnieuw.

y Tip

• De resultaten zijn mede afhankelijk van de omgeving.

•

Als er iets mis gaat, zal de bijbehorende foutmelding op het scherm verschijnen.

Raadpleeg in een dergelijk geval “Foutmeldingen voor de AUTO SETUP” op

bladzijde 37 van de Handleiding en volg de instructies. Druk op RETURN om de

AUTO SETUP procedure opnieuw op te starten.

Druk op ENTER.

Het volgende scherm zal 2 seconden lang getoond worden

op de tv, waarna het menuscherm van de tv zal verdwijnen.

Koppel de IntelliBeam microfoon los.

De AUTO SETUP procedure is nu klaar. Bewaar de

IntelliBeam microfoon op een veilige plek.

De instellingen zijn automatisch opgeslagen in het

systeemgeheugen.

Geniet van de digitale audio van uw tv of DVD in surroundweergave.

Raadpleeg de bijbehorende handleidingen voor instructies over hoe u uw tv of DVD-speler moet instellen of gebruiken.

Genieten van surroundweergave

Voer de AUTO SETUP uit om de instellingen aan te passen aan uw kamer.

De IntelliBeam technologie stelt u in staat de vereiste geluidsinstellingen makkelijk aan te passen aan uw luisteromgeving. Het is normaal dat er tijdens de

AUTO SETUP procedure luide testtonen geproduceerd worden. Zorg er daarom voor dat er zich geen kinderen in de luisterruimte bevinden wanneer de

AUTO SETUP procedure bezig is.

Druk op de afstandsbediening

op STANDBY/ON.

Dit toestel gaat nu aan.

Doe voor u gaat beginnen eerst batterijen in de

afstandsbediening (zie bladzijde 26 in de Handleiding).

Stel indien nodig het volume van dit toestel correct in.

Als u een subwoofer heeft aangesloten, stel daarop dan

het volume en de crossover/hoge afsnijfrequentie in.

Raadpleeg de opmarking op bladzijde 32 in de Handleiding.

Controleer de multikanaals digitale signalen die binnenkomen op dit toestel.

De MULTI indicator (zie bladzijde 42 van de Handleiding) zal oplichten op het display op het voorpaneel. Als

het ingangssignaal afkomstig is van uw tv, moet u misschien de geluidsweergave van uw tv uitschakelen

(“Mute”). Zie bladzijde 46 van de Handleiding voor meer informatie omtrent digitale audio ingangssignalen.

Gebruik VOLUME +/– op de afstandsbediening om het volume

van dit toestel te regelen.

Druk op één van de functietoetsen voor de geluidsbundels op de afstandsbediening

om de gewenste gebruiksfunctie voor de geluidsbundels te selecteren.

Kies uit de zes mogelijke gebruiksfuncties voor de geluidsbundels de stand die u het best vindt passen bij het signaal en

de signaalbron waar u naar wilt luisteren. Zie bladzijde 44 van de Handleiding voor meer informatie over de gebruiksfuncties voor de geluidsbundels.

Voor meer gedetailleerde aanpassingen met de hand aan uw luisteromgeving, of voor geavanceerde instellingen voor

luidsprekerposities, geluidsbundels enz., verwijzen we u naar “MANUAL SETUP” op bladzijde 56 van de Handleiding.

Genieten van uw tv met surroundweergave

CH LEVEL MENU

RETURNTEST

YSP

TV/AV

ENTER

CH LEVEL MENU

RETURNTEST

YSP

TV/AV

ENTER

Kies het gewenste tv-kanaal met

de afstandsbediening van uw tv.

Zet de schakelaar voor de bedieningsfunctie

van de afstandsbediening op YSP.

Het toestel schakelt over naar de YSB bedieningsfunctie.

Druk op de afstandsbediening

van dit toestel op TV.

Dit toestel schakelt over naar tv-weergave.

Meer dan 1,8 m

Binnen 1 m

IntelliBeam

microfoon

Kartonnen

microfoonstandaard

Luisterplek

Plaats de IntelliBeam microfoon op

een denkbeeldige lijn die recht door

het midden van dit toestel loopt, op

minstens 1,8 m afstand van het

toestel.

Zorg er ook voor dat de IntelliBeam

microfoon niet meer dan 1 m boven of

onder het midden van dit toestel

geplaatst wordt.

IntelliBeam

microfoon

Middenlijn

Voer de AUTO SETUP uit (IntelliBeam)

INTELLIBEAM MIC INPUT VOLUME STANDBY/ON

INTELLIBEAM MIC

1234

Zet de IntelliBeam microfoon op uw normale luisterplek.

Gebruik de meegeleverde kartonnen microfoonstandaard of een statief om de IntelliBeam microfoon op dezelfde hoogte als waar

normaal uw oren zouden zijn als u op uw favoriete plek zou zitten.

IntelliBeam microfoon (meegeleverd)

Verbind de meegeleverde IntelliBeam microfoon met de INTELLIBEAM

MIC aansluiting op het voorpaneel.

U kunt de meegeleverde kartonnen microfoonstandaard gebruiken voor de AUTO SETUP. Zet de standaard in elkaar en plaats de

IntelliBeam microfoon er bovenop, zoals u hieronder kunt zien.

TV VOL

VOLUME

MUTE

TV INPUT TV MUTE

Genieten van DVD’s met surroundweergave

Selecteer het ingangskanaal

voor de DVD-speler op uw tv.

Zet de schakelaar voor de bedieningsfunctie

van de afstandsbediening op YSP.

Het toestel schakelt over naar de YSB bedieningsfunctie.

1) Druk op de afstandsbediening

van dit toestel op DVD.

Dit toestel schakelt over naar DVD weergave.

Speel de meegeleverde

demonstratie-DVD op de DVD-speler.

Zet de schakelaar voor de bedieningsfunctie

van de afstandsbediening op YSP.

Het toestel schakelt over naar de YSP bedieningsfunctie.

Houd AUTO SETUP tenminste

2 seconden ingedrukt.

Het menuscherm verschijnt op de tv.

Als het menuscherm niet verschijnt, dient u de videokabel

(pen/tulpstekker) voor het in-beeld display (OSD) te

controleren (zie het aansluitvoorbeeld op de eerste bladzijde).

Controleer de volgende punten.

Betreffende de IntelliBeam microfoon

• Is de microfoon geplaatst op de denkbeeldige lijn die precies

door het midden van dit toestel loopt?

• Is de microfoon niet meer dan 1 m boven of onder het midden

van dit toestel geplaatst?

• Is de microfoon meer dan 1,8 m van de voorkant van dit

toestel geplaatst?

Betreffende de kamer

• Is de luisteromgeving (kamer) zo stil mogelijk?

Tref voorbereidingen om de

kamer snel te kunnen verlaten.

Als u in de kamer blijft, zullen de instellingen mogelijk niet

optimaal bepaald kunnen worden. Zorg ervoor dat u binnen

10 seconden nadat u bij stap 10 op ENTER gedrukt heeft,

de kamer verlaten heeft.

y Tip

• Neem deze gids mee wanneer u de kamer verlaat.

•Wacht buiten de kamer gedurende de AUTO SETUP proce-

dure.

• De AUTO SETUP procedure duurt ongeveer 3 minuten.

• Druk op RETURN om de AUTO SETUP procedure te

annuleren nadat deze al is begonnen.

Zet uw tv aan.

Selecteer het juiste videokanaal

op uw tv.

“YSP-500” zal op uw tv verschijnen. Als de videokabel

(pen/tulpstekker) voor het in-beeld display videosignaal

(OSD) is aangesloten op video ingangsaansluiting 1 van

uw tv, zoals in het aansluitvoorbeeld, moet u dus

overschakelen naar videokanaal “1”.

Binnen 1 m

CH LEVEL MENU

RETURNTEST

YSP

TV/AV

ENTER

321

SLEEP

INPUTMODE

5BEAM ST+3BEAM 3BEAM

VOL MODE

AUTO

SETUP

MACRO

INPUT2INPUT1

INTELLIBEAM MIC INPUT VOLUME STANDBY/ON

INTELLIBEAM MIC

RETURNTEST

YSP

TV/AV

ENTER

RETURNTEST

YSP

TV/AV

ENTER

MACRO

INPUT2INPUT1

STB

VCR DVD AUX

321

SLEEP

INPUTMODE

5BEAM ST+3BEAM 3BEAM

VOL MODE

AUTO

SETUP

MACRO

INPUT2INPUT1

STB

VCR DVD AUX

321

STEREO

MY BEAM

5BEAM ST+3BEAM 3BEAM

MY SUR.

Kartonnen

microfoonstandaard

Bovenste grens

microfoonpositie

Ondergrens

microfoonpositie

TVAV

POWERPOWERSTANDBY/ON

VOLUME

MIN MAX

CROSSOVER/

HIGH CUT

MIN MAX

Subwoofer

Hoogte van het

midden van dit toestel

Vervolg van de voorzijde

Kartonnen microfoonstandaard (meegeleverd)

MULTI indicator

y Tip

U kunt de taal waarin de aanduidingen op het scherm

verschijnen (OSD) selecteren via de onderstaande stappen.

Zet de schakelaar voor de bedieningsfunctie van de

afstandsbediening op YSP. ➞ Druk op MENU. ➞ Druk op /

, selecteer LANGUAGE SETUP. ➞ Druk op ENTER. ➞ Druk

op / om de gewenste taal te selecteren. ➞ Druk op

ENTER.

0906_YSP-500_Nl_guide.p65 9/6/07, 5:10 PM2

Подключение внешних компонентов, как телевизоp или DVD-пpоигpыватель, к данному аппаpату.

С помощью соответствующих кабелей, подключите телевизоp или DVD-пpоигpыватель к данному аппаpату, как показано ниже. После завеpшения всех соединений, подключите силовой кабель к pозетке пеpеменного тока.

Подpобнее о подключении дpугих компонентов, смотpите стp. 16 – 24 в Инстpукции по эксплуатации.

YSP-500

КРАТКОЕ РУКОВОДСТВО

Printed in Malaysia

WM28890 [Ru]

VCR TV/STB VIDEO TV/STB AUX

OPTICAL COAXIAL

DIGITAL INPUTOUTAUDIO INPUT

DVD SYSTEM

CONNECTOR

SUBWOOFER

COAXIAL

AUDIO OUTPUT

VIDEO

INPUT

ANALOG AUDIO

OUTPUT

OPTICAL

AUDIO OUTPUT

VCR TV/STB VIDEO TV/STB AUX

OPTICAL COAXIAL

DIGITAL INPUTOUTAUDIO INPUT

DVD SYSTEM

CONNECTOR

SUBWOOFER

DVD-пpоигpыватель

Телевизоp

Выбеpите место установки данного аппаpата.

Данный аппаpат должен устанавливаться в местах, где нет пpеп¤тствий, как мебель, стоящая на пути звуковых потоков. В ином случае,

невозможно будет достичь нужных эффектов окpужающего звучания. Данный аппаpат можно устанавливать паpаллельно стене или в углу.

YSP-500

Подключение внешних компонентов к данному аппаpату

Установка данного аппаpата

В данном кpатком pуководстве описываются пpоцедуpы подключения телевизоpа и DVD-пpоигpывателя к данному аппаpату и быстpое

и легкое достижение эффектов окpужающего звучания. Более подpобно об упpавлении, смотpите Инстpукцию по эксплуатации.

Установите данный аппаpат на подставке, дp.

В зависимости от сpеды установки, соединения с внешними компонентами (смотpите “2 Подключение внешних компонентов к данному аппаpату”)

можно выполнить до установки данного аппаpата. Рекомендуется вpеменно pазместить и подготовить все компоненты для того, чтобы pешить,

какую пpоцедуpу нужно выполнить в пеpвую очеpедь.

Подpобнее об установке, смотpите стp. 13 в Инстpукции по эксплуатации.

Установите данный аппаpат точно в центpе стены от

левого и пpавого углов.

Установите данный аппаpат в углу с углом 40° - 50° от

смежных стен.

40° - 50°

Пpедмет, напpимеp, мебель Пpедмет, напpимеp, мебель

К pозетке

пеpеменного тока

132

Пока не завеpшены все

соединения, не подключайте

силовой кабель к pозетке

пеpеменного тока.

Аксессуаpы, используемые для

подключений и упpавления

Аудиокабель (x1)

Видеокабель для дисплея-на-экpане (x1)

Оптический кабель (x1)

Цифpовой аудиокабель (x1)

Микpофон IntelliBeam (x1)

Каpтонная подставка для микpофона (x1)

Демонстpационный DVD (x1)

1. Вытяните кpышку

2. Пpовеpьте напpавление

Фpонтальный левый канал

Центpальный канал

Фpонтальный пpавый канал

Левый канал окpужающего звучания

Пpавый канал окpужающего звучания

Фpонтальный левый канал

Центpальный канал

Фpонтальный пpавый канал

Левый канал окpужающего звучания

Пpавый канал окpужающего звучания

В данном пpимеpе подключения отобpажен метод подключения внешних компонентов как телевизоp или DVD-пpоигpыватель к данному аппаpату с помощью поставляемого кабеля. Это позволит пpослушивать многоканальное звучание от DVD-пpоигpывателя и

аналоговое/цифpовое звучание от телевизоpа.

Для выполнения видеоподключения между DVD-пpоигpывателем и телевизоpом, используйте штыpьковый видеокабель, поставляемый вместе с DVD-пpоигpывателем.

3 Установите данный

аппаpат внутpи подставки.

1 Поставьте данный

аппаpат пеpед подставкой.

Если были подключены внешние компоненты,

следуя шагам на обpатной стоpоне,

пpиступите к пpоцедуpе AUTO SETUP.

Пpодолжение на

обpатной стоpоне

2 Подключите данный

аппаpат к телевизоpу и

DVD-пpоигpывателю.

y Совет

Для достижения лучших эффектов окpужающего звучания, pазместите данный аппаpат на веpхней полке, на pасстоянии от пола.

Пpимечание

Во избежание цаpапин на данном аппаpате или подставке, будьте внимательны.

Видеоподключение

1 Аудиокабель

(Вывод аналоговых аудиосигналов телевизоpа чеpез данный аппаpат)

2 Видеокабель для дисплея-на-экpане

(Oтобpажение экpана меню YSP-500 на телевизоpе)

3 Оптический кабель

(Вывод цифpовых аудиосигналов телевизоpа чеpез данный аппаpат)

4 Цифpовой аудиокабель

(Вывод цифpовых аудиосигналов DVD чеpез данный аппаpат)

4 Установка завеpшена.

На следующем пpимеpе показан метод установки данного аппаpата внутpи подставки.

Пpимечание

Убедитесь, включена-ли функция вывода цифpовых

аудиосигналов на телевизоpе и DVD-пpоигpывателе.

Аудиоподключение

Сабвуфеp

Оптический

кабель

Пеpед

подключением

оптического

кабеля, вытяните

кpышку, и затем

пpовеpьте

напpавления для

подключения

кабеля.

Пpи подключении к данному аппаpату сабвуфеpа, включите

питание сабвуфеpа, и затем выполните пpоцедуpу AUTO SETUP

(смотpите на обpатной стоpоне) или выбеpите “SWFR” для “BASS

OUT” в “SUBWOOFER SET” (смотpите стp. 62 в Инстpукции по

эксплуатации).

Системное соединение

Подключите поставляемые кабели следующим обpазом.

0906_YSP-500_Ru_guide.p65 9/6/07, 9:06 PM1

Нажмите ENTER для запуска пpоцедуpы

AUTO SETUP, и затем выйдите из

комнаты в течение 10 секунд.

На телевизоpе отобpажается следующий экpан.

Выйдите из комнаты в течение 10 секунд после запуска

пpоцедуpы AUTO SETUP.

Экpан настpойки автоматически пеpеключается во вpемя

пpоцедуpы AUTO SETUP.

По завеpшению пpоцедуpы AUTO SETUP, на телевизоpе

отобpажается следующий экpан.

Пpи отобpажении “ENVIRONMENT CHECK (FAILED)”,

смотpите стp. 36 в Инстpукции по эксплуатации, и затем

снова запустите пpоцедуpу.

y Совет

• В зависимости от сpеды, pезультат может отличаться.

•

Пpи любой ошибке, на экpане отобpажается соответствующее

сообщение об ошибке. В таком случае, смотpите “Сообщения

об ошибках для AUTO SETUP” на стp. 37 в Инстpукции по

эксплуатации, и затем следуйте инстpукциям. Для повтоpного

запуска пpоцедуpы AUTO SETUP, нажмите RETURN.

Нажмите кнопку ENTER.

На телевизоpе на 2 секунды отобpажается следующий

экpан, и затем экpан меню на телевизоpе отключается.

Отсоедините микpофон IntelliBeam.

Пpоцедуpа AUTO SETUP завеpшена. Хpаните микpофон

IntelliBeam в безопасном месте. Настpойки

автоматически сохpаняются в памяти системы.

Пpослушивание цифpового звучания от телевизоpа или DVD в pежиме окpужающего звучания.

Относительно инстpукций по упpавлению или настpойке телевизоpа или DVD-пpоигpывателя, смотpите инстpукцию по эксплуатации к каждому компоненту.

Пpослушивание окpужающего звучания

Для pегулиpовки настpоек, наилучшим обpазом подходящих для сpеды

пpослушивания, выполните пpоцедуpу AUTO SETUP.

íехнология IntelliBeam позволяет выполнить настpойки звучания, наилучшим обpазом подходящих для сpеды пpослушивания. Гpомкие тестовые тональнальные

сигналы во вpемя пpоцедуpы AUTO SETUP являются обычным явлением. Убедитесь, что во вpемя пpоцедуpы AUTO SETUP, в комнате для пpослушивания нет детей.

Нажмите STANDBY/ON на

пульте ДУ.

Пеpед упpавлением, вставьте в пульт ДУ батаpейки

(смотpите стp. 26 в Инстpукции по эксплуатации).

Пpи необходимости, настpойте уpовень гpомкости

данного аппаpата.

Пpи подключении сабвуфеpа, настpойте гpомкость и

частоту кpоссовеpа/сpеза высоких частот. Смотpите

пpимечание на стp. 32 в Инстpукции по эксплуатации.

Пpовеpьте многоканальный цифpовой сигнал, выводимый на данный аппаpат.

На дисплее фpонтальной панели высвечивается индикатоp MULTI (смотpите стp. 42 в Инстpукции по

эксплуатации). Если звучание выводится от колонок телевизоpа, пpиглушите звучание на телевизоpе

Подpобнее о цифpовых входных аудиосигналах, смотpите стp. 46 в Инстpукции по эксплуатации.

Нажимая VOLUME+/– на пульте ДУ, настpойте уpовень

гpомкости данного аппаpата.

Нажав одну из кнопок pежима луча на пульте ДУ,

выбеpите нужный pежим луча.

Выбеpите один из шести pежимов луча, наилучшим обpазом подходящий для текущего источника

пpиема данного аппаpата. Подpобнее о pежимах луча, смотpите стp. 44 в Инстpукции по эксплуатации.

Относительно точной настpойки паpаметpов сpеды пpослушивания вpучную, или для выполнения дополнительных настpоек

pасположения колонок, звуковых лучей, дp., смотpите “MANUAL SETUP” на стp. 56 в Инстpукции по эксплуатации.

Пpослушивание телевизоpа в pежиме окpужающего

CH LEVEL MENU

RETURNTEST

YSP

TV/AV

ENTER

CH LEVEL MENU

RETURNTEST

YSP

TV/AV

ENTER

С помощью пульта ДУ

телевизоpа, выбеpите телеканал.

Установите селектоp pежима

упpавления на YSP.

Данный аппаpат пеpеключается на pежим упpавления YSP.

Нажмите TV на пульте ДУ

данного аппаpата.

Данный аппаpат пеpеключается на pежим упpавления телевизоpом.

Более чем 1,8 м

В пpеделах 1 м

Микpофон

IntelliBeam

Каpтонная

подставка

для

микpофона

Место

пpослушивания

Установите микpофон IntelliBeam

на вытянутой центpальной линии

данного аппаpата, и на pасстоянии

1,8 м или более от него. Также,

убедитесь, что микpофон

IntelliBeam установлен в пpеделах 1

м выше или ниже высоты центpа

данного аппаpата.

Микpофон

IntelliBeam

Центpальная линия

Выполните пpоцедуpу AUTO SETUP (IntelliBeam)

INTELLIBEAM MIC INPUT VOLUME STANDBY/ON

INTELLIBEAM MIC

1234

Установите микpофон IntelliBeam на обычном месте пpослушивания.

С помощью поставляемой каpтонной стойки микpофона или тpеноги, установите микpофон IntelliBeam на высоте,

одинаковой с высотой ваших ушей в сидячем положении.

Микpофон IntelliBeam (поставляется)

Подключите поставляемый микpофон IntelliBeam к гнезду

INTELLIBEAM MIC на фpонтальной панели.

Для пpоцедуpы AUTO SETUP, можно воспользоваться поставляемую каpтонную стойку. Собеpите стойку и установите

микpофон IntelliBeam на ее повеpхности как показано ниже.

TV VOL

VOLUME

MUTE

TV INPUT TV MUTE

Пpослушивание DVD в pежиме окpужающего звучания

Выбеpите видеовход DVD на

телевизоpе.

Установите селектоp pежима

упpавления на YSP.

Данный аппаpат пеpеключается на pежим упpавления YSP.

1) Нажмите DVD на пульте ДУ

данного аппаpата.

Данный аппаpат пеpеключается на pежим воспpоизведения DVD.

Воспpоизведите поставляемый

демонстpационный DVD на DVD-пpоигpывателе.

Установите селектоp pежима

упpавления на YSP.

Данный аппаpат пеpеключается на pежим упpавления YSP.

Нажмите и удеpживайте AUTO

SETUP более чем 2 секунды.

На телевизоpе отобpажается экpан меню.

Если экpан меню не отобpажается, пpовеpьте

штыpьковый видеокабель дисплея-на-экpане (смотpите

пpимеp подключения на лицевой стоpоне).

Пpовеpьте следующие пункты.

О микpофоне IntelliBeam

• Установлен-ли микpофон на вообpажаемой центpальной

линии, пpоложенной от данного аппаpата?

• Установлен-ли микpофон в пpеделах 1 м выше или ниже

высоты центpа данного аппаpата?

• Установлен-ли микpофон на pасстоянии более чем 1,8 м

от фpонтальной стоpоны данного аппаpата?

О комнатной сpеде

•

Соблюдается-ли пpедельная тишина в комнате для пpослушивания?

Подготовьтесь выйти из комнаты.

Если вы находитесь в комнате, выполнение наилучшей

настpойки может быть невозможным. Подготовьтесь

выйти из комнаты в течение 10 секунд после нажатия

ENTER на шаге 10.

y Совет

• Если вы выходите из комнаты, захватите данное

pуководство с собой.

• Подождите вне комнаты во вpемя выполнения пpоцедуpы

AUTO SETUP.

• Пpоцедуpа AUTO SETUP анимает пpимеpно 3 минуты.

• Для отмены пpоцедуpы AUTO SETUP после ее запуска,

нажмите RETURN.

Включите питание телевизоpа.

Выбеpите соответствующий

видеовход на телевизоpе.

На телевизоpе отобpажается “YSP-500”. Если

штыpьковый видеокабель дисплея-на-экpане

подключен к видеовходу 1 на телевизоpе, как

показано на пpимеpе подключения, пеpеключите

видеовход на “1”.

В пpеделах 1 м

CH LEVEL MENU

RETURNTEST

YSP

TV/AV

ENTER

321

SLEEP

INPUTMODE

5BEAM ST+3BEAM 3BEAM

VOL MODE

AUTO

SETUP

MACRO

INPUT2INPUT1

INTELLIBEAM MIC INPUT VOLUME STANDBY/ON

INTELLIBEAM MIC

RETURNTEST

YSP

TV/AV

ENTER

RETURNTEST

YSP

TV/AV

ENTER

MACRO

INPUT2INPUT1

STB

VCR DVD AUX

321

SLEEP

INPUTMODE

5BEAM ST+3BEAM 3BEAM

VOL MODE

AUTO

SETUP

MACRO

INPUT2INPUT1

STB

VCR DVD AUX

321

STEREO

MY BEAM

5BEAM ST+3BEAM 3BEAM

MY SUR.

Каpтонная подставка

для микpофона

Позиция веpхнего

пpедела микpофона

Позиция нижнего

пpедела микpофона

TVAV

POWERPOWERSTANDBY/ON

VOLUME

MIN MAX

CROSSOVER/

HIGH CUT

MIN MAX

Сабвуфеp

Высота центpа

данного аппаpата

Пpодолжение лицевой стоpоны

Каpтонная подставка для микpофона (поставляется)

Индикатоp MULTI

y Совет

Следуя шагам ниже, можно выбpать язык, отобpажаемый на

дисплее-на-экpане.

Установите селектоp pежима упpавления на YSP. ➞

Нажмите кнопку MENU. ➞ Нажимая / , выбеpите

LANGUAGE SETUP. ➞ Нажмите кнопку ENTER. ➞ Нажимая

/ , выбеpите нужный язык. ➞ Нажмите кнопку ENTER.

0906_YSP-500_Ru_guide.p65 9/6/07, 9:06 PM2

Documenttranscriptie

YSP-500_G-cv.fm Page 1 Thursday, September 20, 2007 8:49 AM G YSP-500 © 2007 YAMAHA ELECTRONICS CORPORATION, USA 6660 ORANGETHORPE AVE., BUENA PARK, CALIF. 90620, U.S.A. YAMAHA CANADA MUSIC LTD. 135 MILNER AVE., SCARBOROUGH, ONTARIO M1S 3R1, CANADA YAMAHA ELECTRONIK EUROPA G.m.b.H. SIEMENSSTR. 22-34, 25462 RELLINGEN BEI HAMBURG, GERMANY YAMAHA ELECTRONIQUE FRANCE S.A. RUE AMBROISE CROIZAT BP70 CROISSY-BEAUBOURG 77312 MARNE-LA-VALLEE CEDEX02, FRANCE YAMAHA ELECTRONICS (UK) LTD. YAMAHA HOUSE, 200 RICKMANSWORTH ROAD WATFORD, HERTS WD18 7GQ, ENGLAND YAMAHA SCANDINAVIA A.B. J A WETTERGRENS GATA 1, BOX 30053, 400 43 VÄSTRA FRÖLUNDA, SWEDEN YAMAHA MUSIC AUSTRALIA PTY, LTD. 17-33 MARKET ST., SOUTH MELBOURNE, 3205 VIC., AUSTRALIA All rights reserved. Printed in Malaysia WM28790 YSP-500 Digital Sound ProjectorTM Système Acoustique Numérique OWNER’S MANUAL MODE D’EMPLOI BEDIENUNGSANLEITUNG BRUKSANVISNING GEBRUIKSAANWIJZING ИНСТРУКЦИЯ ПО ЭКСПЛУАТАЦИИ CAUTION: READ THIS BEFORE OPERATING THIS UNIT. Caution: Read this before operating this unit. 1 To assure the finest performance, please read this manual carefully. Keep it in a safe place for future reference. 2 Install this sound system in a well ventilated, cool, dry, clean place with at least 5 cm (2 in) of space above (or below) this unit – away from direct sunlight, heat sources, vibration, dust, moisture, and/or cold. 3 Locate this unit away from other electrical appliances, motors, or transformers to avoid humming sounds. 4 Do not expose this unit to sudden temperature changes from cold to hot, and do not locate this unit in an environment with high humidity (i.e. a room with a humidifier) to prevent condensation inside this unit, which may cause an electrical shock, fire, damage to this unit, and/or personal injury. 5 Avoid installing this unit where foreign object may fall onto this unit and/or this unit may be exposed to liquid dripping or splashing. On the top of this unit, do not place: – Other components, as they may cause damage and/or discoloration on the surface of this unit. – Burning objects (i.e. candles), as they may cause fire, damage to this unit, and/or personal injury. – Containers with liquid in them, as they may fall and liquid may cause electrical shock to the user and/or damage to this unit. 21 The batteries shall not be exposed to excessive heat such as sunshine, fire or the like. WARNING TO REDUCE THE RISK OF FIRE OR ELECTRIC SHOCK, DO NOT EXPOSE THIS UNIT TO RAIN OR MOISTURE. WARNING THE POWER SUPPLY CABLE OF THIS UNIT MUST BE CONNECTED TO THE MAIN SOCKET OUTLET VIA A PROTECTIVE EARTHING CONNECTION. This unit is not disconnected from the AC power source as long as it is connected to the AC wall outlet, even if this unit itself is turned off by STANDBY/ON. This state is called the standby mode. In this state, this unit is designed to consume a very small quantity of power. FOR U.K. CUSTOMERS If the socket outlets in the home are not suitable for the plug supplied with this appliance, it should be cut off and an appropriate 3 pin plug fitted. For details, refer to the instructions described below. Note that the plug severed from the mains lead must be destroyed, as a plug with bared flexible cord is hazardous if engaged in a live socket outlet. 6 Do not cover this unit with a newspaper, tablecloth, curtain, etc. in order not to obstruct heat radiation. If the temperature inside this unit rises, it may cause fire, damage to this unit, and/or personal injury. 7 Do not plug in this unit to a wall outlet until all connections are complete. IMPORTANT THE WIRES IN MAINS LEAD ARE COLOURED IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE FOLLOWING CODE: 8 Do not operate this unit upside-down. It may overheat, possibly causing damage. Blue: NEUTRAL Brown: LIVE 9 Do not use force on switches, knobs and/or cords. 10 When disconnecting the power supply cable from the wall outlet, grasp the plug; do not pull the cable. 11 Do not clean this unit with chemical solvents; this might damage the finish. Use a clean, dry cloth. 12 Only voltage specified on this unit must be used. Using this unit with a higher voltage than specified is dangerous and may cause fire, damage to this unit, and/or personal injury. Yamaha will not be held responsible for any damage resulting from use of this unit with a voltage other than specified. 13 To prevent damage by lightning, keep the power supply cable disconnected from a wall outlet or this unit during a lightning storm. As the colours of the wires in the mains lead of this apparatus may not correspond with the coloured markings identifying the terminals in your plug, proceed as follows: The wire which is coloured BLUE must be connected to the terminal which is marked with the letter N or coloured BLACK. The wire which is coloured BROWN must be connected to the terminal which is marked with the letter L or coloured RED. Make sure that neither core is connected to the earth terminal of the three pin plug. CAUTION Danger of explosion if battery is incorrectly replaced. Replace only with the same or equivalent type. 14 Do not attempt to modify or fix this unit. Contact qualified Yamaha service personnel when any service is needed. The cabinet should never be opened for any reasons. 15 When not planning to use this unit for long periods of time (i.e. vacation), disconnect the power supply cable from the wall outlet. 16 Be sure to read the “Troubleshooting” section on common operating errors before concluding that this unit is faulty. CAUTION Use of controls or adjustments or performance of procedures other than those specified herein may result in hazardous radiation exposure. This symbol mark is according to the EU directive 2002/96/EC. 17 Before moving this unit, press STANDBY/ON to set this unit in standby mode, and disconnect the power supply cable from the wall outlet. 18 Condensation will form when the surrounding temperature changes suddenly. Disconnect the power supply cable from the outlet, then leave the unit alone. 19 When using the unit for a long time, the unit may become warm. Turn the power off, then leave the unit alone for cooling. 20 Install this unit near the AC outlet and where the AC power plug can be reached easily. i En This symbol mark means that electrical and electronic equipment, at their endof-life, should be disposed of separately from your household waste. Please act according to your local rules and do not dispose of your old products with your normal household waste. Contents Overview.................................................................. 2 Features ................................................................... 3 Using this manual ................................................... 5 Supplied accessories ............................................... 6 Controls and functions ........................................... 7 Using auto-adjust function....................................... 51 Using manual-adjust function.................................. 52 Using the volume mode (Night listening enhancer/TV volume equal mode) ..................................................................53 Using the sleep timer.............................................54 ADVANCED OPERATION MANUAL SETUP.................................................56 Connections ........................................................... 16 Adjusting the audio balance.................................67 Before connecting components................................ 17 Connecting a TV...................................................... 18 Connecting a DVD player/recorder ......................... 19 Connecting a digital satellite tuner or a cable TV tuner .............................................. 20 Connecting a digital airwave tuner .......................... 21 Connecting a VCR................................................... 22 Connecting other external components ................... 23 Connecting a subwoofer .......................................... 24 Connecting the AC power supply cable .................. 25 Using the test tone ................................................... 67 Using the audio output being played back............... 68 Installation............................................................. 13 Getting started ...................................................... 26 Installing batteries in the remote control ................. 26 Operation range of the remote control..................... 26 Turning on this unit or setting it to the standby mode ............................................................................. 27 Using SET MENU................................................. 28 Displaying the OSD (on-screen display) ................. 28 The flow chart of SET MENU................................. 29 Using the system parameters ................................... 71 Setting the MEMORY PROTECT .......................... 72 Setting the MAX VOLUME.................................... 73 Setting the TURN ON VOLUME ........................... 73 Setting the DEMO MODE ...................................... 74 Setting the PANEL INP. KEY ................................ 75 Disabling the front panel keys ................................. 76 Setting the FACTORY PRESET ............................. 77 Remote control features........................................79 Setting remote control codes ................................... 79 Controlling other components ................................. 80 Using the TV macro ................................................ 83 BASIC OPERATION SETUP Selecting the input mode.......................................70 Adjusting the system parameters ........................71 SETUP Before installing this unit......................................... 13 Installing this unit .................................................... 13 Using MANUAL SETUP ........................................ 57 BEAM MENU ......................................................... 58 SOUND MENU....................................................... 62 INPUT MENU......................................................... 64 DISPLAY MENU.................................................... 66 PREPARATION PREPARATION Front panel ................................................................. 7 Front panel display .................................................... 8 Rear panel .................................................................. 9 Remote control......................................................... 10 Enjoying stereo sound...........................................50 Playing back sound clearly (My Beam)...............51 INTRODUCTION INTRODUCTION ADDITIONAL INFORMATION The flow chart of AUTO SETUP ............................ 31 Installing the IntelliBeam microphone .................... 32 Using AUTO SETUP (IntelliBeam)........................ 33 List of remote control codes ...........................................i Using the system memory .................................... 38 ADVANCED OPERATION Changing OSD language ...................................... 30 AUTO SETUP (IntelliBeam) ............................... 31 Troubleshooting.....................................................85 Glossary..................................................................88 Index .......................................................................90 Specifications .........................................................91 Convenient usage of the system memory ................ 38 Saving settings ......................................................... 38 Loading settings....................................................... 39 ADDITIONAL INFORMATION BASIC OPERATION Playback ................................................................ 41 Selecting the input source........................................ 41 Playing back sources................................................ 42 Adjusting the volume............................................... 43 Enjoying surround sound .................................... 44 English 5 Beam ..................................................................... 44 Stereo plus 3 Beam .................................................. 45 3 Beam ..................................................................... 45 My Surround............................................................ 45 Enjoying 2-channel sources in surround sound ....... 47 Enjoying TV in surround sound .............................. 48 Adjusting surround mode parameters...................... 49 1 En Overview Overview It is generally accepted that in order to fully enjoy the benefits of surround sound at home, you must endure the agony of wiring and installing a great number of speakers in the hope that your listening room will give you the same kind of surround sound experience as your local movie theater. Yamaha YSP-500 Digital Sound Projector challenges this preconception that complicated speaker setup and troublesome wiring go hand-in-hand with the enjoyment of multi-channel surround sound. This slimline unit does away with the need for complicated wiring and installation worries, leaving you with a unit that is not only easy to set up, but is also capable of reproducing the kind of powerful surround sound you have been waiting for from its built-in 2 woofers and 16 full-range small speakers. You can fine-tune the parameters of this unit to adjust the delay time for separate sound beams, resulting in highly directional sound that comes in on the listening position from all directions. The YSP-500 projects sound beams containing surround sound information for the front right (R), front left (L), surround right (SR), and surround left (SL) speaker positions, which are reflected off the walls of your listening room before reaching the actual listening position. With the addition of center (C) sound beams, this Digital Sound Projector creates true-to-life 5.1-channel surround sound that makes you feel as if there are actual speakers around the room. Sit back and enjoy the real sound experience of this simple, yet stylish Digital Sound Projector. Imaginary front right speaker R C SR L SL Imaginary surround right speaker Imaginary front left speaker Imaginary center speaker Listening position Imaginary surround left speaker 2 En Features Features My Surround In addition to the above mentioned beam modes, this unit is equipped with My Surround beam mode that allows you to enjoy surround system even in a small listening area. My Beam This unit employs My Beam that ensures a clear sound in a noisy environment. You can adjust the beam angle manually or automatically using the supplied remote control to the maximum of 30°, rightward and leftward. Versatile Remote Control The supplied remote control comes with preset remote control codes used to control the DVD player, VCR, cable TV tuner, and digital satellite tuner connected to this unit. In addition, the remote control is equipped with the macro capability that enables a series of operations with the press of a single button. AUTO SETUP (IntelliBeam) This unit employs the automatic sound beam and acoustic optimization technology with the aid of the supplied IntelliBeam microphone. You can avoid troublesome listening-based speaker setup and achieve highly accurate sound beam adjustments that best match your listening environment. Compatibility with the Newest Technologies This unit employs decoders compatible with Dolby Digital, DTS, Dolby Pro Logic, Dolby Pro Logic II, and DTS Neo:6. ◆ Dolby Digital This is the standard audio signal format used on various digital media such as DVD, Blu-ray, and HD DVD. This surround technology delivers high-quality digital audio for up to 5.1 discrete channels to produce a directional and more realistic effect. ◆ DTS This is the standard audio signal format used on various digital media such as DVD, Blu-ray, and HD DVD. This surround technology delivers high-quality digital audio for up to 5.1 discrete channels to produce a directional and more realistic effect. ◆ Dolby Pro Logic This sophisticated, matrix decoding technology up-converts any 2-channel source audio to a 5.1-channel full bandwidth playback, resulting in a surround sound experience. ◆ Dolby Pro Logic II This is a redesigned version of Dolby Pro Logic that employs 2 stereo surround channels, a subwoofer, and a greatly enhanced steering logic. This improved technology provides an exceptionally stable sound field that simulates 5.1 to a much greater degree than the original Dolby Pro Logic. ◆ DTS Neo:6 This technology decodes the conventional 2-channel sources for 6-channel playback, enabling playback with the full-range channels with higher separation. Music mode and Cinema mode are available to play back music and movie sources respectively. INTRODUCTION Digital Sound Projector™ The Digital Sound Projector technology allows one slim unit to control and steer multiple channels of sound to generate multi-channel surround sound, thus eliminates the need for satellite loudspeakers and cabling normally associated with conventional surround sound systems. This unit also employs the beam modes that let you enjoy the surround sound (5 Beam, Stereo plus 3 Beam, 3 Beam, and My Surround), stereo playback, and My Beam. English 3 En Features The “ ” logo and “IntelliBeam” are trademarks of YAMAHA Corporation. Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories. “Dolby”, “Pro Logic”, and the double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories. “DTS” and “Neo:6” are registered trademarks of DTS, Inc. Manufactured under license from 1 Ltd. Worldwide patents applied for. The “ of 1 Ltd. 4 En ” logo and “Digital Sound Projector™” are trademarks TruBass, SRS and the “ ” symbol are registered trademarks of SRS Labs, Inc. TruBass technology is incorporated under license from SRS Labs, Inc. ™ is a trademark of DiMAGIC Co., Ltd. Using this manual Using this manual 1 Install this unit in your listening room. See “Installation” on page 13. 2 Connect this unit to your TV and other external components. See “Connections” on page 16. 3 Prepare the remote control and turn on the power of this unit. See “Getting started” on page 26. 4 Run AUTO SETUP. See “AUTO SETUP (IntelliBeam)” on page 31. 5 Play back a source. See “Playback” on page 41. 6 Change the beam modes. See “Enjoying surround sound” on page 44. INTRODUCTION Notes • This manual describes how to connect and operate this unit. For details regarding the operation of external components, refer to the supplied owner’s manual for each component. • Operations in this manual use keys on the supplied remote control of this unit unless otherwise specified. • y indicates a tip for your operation. • This manual is printed prior to production. Designs and specifications are subject to change in part as a result of improvements, etc. In case of differences between the manual and the product, the product has priority. If you want to make additional settings and adjustments English 7 Run MANUAL SETUP to fine-tune settings and/or set remote control codes. See “MANUAL SETUP” on page 56 and “Remote control features” on page 79. 5 En Supplied accessories Supplied accessories Check that you have received all of the following parts. Remote control (×1) STANDBY/ON Optical cable (×1) POWER POWER AV STB Cable clamp (×1) TV VCR DVD AUX INPUT1 TV INPUT2 MACRO TV AUTO VOL MODE SETUP INPUTMODE SLEEP 5BEAM ST+3BEAM 3BEAM 1 2 3 STEREO MY BEAM MY SUR. 4 5 6 7 8 0 +10 IntelliBeam microphone (×1) Digital audio pin cable (×1) 9 SUR. DECODE CH LEVEL (Orange) MENU TV/AV ENTER YSP TEST RETURN VOLUME CH MUTE TV INPUT Cardboard microphone stand (×1) Audio pin cable (×1) TV VOL TV MUTE CODE SET (White/Red) Indoor FM antenna (×1) OSD* video pin cable (×1) Batteries (×2) (AA, R6, UM-3) Demonstration DVD (×1) (Yellow) *OSD: On-Screen Display QUICK REFERENCE GUIDE * The number of provided languages varies depending on the model. 6 En Controls and functions Controls and functions INTRODUCTION Front panel INTELLIBEAM MIC 1 INPUT 2 3 VOLUME 4 5 STANDBY/ON 6 1 INTELLIBEAM MIC jack Connect the supplied IntelliBeam microphone for AUTO SETUP (see page 32). 5 VOLUME +/– Controls the volume level of all audio channels (see page 43). 2 Front panel display Shows information about the operational status of this unit. 6 STANDBY/ON Turns on the power of this unit or sets it to the standby mode (see page 27). 3 Remote control sensor Receives infrared signals from the remote control. 4 INPUT Press repeatedly to switch between input sources (see page 41). Outputs a test tone to experience the sound beam (see page 74). Notes • When you turn on this unit, you will hear a click sound followed by the 4 to 5-second interval before sound reproducing. • In the standby mode, this unit consumes a small amount of power in order to receive infrared signals from the remote control. English 7 En Controls and functions Front panel display 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1 SRS TruBass indicator Lights up when TruBass is turned on (see page 63). 2 EQUAL indicator Lights up when the TV volume equal mode is selected (see page 53). 7 MULTI indicator Lights up when this unit detects a multi channel digital audio signal. 8 Volume level indicator Displays the current volume level. 3 NIGHT indicator Lights up when one of the night listening enhancers is selected (see page 53). 9 Multi-information display Shows information with alphanumeric characters when you adjust the parameters of this unit. 4 SLEEP indicator Lights up when the sleep timer is set (see page 54). y 5 Decoder indicators Light up when the corresponding decoder operates (see page 46). 6 PCM indicator Lights up when this unit is reproducing PCM (Pulse Code Modulation) digital audio signals. 8 En You can adjust the brightness and display setting of the front panel display using the F.DISPLAY SET parameter in MANUAL SETUP (see page 66). Controls and functions Rear panel INTRODUCTION 9 L R VCR TV/STB SUBWOOFER AUDIO INPUT VIDEO OUT DVD SYSTEM TV/STB AUX OPTICAL COAXIAL CONNECTOR DIGITAL INPUT 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 L R VCR TV/STB SUBWOOFER AUDIO INPUT VIDEO OUT TV/STB AUX DVD SYSTEM OPTICAL COAXIAL CONNECTOR DIGITAL INPUT 1 VCR AUDIO INPUT jacks Connect your VCR via an analog connection (see page 19). 6 AUX OPTICAL DIGITAL INPUT jack Connect an external component via an optical digital connection (see page 23). 2 TV/STB AUDIO INPUT jacks Connect your TV, digital satellite tuner, or cable TV tuner via an analog connection (see pages 18 and 20). 7 DVD COAXIAL DIGITAL INPUT jack Connect your DVD player via a coaxial digital connection (see page 19). 3 SUBWOOFER OUT jack Connect your subwoofer (see page 24). 8 SYSTEM CONNECTOR jack Use to connect a Yamaha subwoofer equipped with a SYSTEM CONNECTOR jack to this unit (see page 24). 4 VIDEO OUT jack Connect to the video input jack of your TV to display the OSD of this unit (see page 18). 9 AC power supply cable Connect to the AC wall outlet (see page 25). 5 TV/STB OPTICAL DIGITAL INPUT jack Connect your TV, digital satellite tuner, or cable TV tuner via an optical digital connection (see pages 18 and 20). English 9 En Controls and functions Remote control This section describes the functions of the remote control used to control this unit. Some buttons marked with an asterisk (*) share the common functions between the YSP and TV/AV operation modes (N). y You can also control other components using the remote control once you set the appropriate remote control codes. See “Controlling other components” on page 80 for details. 1 D STANDBY/ON POWER POWER *2 3 *4 5 6 AV TV VCR DVD AUX INPUT1 TV INPUT2 MACRO STB TV AUTO VOL MODE SETUP INPUTMODE SLEEP 5BEAM ST+3BEAM 3BEAM 1 2 3 STEREO MY BEAM MY SUR. 4 5 6 7 8 7 CH LEVEL 8 9 +10 MENU ENTER TV/AV YSP TEST VOLUME RETURN CH *A *B C TV INPUT TV MUTE CODE SET 4 Input selector buttons Use to select an input source (STB, VCR, DVD, AUX, or TV). 5 VOL MODE Turns on or off the volume modes (see page 53). I J K 7 CH LEVEL Adjusts the volume level of each channel (see page 68). L M N O P MUTE 3 Transmission indicator Lights up when infrared control signals are being output. 6 AUTO SETUP Enters the AUTO SETUP menu (see page 31). TV VOL *0 2 STANDBY/ON Turns on the power of this unit or sets it to the standby mode (see page 27). G* H 9 SUR. DECODE 0 E* F* 1 Infrared window Outputs infrared control signals. Aim this window at the component you want to operate. Q R 8 Cursor buttons / / / Select and adjust SET MENU items. , ENTER 9 TEST Outputs a test tone when adjusting the output level of each channel (see page 67). 0 VOLUME +/– Increases or decreases the volume level of this unit (see page 43). A MUTE Mutes the sound. Press again to restore the audio output to the previous volume level (see page 43). B TV INPUT Toggles between the input sources on the TV (see page 80). C DVD player/VCR control buttons Control your DVD player or VCR (see pages 81 and 82). D My Beam microphone Collects the test tones from this unit when using the My Beam auto-adjust function (see page 51). E TV POWER Turns on the power of your TV or sets it to the standby mode (see page 80). F AV POWER Turns on the power of the selected component or sets it to the standby mode (see pages 81 and 82). G INPUT1/INPUT2 Switches the input source on your TV (see page 80). 10 En Controls and functions H MACRO Use to set the TV macro (see page 83). INTRODUCTION I SLEEP Sets the sleep timer (see page 54). J INPUTMODE Toggles between input modes (AUTO, DTS, and ANALOG) (see page 70). K Beam mode buttons Change the beam mode settings (see pages 44, 50, and 51). L SUR. DECODE Selects the surround mode for playback (see page 47). M MENU Displays the setup menu on your TV monitor (see pages 33 and 57). N Operation mode selector Selects the operation mode of this unit. Select YSP when operating this unit and select TV/AV when operating your TV or other AV components. O RETURN Returns to the previous SET MENU screen. P TV VOL +/– Adjusts the volume level of your TV (see page 80). Q CH +/– Changes the channels of your TV, digital satellite tuner, cable TV tuner, or VCR (see pages 80 and 82). R TV MUTE, CODE SET Mutes the audio output of your TV (see page 80). Sets up remote control codes (see page 79). English 11 En Controls and functions This section describes the functions of the remote control used to control other components when the TV/AV mode is selected with the operation mode selector (4). 1 Numeric buttons Enter numbers. 2 Cursor buttons / / Use to select DVD menu items. STANDBY/ON TV VCR DVD AUX INPUT1 TV INPUT2 MACRO STB 4 Operation mode selector Selects the operation mode of this unit. Select YSP when operating this unit and select TV/AV when operating your TV or other AV components. TV AUTO VOL MODE SETUP INPUTMODE SLEEP 1 5BEAM ST+3BEAM 3BEAM 1 2 3 STEREO MY BEAM MY SUR. 4 5 6 7 8 5 RETURN Use to return to the previous DVD menu screen or exit from the DVD menu. 9 SUR. DECODE 0 +10 CH LEVEL 2 MENU ENTER TV/AV YSP TEST RETURN VOLUME CH MUTE TV INPUT TV VOL TV MUTE CODE SET 12 En , ENTER 3 MENU Displays the DVD menu. POWER POWER AV / 3 4 5 Installation Installation This section describes a suitable installation location to install this unit using a rack. Depending on your installation environment, connections with external components can be done before installing this unit. We recommend that you temporarily place and arrange all components, including this unit, in order to decide which procedure should come first. Before installing this unit y • You can enjoy surround sound by selecting My Surround (see page 45) as the beam mode even if your listening room may not fulfill the above conditions (except when the listening position is not directly facing toward the front of this unit). • You can also enjoy surround sound by selecting stereo playback (see page 50) or My Beam (see page 51) as the beam mode even if your listening room may not fulfill the above conditions. Install this unit where there are no obstacles such as furniture obstructing the path of sound beams. Otherwise, the desired surround sound effects may not be achieved. You may install this unit in parallel with the wall or in the corner. Parallel installation Install this unit in the exact center of the wall when it is measured from the left and right corners. PREPARATION This unit creates surround sound by reflecting projected sound beams off the walls of your listening room. The surround sound effects produced by this unit may not be sufficient when this unit is installed in the following locations. • Rooms with walls inadequate for reflecting sound beams • Rooms with acoustically absorbent walls • Rooms with measurements outside the following range: W (3 to 7 m (10 to 23 ft)) x H (2 to 3.5 m (7 to 11.5 ft)) x D (3 to 7 m (10 to 23 ft)) • Rooms with less than 1.8 m (6 ft) from the listening position to this unit • Rooms where objects such as furniture are likely to obstruct the path of sound beams • Rooms where the listening position is close to the walls • Rooms where the listening position is not in front of this unit Installing this unit An object, such as furniture Corner installation Install this unit in the corner at a 40º to 50º angle from the adjacent walls. 40° to 50° Make sure you leave an adequate amount of ventilation space so that heat can escape. Make at least 5 cm (2 in) of space above this unit. Notes • We do not recommend putting this unit directly on the floor of your listening room. Please install this unit using a rack. • This unit weights 8.5 kg (18 lbs 12 oz). Be sure to install this unit where it will not fall subject to vibrations, such as from an earthquake, and where it is out of the reach of children. • When using a cathode-ray tube (CRT) TV, do not install this unit directly above your TV. • This unit is shielded against magnetic rays. However, if the picture on your TV screen becomes blurred or distorted, we recommend moving this unit away from your TV. An object, such as furniture English 13 En Installation ■ Installation examples Example 1 Install this unit as close to the exact center of the wall as possible. Example 2 Install this unit so that the sound beams can be reflected off the walls. Example 3 Install this unit as close to the exact front of your normal listening position as possible. 14 En Installation ■ Using a rack Install this unit under your TV in a commercially available rack. PREPARATION This unit Note Make sure that the rack is large enough to allow adequate ventilation space around this unit (see page 13) and that it is strong enough to support the weight of both this unit and your TV. English 15 En Connections Connections This unit is equipped with the following types of audio/video input/output jacks/terminal: For audio input • 2 optical digital input jacks • 1 coaxial digital input jacks • 2 sets of analog input jacks For audio output • 1 subwoofer output jack For video output • 1 analog output jack Use these jacks/terminal to connect external components such as your TV, DVD player, VCR, digital satellite tuner, cable TV tuner, digital air wave tuner, and game console. Further, by connecting a subwoofer to this unit, you can enjoy reinforced low-bass sounds. For details on how to connect various types of external components to this unit, see pages 18 to 24. CAUTION • Do not connect this unit or other components to the mains power until all connections between components are complete. • Unplug the AC power supply cable before changing connections, moving or cleaning this unit. Audio connection Video connection TV This unit DVD player 16 En Subwoofer Digital satellite tuner or cable TV tuner VCR or game console Connections Before connecting components ■ Cables used for connections ■ Notes on connecting the optical cable Audio Audio pin cable (supplied) (White) (White) • Pull out the cap before connecting the optical cable. When you are not using the optical cable, be sure to put the cap back in place. • When inserting the cable into the optical digital jack, make sure the direction is correct. (Red) (Red) ■ Affixing cables To prevent cables from becoming unplugged, place the supplied cable clamp with the open side facing upward, attach it to the rear panel of this unit in a suitable position, and then affix cables in the cable clamp. Digital audio pin cable (supplied) (Orange) PREPARATION Cap Optical cable (supplied) (Orange) Optical cable Subwoofer pin cable 5 Attach to this unit System connector cable Video OSD video pin cable (supplied) (Yellow) (Yellow) English 17 En Connections Connecting a TV For audio connection, connect the analog audio output jacks on your TV to the TV/STB AUDIO INPUT jacks on this unit. If your TV has an optical digital output jack, connect the optical digital output jack on your TV to the TV/STB OPTICAL DIGITAL INPUT jack on this unit. For video connection, connect the video input jack on your TV to the VIDEO OUT jack on this unit to display the OSD for easy viewing when you adjust the system parameters in SET MENU. y To prevent the optical cable from being unplugged, affix the optical cable in the supplied cable clamp (see page 17). Note If you make analog and optical digital audio connections at the same time as shown in the illustration below, the digital audio signals input at the TV/STB OPTICAL DIGITAL INPUT jack take priority over the analog audio signals input at the TV/STB AUDIO INPUT jacks. Rear panel of this unit L R VCR TV/STB SUBWOOFER AUDIO INPUT R VIDEO OUT TV/STB AUX DVD SYSTEM OPTICAL COAXIAL CONNECTOR DIGITAL INPUT L Analog audio output Video input Optical digital output TV Video OSD video pin cable Audio Audio pin cable Optical cable 18 En Connections Connecting a DVD player/recorder Connect the coaxial digital output jack on your DVD player/recorder to the DVD COAXIAL DIGITAL INPUT jack on this unit. When you connect this unit to your DVD/VCR combo player/recorder, connect the analog audio output jacks on your DVD/VCR combo player/recorder to the VCR AUDIO INPUT jacks on this unit in addition to the coaxial digital audio connection. y To prevent the optical cable from being unplugged, affix the optical cable in the supplied cable clamp (see page 17). Notes Rear panel of this unit PREPARATION • Check that your DVD player/recorder is properly set to output Dolby Digital and DTS digital audio signals. If not, adjust the system settings of your DVD player/recorder. For details, refer to the operation manual supplied with your DVD player/recorder. • If your DVD player/recorder does not have a coaxial digital output jack, make an optical digital audio connection instead (see page 23). L R VCR TV/STB SUBWOOFER AUDIO INPUT * R VIDEO OUT TV/STB AUX DVD SYSTEM OPTICAL COAXIAL CONNECTOR DIGITAL INPUT For the DVD/VCR combo player/recorder connection L Analog audio output Video signal to the TV Coaxial digital output DVD player/recorder Audio Audio pin cable Digital audio pin cable English 19 En Connections Connecting a digital satellite tuner or a cable TV tuner Connect the optical digital output jack on your digital satellite tuner or cable TV tuner to the TV/STB OPTICAL DIGITAL INPUT jack on this unit. Connect the analog audio output jacks on your digital satellite tuner or cable TV tuner to the TV/STB AUDIO INPUT jacks on this unit. y To prevent the optical cable from being unplugged, affix the optical cable in the supplied cable clamp (see page 17). Rear panel of this unit L R VCR TV/STB SUBWOOFER AUDIO INPUT R Video signal to the TV This connection (except for a game console) is not necessary if your TV has a built-in digital satellite tuner, cable TV tuner, or digital airwave tuner. Audio Audio pin cable Optical cable 20 En TV/STB AUX DVD SYSTEM OPTICAL COAXIAL CONNECTOR DIGITAL INPUT L Analog audio output * VIDEO OUT Optical digital output Digital satellite tuner or cable TV tuner Connections Connecting a digital airwave tuner Connect the TV/STB AUDIO INPUT jacks on this unit to the analog audio output jacks on your TV. Connect the optical digital output jack on your digital airwave tuner to the TV/STB OPTICAL DIGITAL INPUT jack on this unit in addition to the analog audio connection. By doing so, you can enjoy both analog and digital broadcasts. y To prevent the optical cable from being unplugged, affix the optical cable in the supplied cable clamp (see page 17). Rear panel of this unit PREPARATION L R VCR TV/STB SUBWOOFER AUDIO INPUT Connect to the analog audio output jacks on the TV. * VIDEO OUT TV/STB AUX DVD SYSTEM OPTICAL COAXIAL CONNECTOR DIGITAL INPUT Optical digital output This connection (except for a game console) is not necessary if your TV has a built-in digital satellite tuner, cable TV tuner, or digital airwave tuner. Digital airwave tuner Video signal to the TV Audio Audio pin cable Optical cable English 21 En Connections Connecting a VCR To connect a VCR, connect the analog audio output jacks on your VCR to the analog audio input jacks (VCR L/R) on this unit. Connect red plugs to the right jacks and white plugs to the left jacks. Rear panel of this unit L R VCR TV/STB SUBWOOFER AUDIO INPUT R VIDEO OUT TV/STB AUX DVD SYSTEM OPTICAL COAXIAL CONNECTOR DIGITAL INPUT L Analog audio output VCR Audio Audio pin cable 22 En Video signal to the TV Connections Connecting other external components If your component supports optical digital connections, connect the optical digital output jack on your component (e.g., DVD player/recorder) to the AUX OPTICAL DIGITAL INPUT jack on this unit. y To prevent the optical cable from being unplugged, affix the optical cable in the supplied cable clamp (see page 17). Rear panel of this unit PREPARATION L R VCR TV/STB SUBWOOFER AUDIO INPUT VIDEO OUT TV/STB AUX DVD SYSTEM OPTICAL COAXIAL CONNECTOR DIGITAL INPUT Optical digital output Video signal to the TV DVD player/recorder, game console, CD player, etc. Audio Optical cable English 23 En Connections Connecting a subwoofer Connect the monaural input jack on your subwoofer to the SUBWOOFER jack on this unit. This connection alone does not output sound from the connected subwoofer. To output sound from the connected subwoofer, turn on the power of your subwoofer and then run AUTO SETUP (see page 31) or select SWFR for BASS OUT in SUBWOOFER SET (see page 62). When connecting a Yamaha subwoofer equipped with a SYSTEM CONNECTOR terminal, connect it to the SYSTEM CONNECTOR terminal on this unit. If the subwoofer is connected using a system type connection, changing the power mode of this unit controls the power mode of the subwoofer. Rear panel of this unit L R VCR TV/STB SUBWOOFER AUDIO INPUT VIDEO OUT TV/STB AUX DVD SYSTEM OPTICAL COAXIAL CONNECTOR DIGITAL INPUT 4 5 System Monaural connector input Subwoofer Audio Subwoofer pin cable 5 System connector cable 24 En Connections Connecting the AC power supply cable Once all other connections are complete, plug the AC power supply cable into the AC wall outlet. PREPARATION To the AC wall outlet English 25 En GETTING STARTED Getting started Installing batteries in the remote control y Remove the transparent sheet before using the remote control. Press Operation range of the remote control 1 Press and hold the mark on the battery cover and then open the cover. 2 Insert the two supplied batteries (AA, R6, UM-3) into the battery compartment. Make sure you insert the batteries according to the polarity markings (+/–). 3 The remote control transmits a directional infrared beam. Use the remote control within 6 m (20 ft) of this unit and point it toward the remote control sensor of this unit during operation. Approximately 6 m (20 ft) 30 Close the battery cover. 30 Notes • Change all of the batteries if you notice the following conditions: the operation range of the remote control decreases or the transmission indicator does not light up or becomes dim. • Do not use old batteries together with new ones. • Do not use different types of batteries (such as alkaline and manganese batteries) together. Read the packaging carefully as these different types of batteries may have the same shape and color. • Exhausted batteries may leak. If the batteries have leaked, dispose of them immediately. Avoid touching the leaked material or letting it come into contact with clothing, etc. Clean the battery compartment thoroughly before installing new batteries. • Do not throw away batteries with general house waste. Dispose of them correctly in accordance with your local regulations. • The memory stored in the remote control may be erased in the following cases: – The remote control is left without batteries for more than two minutes. – Exhausted batteries remain in the remote control. – The buttons on the remote control are accidentally pressed when you change batteries. • If the memory stored in the remote control is unwantedly erased, insert new batteries and set the remote control codes again. 26 En Notes • Do not spill water or other liquids on the remote control. • Do not drop the remote control. • Do not leave or store the remote control in the following places: – places of high humidity, such as near a bath – places of high temperatures, such as near a heater or a stove – places of extremely low temperatures – dusty places • Do not expose the remote control sensor of this unit to direct sunlight or lighting such as inverted fluorescent lamps. • If the batteries grow old, the effective operation range of the remote control decreases considerably. If this happens, replace the batteries with two new ones as soon as possible. Getting started Turning on this unit or setting it to the standby mode 2 Press STANDBY/ON again to set this unit to the standby mode. Note When this unit is in the standby mode, only STANDBY/ON on the front panel or on the remote control is operational, and the other control buttons on the front panel or on the remote control are not operational until the power of this unit is turned on. INPUT VOLUME STANDBY/ON STANDBY/ON POWER POWER AV STB TV VCR DVD AUX INPUT1 TV INPUT2 MACRO TV SETUP 1 Press STANDBY/ON to turn on the power of this unit. The volume level appears in the front panel display, and the current input source and beam mode are displayed. STANDBY/ON or STANDBY/ON Front panel Remote control XXVOLUMEXX30XX Current volume level XXDVDXXXMYXSUR Current input source Current beam mode English 27 En USING SET MENU Using SET MENU Displaying the OSD (on-screen display) This section describes how to display the OSD (on-screen display) of this unit on your TV screen and to set the parameters for your listening room. Once this is complete, you can enjoy real surround sound while watching TV in the comfort of your own home. 1 Check that the video input jack on your TV is connected to the VIDEO OUT jack on this unit to display the OSD of this unit. 2 Press STANDBY/ON to turn on the power of this unit. 3 Turn on the power of your TV. The following screen appears on your TV. YSP-500 STANDBY/ON or Push [MENU] to begin set-up STANDBY/ON Front panel Remote control OSD screen example If the OSD does not appear, use the remote control supplied with your TV to switch the video input until the OSD appears. 28 En Using SET MENU The flow chart of SET MENU The following diagram illustrates the overall flow of the setup procedure. Run LANGUAGE SETUP. See “Changing OSD language” on page 30. Run AUTO SETUP (IntelliBeam). See “AUTO SETUP (IntelliBeam)” on page 31. If an error occurs SETUP Look for a remedy. See “Error messages for AUTO SETUP” on page 37 for a complete list of error messages and possible remedies. Play back audio signals or adjust the settings for the beam mode. See “Playback” on page 41, “Enjoying surround sound” on page 44. If you want to make additional settings and adjustments Run MANUAL SETUP. See “MANUAL SETUP” on page 56. y • If you cannot clearly hear a sound beam from a specific channel, adjust settings for SETTING PARAMETERS (see page 58) or for BEAM ADJUSTMENT (see page 59) in BEAM MENU. • If there are acoustically absorbent objects such as curtains in the path of the sound beams, adjust settings for TREBLE GAIN in BEAM MENU (see page 61). English 29 En CHANGING OSD LANGUAGE Changing OSD language This feature allows you to select the language of your choice that appears in SET MENU of this unit. 1 Set the operation mode selector to YSP. 4 Press / to select the desired language, and press ENTER. TV/AV YSP ENTER ENTER 2 Press MENU. The SET MENU screen appears on your TV. SET MENU . ;MEMORY ;AUTO SETUP ;MANUAL SETUP ;LANGUAGE SETUP MENU p p [ ]/[ ]:Up/Down [ENTER]:Enter y • The control buttons used for SET MENU are displayed at the bottom of the screen. • To return to the previous screen while using SET MENU, press RETURN. • To exit from SET MENU, press MENU once more. • You can also perform the following operations while viewing information in the front panel display. 3 Press / to select LANGUAGE SETUP, and press ENTER. The following screen appears on your TV. ENTER ENTER ;LANGUAGE SETUP . ENGLISH DEUTSCH Francais ESPANOL ITALIANO NEDERLANDS 30 En p p [ ]/[ ]:Select [ENTER]:Return Choices: ENGLISH (English), DEUTSCH (German), Français (French), ESPAÑOL (Spanish), ITALIANO (Italian), NEDERLANDS (Dutch), Русский (Russian) AUTO SETUP (INTELLIBEAM) AUTO SETUP (IntelliBeam) This unit creates a sound field by reflecting sound beams on the walls of your listening room and by broadening the cohesion of all the channels. Just as you would arrange the speaker position of other audio systems, you need to set the beam angle to enjoy the best possible sound from this unit. This unit employs the beam optimization and sound optimization features with the aid of the supplied IntelliBeam microphone, allowing you to avoid troublesome listening-based setup and achieving highly accurate sound adjustments that best match your listening environment. We call these two features “IntelliBeam” generically. Beam optimization: This feature optimizes the beam angle so that the parameter best matches your listening environment. Sound optimization: This feature optimizes the beam delay, volume, and quality so that the parameters best match your listening environment. The flow chart of AUTO SETUP This unit performs a series of checks to optimize the beam angle, delay, volume, and quality. You can choose to optimize all or part of the parameters. Notes *1 Optimizing the beam angle Beam optimization *1 The beam angle checking procedure is skipped if SOUND OPTIMZ only is selected. *2 The sound optimization procedure is skipped if BEAM OPTIMZ only is selected. *3 The subwoofer checking procedure is skipped if BEAM OPTIMZ only is selected. SETUP Checking the environment of your listening room *2 *3 Checking the subwoofer and optimizing the beam delay, frequency, and volume Sound optimization English 31 En AUTO SETUP (IntelliBeam) Installing the IntelliBeam microphone The supplied IntelliBeam microphone collects and analyzes the sound that this unit produces in your actual listening environment. Follow the procedure below to connect the IntelliBeam microphone to this unit and make sure that the IntelliBeam microphone is placed in a proper location and that there are no large obstacles between the IntelliBeam microphone and the walls in your listening room. Notes • After you have completed the AUTO SETUP procedure, be sure to disconnect the IntelliBeam microphone. • The IntelliBeam microphone is sensitive to heat. – Keep it away from direct sunlight. – Do not place it on top of this unit. • Do not connect the IntelliBeam microphone to an extension cable as doing so may result in an inaccurate sound optimization. • An error may occur during the AUTO SETUP procedure if the IntelliBeam microphone is not properly placed in your listening room. To avoid the possibility of an error: – Do not place the IntelliBeam microphone to the extreme right or left from the center of this unit. – Do not place the IntelliBeam microphone within 1.8 m (6.0 ft) from the front of this unit. – Do not place the IntelliBeam microphone more than 1 m (3.3 ft) upper or lower from the center height of this unit. • Make sure that there are no obstacles between the IntelliBeam microphone and the walls in your listening room as these objects obstruct the path of sound beams. However, any objects that are in contact with the walls will be regarded as a protruding part of the walls. • The best possible results are achieved if the IntelliBeam microphone is placed at the same height as your ears would be when you are seated in your listening position. However, if this is not possible, you can manually fine-tune the sound beam angle and balance the sound beam output levels using MANUAL SETUP (see page 56) once the AUTO SETUP procedure is completed. • If a subwoofer with adjustable volume and crossover/high-cut frequency controls is connected to CROSSOVER VOLUME HIGH CUT this unit, set the volume between 10 and 12 o’clock as viewed on a conventional clockface and set the crossover/high-cut frequency to the maximum. MIN MAX MIN MAX Subwoofer 1 Press STANDBY/ON to turn off the power of this unit. STANDBY/ON or STANDBY/ON Front panel 2 Remote control Connect the supplied IntelliBeam microphone to the INTELLIBEAM MIC jack on the front panel. 3 Place the IntelliBeam microphone on a flat level surface more than 1.8 m (6.0 ft) from the front of the unit and within 1 m (3.3 ft) upper or lower from the center height of the unit with the IntelliBeam microphone facing upward at your normal listening position. Note Be sure to place the IntelliBeam microphone on an imaginary center line drawn from this unit. y You may want to use the supplied cardboard microphone stand to affix the IntelliBeam microphone at the same height as your ears would be when you are seated in your listening position. IntelliBeam microphone INTELLIBEAM MIC More than 1.8 m (6.0 ft) Cardboard microphone stand 32 En Upper bound position of the microphone Within 1 m (3.3 ft) upper or lower from the center height Sofa Lower bound position of the microphone AUTO SETUP (IntelliBeam) Using AUTO SETUP (IntelliBeam) Once the IntelliBeam microphone is firmly connected to this unit and properly placed in your listening room, follow the procedure below to start the AUTO SETUP procedure. You can also enter the AUTO SETUP procedure simply by pressing and holding AUTO SETUP for more than two seconds. In this case, this unit performs both of the beam optimization and sound optimization procedures. Center line IntelliBeam microphone ■ Assembling the supplied cardboard microphone stand INPUT VOLUME STANDBY/ON You will find three separate parts (one circular part and two longitudinal parts) of the cardboard microphone stand originally put together. SETUP 1 2 STANDBY/ON POWER POWER AV TV VCR DVD AUX INPUT1 TV INPUT2 MACRO STB TV AUTO VOL MODE SETUP INPUTMODE SLEEP 3 4 5BEAM ST+3BEAM 1 2 3BEAM 3 STEREO MY BEAM MY SUR. 4 5 6 7 8 9 SUR. DECODE 0 +10 CH LEVEL MENU ENTER TV/AV YSP 1 Disassemble the three parts of the cardboard microphone stand originally put together. Insert one of the longitudinal part into the crevice of the other longitudinal part. 3 Place the circular part on top of the two combined longitudinal parts. 4 Place the supplied IntelliBeam microphone on top of the circular part. VOLUME RETURN CH TV VOL English 2 TEST 33 En AUTO SETUP (IntelliBeam) 3 Notes • Make sure that your listening room is as quiet as possible while this unit is performing the AUTO SETUP procedure. • To achieve the best results possible, evacuate yourself from your listening room until the AUTO SETUP procedure is completed so that you may not obstruct the path of sound beams. • Be advised that it is normal for loud test tones to be output during the AUTO SETUP procedure. • The AUTO SETUP procedure may not be run successfully if this unit is installed in one of the rooms described in “Before installing this unit” on page 13. In such cases, run MANUAL SETUP (see page 56) to manually adjust the corresponding parameters. • If an error occurs, an error buzzer is played, the AUTO SETUP procedure stops, and an error message appears on the screen. See “Error messages for AUTO SETUP” on page 37 for appropriate remedies. SET MENU p [ ]/[ ]:Up/Down [ENTER]:Enter p 1 . ;MEMORY ;AUTO SETUP ;MANUAL SETUP ;LANGUAGE SETUP MENU y • The control buttons used for SET MENU are displayed at the bottom of the screen. • To return to the previous screen while using SET MENU, press RETURN. • To exit from the SET MENU screen, press MENU again. • You can start the BEAM+SOUND OPTIMZ procedure simply by pressing and holding AUTO SETUP for more than two seconds. Steps 4 and 5 are skipped and then the screen shown in step 5 is displayed on your TV. Start the AUTO SETUP procedure from step 6. • You can also perform the following operations in the front panel display. y • The AUTO SETUP procedure takes about three minutes maximum. A chime is played when the AUTO SETUP procedure is run successfully. • If there are curtains in your listening room, we recommend following the procedure below. 1. Open the curtains to improve sound reflection. 2. Run BEAM OPTIMZ only. 3. Close the curtains. 4. Run SOUND OPTIMZ only. • You can save the settings optimized by the AUTO SETUP procedure (see page 38). A set of settings optimized according to the specific conditions of your listening environment can be recalled later depending on the varying conditions of your listening environment (see page 39). Press MENU. The SET MENU screen appears on your TV. 4 Press / to select AUTO SETUP and press ENTER. The following screen appears on your TV. ENTER ENTER Press STANDBY/ON to turn on the power of this unit. If a subwoofer is connected to this unit, turn on the power of the subwoofer. STANDBY/ON ;AUTO SETUP or STANDBY/ON Front panel Remote control . 1)BEAM+SOUND OPTIMZ 2)BEAM OPTIMZ only 3)SOUND OPTIMZ only 2 Set the operation mode selector to YSP. TV/AV YSP 34 En p p [ ]/[ ]:Up/Down [ENTER]:Enter AUTO SETUP (IntelliBeam) 5 Press / to select BEAM+SOUND OPTIMZ, BEAM OPTIMZ only, or SOUND OPTIMZ only and then press ENTER. The following screen appears on your TV. 6 Check the following points once again before starting the AUTO SETUP procedure. • Is the IntelliBeam microphone firmly connected to this unit? • Is the IntelliBeam microphone placed in a proper location? • Are there any large obstacles in between the IntelliBeam microphone and the walls in your listening room? 7 Press ENTER to start the AUTO SETUP procedure. The following screen appears on your TV and the AUTO SETUP procedure starts in 10 seconds. Leave the room quietly before starting the AUTO SETUP procedure. ENTER ENTER AUTO SETUP PREPARATION & CHECK Please connect the MIC. Please place the MIC at least 1.8m/6ft away from the YSP unit. The MIC should be set at ear level when seated. Measurement takes about 3min. After [ENTER] is pressed, please leave the room. [ENTER]:Start [RETURN]:Cancel ENTER BEAM OPTIMZ only (Beam optimization only) Use to optimize the beam angle so that the parameter best matches your listening environment. This menu takes about one minute. SETUP BEAM+SOUND OPTIMZ (Beam optimization and sound optimization) Use to optimize the beam angle, delay, volume, and quality so that the parameters best match your listening environment. It is recommended that you should select this optimization feature in the following cases: • If you make settings for the first time. • If the unit has been relocated. • If your listening room has been restructured. • If the objects in your listening room (furniture, etc.) have been rearranged. This menu takes about three minutes. AUTO SETUP START Will begin in 10sec Please leave the room ← Flashes **-------[RETURN]:Cancel If an error occurs, an error buzzer is played and an error message is displayed. See “Error messages for AUTO SETUP” on page 37 for a complete list of error messages and their proper remedies. Follow the instructions and perform the AUTO SETUP procedure again. SOUND OPTIMZ only (Sound optimization only) Use to optimize the beam delay, volume, and quality so that the parameters best match your listening environment. It is recommended that you should select this optimization feature in the following cases: • If you have opened or closed the curtains in your listening room before using this unit. • If you have manually set the beam angle. This menu takes about two minutes. Note English You must optimize the beam angle in the BEAM OPTIMZ only procedure before starting the SOUND OPTIMZ only procedure. 35 En AUTO SETUP (IntelliBeam) 8 Check that the following screen is displayed on your TV. The results of the AUTO SETUP procedure are displayed on your TV. 9 Press ENTER to confirm the results or press RETURN to cancel the results. The following screen is displayed for two seconds and then disappears from your TV. Example 1 SHOW RESULT MEASUREMENT COMPLETE AUTO SETUP COMPLETE ← Flashes ENTER Please remove the MIC from the YSP and the listening position. BEAM MODE :5 BEAM SUBWOOFER :NOT APPLICABLE [ENTER]:Save set-up. [RETURN]:Do not save set-up. Example 2 SHOW RESULT MEASUREMENT COMPLETE ← Flashes If “ENVIRONMENT CHECK [FAILED]” is displayed in step 8, the following screen is displayed after pressing ENTER. In this case, see ERROR E-1 in “Error messages for AUTO SETUP” on page 37. Press ENTER to exit AUTO SETUP and then run the procedure again from step 3. ENVIRONMENT CHECK[FAILED] BEAM MODE :5 BEAM SUBWOOFER :YES AUTO SETUP COMPLETE [ENTER]:Save set-up. [RETURN]:Do not save set-up. Your YSP unit may not be set up correctly. We recommend you try again. Please press [ENTER] key to exit. y • If “ENVIRONMENT CHECK [FAILED]” is displayed, we recommend running the AUTO SETUP procedure again. For details, see step 9. • If “SUBWOOFER : NOT APPLICABLE” is displayed even though a subwoofer is connected to this unit, increase the volume level of the subwoofer and run the AUTO SETUP procedure again. • Depending on the environment of your listening room, the beam angle of front left and right, and surround left and right may be set to the same value even if “5 BEAM” is displayed as a result. 10 Disconnect the IntelliBeam microphone from the INTELLIBEAM MIC jack on the front panel. y If you want to save and load settings, see “Using the system memory” on page 38. 36 En AUTO SETUP (IntelliBeam) ■ Error messages for AUTO SETUP Before the AUTO SETUP procedure starts Error message ERROR E-2 No MIC detected. Please check MIC connection and re-try. Cause The IntelliBeam microphone is not connected to this unit. Remedy Connect the IntelliBeam microphone to this unit. See page 32 While the AUTO SETUP procedure is in progress If one of the errors listed below except E-1 is displayed, press RETURN. In case you have started the AUTO SETUP procedure by pressing AUTO SETUP in step 3, run the procedure again from step 3 after the screen disappears. In case you have started the AUTO SETUP procedure by pressing MENU in step 3, run the procedure again from step 4 after the screen in step 3 is displayed. Run MANUAL SETUP if the problem is difficult to be saved. Error message Cause Remedy See page There is too much unwanted noise in your listening room. Make sure that your listening room is as quiet as possible. You may want to choose certain hours during the day when there is not much noise coming from outside. — ERROR E-2 No MIC detected. Please check MIC connection and re-try. The IntelliBeam microphone was disconnected while the AUTO SETUP procedure was in progress. Make sure that the IntelliBeam microphone is firmly connected to this unit. 32 ERROR E-3 Unexpected control is detected. Please re-try. Some other operations were performed on this unit while the AUTO SETUP procedure was in progress. Do not perform any other operations while the AUTO SETUP procedure is in progress. — ERROR E-4 Please check MIC position. MIC should be set in front of YSP. The IntelliBeam microphone is not placed in front of this unit. Make sure that the IntelliBeam microphone is installed in front of this unit. 32 ERROR E-5 Please check MIC position. MIC should be set above 1.8m/6.0ft. The IntelliBeam microphone is not placed in the right distance from this unit. Make sure that the IntelliBeam microphone is installed more than 1.8 m (6.0 ft) from the front of this unit and within 1 m (3.3 ft) from the center height of this unit. 32 ERROR E-6 Volume level is lower than expected. Please check MIC position/connection and re-try. The IntelliBeam microphone cannot collect the sound produced by this unit because the sound output level is too low. Make sure that the IntelliBeam microphone is firmly connected to this unit and placed in a proper location. If the problem persists, contact the nearest authorized Yamaha service center for assistance. 32 ERROR E-7 Unexpected error happened. Please re-try. An internal system error occurred. Repeat the AUTO SETUP procedure. — SETUP ERROR E-1 Please test in quieter environment. English 37 En USING THE SYSTEM MEMORY Using the system memory Convenient usage of the system memory 3 You can save the current settings adjusted in SET MENU in the system memory of this unit. It is handy to save certain settings according to the varying conditions of your listening environment. For example, if there are curtains in the path of sound beams, the effectiveness of the sound beams will vary depending on whether the curtains are open or closed. Press / to select MEMORY and press ENTER. The following screen appears on your TV. ENTER ENTER When the curtains are closed When the curtains are open ;MEMORY . 1)LOAD 2)SAVE p 4 Saving settings 1 p [ ]/[ ]:Up/Down [ENTER]:Enter Press / to select SAVE and press ENTER. The following screen appears on your TV. Set the operation mode selector to YSP. TV/AV ENTER ENTER YSP 2 Press MENU. The SET MENU screen appears on your TV. SET MENU MENU . ;MEMORY ;AUTO SETUP ;MANUAL SETUP ;LANGUAGE SETUP • The control buttons used for SET MENU are displayed at the bottom of the screen. • To return to the previous screen while using SET MENU, press RETURN. • To exit from the SET MENU screen, press MENU once more. • You can also perform the following operations in the front panel display. 38 En [ ]/[ ]:Select [ENTER]:Enter p y . MEMORY1 MEMORY2 MEMORY3 p p p [ ]/[ ]:Up/Down [ENTER]:Enter 2)MEMORY SAVE Using the system memory 5 Press / to select MEMORY1, MEMORY2, or MEMORY3 and press ENTER. The following screen appears on your TV. ENTER ENTER Loading settings You can recall the settings saved in “Saving settings” on page 38 according to the varying conditions of your listening environment. 1 Set the operation mode selector to YSP. TV/AV YSP 2)MEMORY SAVE 2 Press MENU. The SET MENU screen appears on your TV. MEMORY1 Save Now ? SET MENU Push [ENTER] to Save . ;MEMORY ;AUTO SETUP ;MANUAL SETUP ;LANGUAGE SETUP MENU Press ENTER again. The new parameters are saved as MEMORY1, MEMORY2, or MEMORY3. Once the parameters are saved, the display returns to the SET MENU screen. SETUP 6 p p [ ]/[ ]:Up/Down [ENTER]:Enter y • The control buttons used for SET MENU are displayed at the bottom of the screen. • To return to the previous screen while using SET MENU, press RETURN. • To exit from the SET MENU screen, press MENU once more. • You can also perform the following operations in the front panel display. 2)MEMORY SAVE MEMORY1 Saving ENTER 3 Press / to select MEMORY and press ENTER. The following screen appears on your TV. SET MENU . ;MEMORY ;AUTO SETUP ;MANUAL SETUP ;LANGUAGE SETUP ENTER ENTER 7 p p [ ]/[ ]:Up/Down [ENTER]:Enter ;MEMORY Press MENU to exit. The SET MENU screen disappears from your TV. p [ ]/[ ]:Up/Down [ENTER]:Enter p MENU . 1)LOAD 2)SAVE English 39 En Using the system memory 4 Press / to select LOAD and press ENTER. The following screen appears on your TV. 6 Press ENTER again. The new parameters saved as MEMORY1, MEMORY2, or MEMORY3 are loaded. Once the parameters are loaded, the display returns to the SET MENU screen. 1)MEMORY LOAD ENTER ENTER MEMORY1 Loading ENTER 1)MEMORY LOAD . MEMORY1 MEMORY2 MEMORY3 SET MENU p p [ ]/[ ]:Select [ENTER]:Enter . ;MEMORY ;AUTO SETUP ;MANUAL SETUP ;LANGUAGE SETUP Press / to select MEMORY1, MEMORY2, or MEMORY3 and press ENTER. The following screen appears on your TV. 7 ENTER ENTER 1)MEMORY LOAD MEMORY1 Load Now ? Push [ENTER] to Load 40 En p [ ]/[ ]:Up/Down [ENTER]:Enter p 5 Press MENU to exit. The SET MENU screen disappears from your TV. MENU PLAYBACK Playback Selecting the input source You can play back sound from the components connected to this unit simply by pressing INPUT on the front panel repeatedly or pressing one of the input selector buttons (STB, VCR, DVD, AUX, or TV) on the remote control. The name of the selected input source and the type of corresponding input mode appear in the front panel display. ■ Front panel operations Press INPUT on the front panel repeatedly to toggle between TV/STB, VCR, DVD, and AUX. The name of the corresponding input source and the type of current input mode are displayed in the front panel display. ■ Remote control operations y In addition to controlling this unit, you can also operate other AV components if you set up the remote control with the appropriate remote control codes and set the operation mode selector to TV/ AV to change the control area (see page 79). Press TV to play back a TV program. TV INPUT VOLUME STANDBY/ON STB VCR DVD AUX INPUT1 TV INPUT2 MACRO XTV/STBXAUTO TV AUTO VOL MODE SETUP INPUTMODE SLEEP ST+3BEAM 1 2 3 STEREO MY BEAM MY SUR. 4 5 6 7 8 3BEAM Press STB to play back a satellite broadcast. 9 SUR. DECODE 0 +10 CH LEVEL Type of the selected input mode STB BASIC OPERATION 5BEAM Name of the selected input source MENU ENTER TV/AV YSP TEST RETURN XTV/STBXAUTO Press DVD to play back a DVD. DVD XXDVDXXXAUTO English 41 En Playback Press VCR to play back a component connected to the VCR input jack on the rear panel of this unit. 2 VCR Switch to the video input on your TV using the remote control supplied with the TV and display the DVD menu screen. Note If necessary, turn down the volume of your TV until no sound is heard. 3 XVCR Press DVD to select DVD as the input source. DVD Press AUX to play back a component connected to the AUX jack on the rear panel of this unit. 4 AUX Play back DVD on your DVD player using the supplied remote control. Audio signals from your DVD player are output from this unit. y XXAUXXXXAUTO Playing back sources Once an input source is selected (see page 41), you can play back the selected input source. Note This section uses a DVD player as an example of the playback source. y For details on your TV and DVD player, refer to the respective owner’s manual. 1 Turn on the power of your DVD player. 42 En • You can use the supplied demonstration DVD to check the digital signals being input at the DVD player with the digital connection (optical/coaxial). The MULTI indicator lights up when this unit detects the 5.1-channel signal input at the optical/ coaxial jack. If the PCM indicator lights up, confirm the settings of the digital output, bitstream output, and/or DTS output of the DVD player. • If the output volume is too low, increase the volume of this unit to around 45. • If you have set the appropriate remote control codes for your TV and DVD player, you can use the remote control supplied with this unit to operate these components. For details on how to set remote control codes, see page 79. Playback ■ Muting the sound Adjusting the volume VOLUME CH MUTE TV INPUT TV VOL TV MUTE CODE SET 1 INPUT VOLUME STANDBY/ON Press MUTE to mute the sound. “AUDIO MUTE ON” appears in the front panel display, and the volume level indicator flashes. MUTE VOLUME CH TV VOL MUTE TV INPUT TV MUTE AUDIOXMUTEXON Press VOLUME +/– to increase or decrease the volume level. The numeric value of the volume level appears in the front panel display. Control range: MIN (minimum), 01 to 99, MAX (maximum) Flashes XXDVDXXX5BEAM 2 VOLUME + VOLUME Front panel BASIC OPERATION or VOLUME Press MUTE again (or press VOLUME +/–) to resume the sound output. “AUDIO MUTE OFF” appears temporarily in the front panel display (or the numeric value of the current volume level appears if you press VOLUME +/–), and the volume level indicator lights up. MUTE Remote control or XXVOLUMEXX30XX Lights up Notes • The volume level of all input sources (including multi-channel as well as stereo sources) changes at the same time. • One volume level increases or decreases each time you press VOLUME +/–. • You can continuously increase or decrease the volume level if you press and hold VOLUME +/–. AUDIOXMUTEXOFF Note The sound output of all input sources (including multi-channel as well as stereo sources) is muted at the same time. y You can select whether the sound output is to be muted completely or by 20 dB when you press MUTE (see page 62). English 43 En ENJOYING SURROUND SOUND Enjoying surround sound You can enjoy multi-channel surround sound by changing the beam mode using the beam mode buttons on the remote control. Select 5 Beam, Stereo plus 3 Beam, 3 Beam, or My Surround for multi-channel playback. Notes • When ANGLE TO WALL OR CORNER is set in MANUAL SETUP (see page 58), 5 Beam and 3 Beam cannot be selected. • To enjoy 5 Beam, Stereo plus 3 Beam, or 3 Beam as the beam mode, you must perform AUTO SETUP or MANUAL SETUP so that the parameters best match your listening environment. 5 Beam AUTO VOL MODE SETUP INPUTMODE SLEEP 5BEAM ST+3BEAM 3BEAM 1 2 3 STEREO MY BEAM MY SUR. 4 5 6 7 8 9 SUR. DECODE 0 Outputs sound beams from the front left, front right, center, surround left, and surround right channels. This mode is ideal for enjoying surround sound effects to the fullest when you watch DVDs recorded in a multi-channel format or play back 2-channel sources in a multi-channel format. +10 CH LEVEL MENU Press 5BEAM to select 5 Beam. 5BEAM ENTER 1 TV/AV YSP TEST 1 RETURN Set the operation mode selector to YSP. TV/AV YSP 2 Notes Press one of the beam mode buttons (5BEAM, ST+3BEAM, 3BEAM, or MY SUR.) to select the desired beam mode for 5.1channel play back. 5BEAM ST+3BEAM 3BEAM 1 2 3 MY SUR. 6 44 En • To achieve the best surround sound effect, make sure that there are no obstacles placed in the path of sound beams in that the objects may prevent the sound beams from rebounding directly off the walls in your listening room. • The front left and right sound beams are output toward the walls in your listening room. • “SP Pos. Corner!” appears in the front panel display if INSTALLED POSITION is set to ANGLE TO WALL OR CORNER (see page 58). Enjoying surround sound Stereo plus 3 Beam Outputs normal sound from the front left and right channels and sound beams from the center and surround left and right channels. This mode is ideal for watching live recordings on a DVD. Vocals and instrumental sounds can be heard close to the center of the listening position while sound reflections from the venue itself can be heard on your right and left, giving you the feeling that you are sitting right in front of the stage. Press ST+3BEAM to select Stereo plus 3 Beam. y You can achieve a more realistic surround effect if you adjust settings for IMAGE LOCATION in BEAM MENU (see page 61). Notes • When you play back multi-channel sources, surround left and right signals are mixed down and output from the front left and right channels. • The front left and right sound beams are output toward the walls in your listening room. • “SP Pos. Corner!” appears in the front panel display if INSTALLED POSITION is set to ANGLE TO WALL OR CORNER (see page 58). ST+3BEAM 2 My Surround This mode enables surround system in a small listening area which may not fulfill the listening room conditions for other beam modes (see “Before installing this unit” on page 13). Use this beam mode when you want to enjoy surround sound near this unit, or when the other beam modes are unavailable. Press MY SUR. to select My Surround. MY SUR. Note 6 The front left and right sound beams are output directly toward the listening position. BASIC OPERATION 3 Beam Outputs sound beams from the front left and right and center channels. This mode is ideal for enjoying movies with the whole family. Because the listening position area is widened, you can enjoy excellent quality surround sound over a wider area. In addition, you can use this mode when the listening position is close to the backside of the wall, and the surround left and right sound beams cannot be reflected off the wall. Press 3BEAM to select 3 Beam. Notes • Beam mode settings such as beam angles and distances are ineffective in this mode. • For the full effect of My Surround, your listening position must face toward the front of this unit. 3BEAM 3 English 45 En Enjoying surround sound ■ Decoder indicators Depending on the input source and the selected surround mode, the decoder indicators in the front panel display light up as follows: Status Indicator When PCM signals are being input PCM When Dolby Pro Logic is selected as the surround mode When Dolby Pro Logic II is selected as the surround mode DTS Neo:6 Dolby Pro Logic Cinema Music Movies Music – All sources Movie Music Game Movies Music Games Notes DIGITAL PL PL y • You can select an input mode (AUTO, DTS, or ANALOG) by pressing INPUTMODE repeatedly (see page 70). • Discs encoded in DTS-ES, Dolby Digital 5.1 EX, Dolby Digital EX, or Dolby Digital Surround EX will be played back in DTS or Dolby Digital. 46 En Recommended source Surround mode Dolby Pro Logic II When DTS digital signals are being input or DTS Neo:6 is selected as the surround mode When Dolby Digital signals are being input ■ Surround modes and recommended sources • When you select an input source (see page 41), the surround mode used for the previously selected input source is automatically selected. • If the power of this unit is turned off and on again, the surround mode used for the previously selected input source before the power was turned off is automatically selected. • If the surround modes are not available, “Prohibit” appears in the front panel display when you press SUR. DECODE. • The surround modes are available: – when the beam mode is set to a setting other than the stereo playback (see page 50), My Beam (see page 51), and My Surround (see page 45). – when 2-channel signals are being input. Enjoying surround sound Enjoying 2-channel sources in surround sound This unit can decode 2-channel sources for 5.1-channel playback so that you can enjoy a variety of surround sound effects by switching the surround mode. 2 Press SUR. DECODE repeatedly (or press SUR. DECODE and then press / ) to switch between surround modes. Choices: Neo:6 Cinema, Neo:6 Music, PRO LOGIC, PLII Movie, PLII Music, PLII Game Default setting: Neo:6 Cinema y The beam mode must be set to 5 Beam, Stereo plus 3 Beam, or 3 Beam (see page 44). 5BEAM ST+3BEAM 1 2 3 STEREO MY BEAM MY SUR. 4 5 6 7 8 SUR. DECODE 3BEAM or SUR. DECODE 9 SUR. DECODE ENTER +10 0 CH LEVEL MENU ENTER TV/AV YSP TEST RETURN Neo:6 Cinema 1 Set the operation mode selector to YSP. PRO LOGIC BASIC OPERATION TV/AV Neo:6 Music YSP PLII Movie PLII Music PLII Game English 47 En Enjoying surround sound Enjoying TV in surround sound 4 If you hear sound from your TV speakers, reduce the volume level of your TV until you can no longer hear any audio being output. To reduce the TV volume level, use the remote control supplied with your TV. 5 Press VOLUME +/– to adjust the volume level. You can enjoy analog audio signals output from your TV in real surround sound. y Before performing the steps below, set the volume of this unit to 30. If necessary, adjust the volume level in step 4 below. TV INPUT2 INPUT1 MACRO VOLUME TV AUTO VOL MODE SETUP INPUTMODE SLEEP 5BEAM ST+3BEAM 1 2 3 STEREO MY BEAM MY SUR. 4 5 6 7 8 0 +10 3BEAM 9 SUR. DECODE CH LEVEL MENU ENTER TV/AV YSP TEST RETURN VOLUME CH TV VOL 6 Press SUR. DECODE repeatedly (or press SUR. DECODE and then press / ) to switch between surround modes. Signals input from 2-channel sources are played back in multi-channels. For more information on surround modes, see page 46. SUR. DECODE 1 Select the TV channel you want to watch. To select a TV channel, use the remote control supplied with your TV. or SUR. DECODE ENTER 2 Set the operation mode selector to YSP. TV/AV YSP 3 Press TV. This unit outputs audio signals from your TV. TV 48 En Enjoying surround sound Adjusting surround mode parameters You can configure the parameters for Dolby Pro Logic II Music and DTS Neo:6 Music to fine-tune the surround sound effect. 7 8 +10 CH LEVEL MENU ENTER TV/AV YSP TEST 1 PANORAMA Gives the front left and right channel sound a wraparound effect, distributed throughout the entire surround sound field to give you an expansive feeling. Choices: ON/OFF Default setting: OFF 9 SUR. DECODE 0 ■ When Dolby Pro Logic II Music is selected RETURN Repeat steps 1 and 2 in “Enjoying 2-channel sources in surround sound” on page 47 and select PL II Music or Neo:6 Music. DIMENSION Adjusts the difference in volume between the front and surround channels to the desired volume balance. Control range: –3 (toward the surround direction) to +3 (toward the front direction) Default setting: STD (standard) C. WIDTH Distributes the center channel sound to the left and right. If 0 is selected, the center channel sound is output only from the center channel. Control range: 0 to 7 Default setting: 3 ■ When DTS Neo:6 Music is selected 2 Press / to select the parameter. 3 BASIC OPERATION ENTER C. IMAGE Adjusts the center image from three channels (front left and right and center) to varying degrees. Control range: 0.0 (wider) to 1.0 (toward the center) Default setting: 0.3 Press / to configure the selected parameter. ENTER English 49 En ENJOYING STEREO SOUND Enjoying stereo sound You can enjoy 2-channel stereo playback as the beam modes by pressing STEREO on the remote control. Sounds are output from the front right and left channels. This is ideal for playing back hi-fi sources, such as CDs, and can be used to replace your TV speakers. Notes • When you play back Dolby Digital audio signals in the stereo playback, the dynamic range becomes compressed. If the volume level decreases to the extreme, use other beam modes except My Beam. • When the stereo playback is selected as the beam mode, the surround modes (see page 46) become ineffective. 1 2 3 STEREO MY BEAM MY SUR. 4 5 6 7 8 9 SUR. DECODE 0 +10 CH LEVEL MENU ENTER TV/AV YSP TEST 1 RETURN Set the operation mode selector to YSP. TV/AV YSP 2 Press STEREO to select the stereo playback as the beam mode. “STEREO” appears in the front panel display. STEREO 4 XSTEREOXMODE 50 En Note When you play back multi-channel sources, all signals except those from the front left and right channels are mixed down and output from the front left and right channels. No audio is output from the center and surround channels. PLAYING BACK SOUND CLEARLY (MY BEAM) Playing back sound clearly (My Beam) You can improve listenability in a noisy environment by changing the beam mode to My Beam, which outputs sound beams directly toward the listening position in a single channel. In addition, My Beam is also ideal when you do not want the sound beams to be reflected on the walls in your listening room or when you do not want to disturb other people while enjoying music or movies at night. My Beam microphone STANDBY/ON POWER POWER AV TV SLEEP 5BEAM ST+3BEAM 1 2 3BEAM 3 STEREO MY BEAM MY SUR. 4 5 6 7 8 9 SUR. DECODE 0 +10 CH LEVEL MENU ENTER TV/AV YSP TEST RETURN Note Using auto-adjust function The My Beam microphone on the remote control collects the test tones from this unit so that the beam angle can be automatically adjusted. 1 Set the operation mode selector to YSP. TV/AV YSP 2 Press and hold MY BEAM for more than two seconds. A test tone is output twice from this unit. Keep pointing the remote control toward this unit while the test tones are being output so that the My Beam microphone can collect the test tones. Control range: L50° to R50° Operation guarantee range: 6 m (20 ft), L30° to R30° Notes BASIC OPERATION If My Beam is selected as the beam mode, the surround modes (see page 46) and TruBass (see page 63) become ineffective. In addition, no audio is output from the subwoofer connected to this unit. • If an error occurs, an error buzzer is played and “MY BEAM ERROR” is displayed in the front panel display. • An error may occur if the listening room is noisy. Make sure that the listening room is as quiet as possible while the test tones are being output. • Do not shake or move the remote control while the test tones are being output. • Do not cover the My Beam microphone on the remote control while the test tones are being output. • The batteries in the remote control may be weak if the remote control does not function properly. In this case, replace all the batteries and then try the procedure again. • When the input signal with 64 kHz, 88.2kHz, or 96 kHz of sampling frequency is being played back, the beam angle cannot be automatically adjusted. English MY BEAM 5 51 En Playing back sound clearly (My Beam) Using manual-adjust function You can adjust the beam angle manually while playing back an input source. This function is also ideal if the listening position is out of the operation guarantee range of the auto-adjust function. 1 Set the operation mode selector to YSP. TV/AV YSP 2 Press MY BEAM. “MY BEAM” is displayed in the front panel display. MY BEAM 5 3 Press / while “MY BEAM” is displayed to adjust the beam angle. Control range: L90° to R90° • Press repeatedly to increase the horizontal angle on the left side. • Press repeatedly to increase the horizontal angle on the right side. ENTER ANGLE 4 0 Press MY BEAM again to complete the beam angle adjustment. 52 En USING THE VOLUME MODE (NIGHT LISTENING ENHANCER/TV VOLUME EQUAL MODE) Using the volume mode (Night listening enhancer/TV volume equal mode) The night listening enhancers are designed to improve listenability at lower volumes or at night. In addition, you can limit the volume level of the TV so that it will not vary suddenly to a great extent whenever the contents being broadcast change (i.e. due to commercials, etc.). The EQUAL indicator lights up in the front panel display when “TV EQUAL VOLUME” is selected. AUTO VOL MODE SETUP INPUTMODE SLEEP 5BEAM ST+3BEAM 1 2 3BEAM 3 STEREO MY BEAM MY SUR. 4 5 6 7 8 9 Lights up SUR. DECODE 0 +10 CH LEVEL • Select NIGHT:CINEMA when watching films to reduce the dynamic range of film soundtracks and to make dialog easier to hear at lower volumes. • Select NIGHT:MUSIC when listening to music sources to preserve ease-of-listening for all sounds. • Select TV EQUAL VOLUME when watching TV programs. • Select OFF to turn off the volume mode. MENU ENTER TV/AV YSP TEST 1 RETURN Set the operation mode selector to YSP. TV/AV YSP Press / to adjust the effect level of compression while NIGHT:CINEMA, NIGHT:MUSIC, or TV EQUAL VOLUME is displayed. Press VOL MODE repeatedly to select NIGHT:CINEMA, NIGHT:MUSIC, TV EQUAL VOLUME, or OFF. ENTER BASIC OPERATION 2 3 VOL MODE Effect.Lvl:MIN NIGHT:CINEMA Effect.Lvl:MID NIGHT:MUSIC Effect.Lvl:MAX TV EQUAL VOL OFF The NIGHT indicator lights up in the front panel display when “NIGHT:CINEMA” or “NIGHT:MUSIC” is selected. • Select Effect.Lvl:MIN for minimum compression. • Select Effect.Lvl:MID for standard compression. • Select Effect.Lvl:MAX for maximum compression. Notes Lights up 53 En English • The volume mode settings are canceled if you press STANDBY/ON or disconnect the AC power supply cable from the AC wall outlet. • The volume mode settings become ineffective when My Surround is selected as the beam mode (see page 45). USING THE SLEEP TIMER Using the sleep timer Use this feature to automatically set this unit to the standby mode after a specified period of time. The sleep timer is useful if you are going to sleep after a certain amount of time while this unit is still playing back a source. TV INPUT2 INPUT1 Each time you press SLEEP, the front panel display changes as shown below. MACRO TV AUTO VOL MODE SETUP INPUTMODE SLEEP 5BEAM ST+3BEAM SLEEP 3BEAM 1 2 3 STEREO MY BEAM MY SUR. 4 5 6 7 8 9 SUR. DECODE 0 +10 CH LEVEL ENTER SLEEP 90min SLEEP 60min SLEEP 30min SLEEP OFF TV/AV YSP RETURN Set the operation mode selector to YSP. 3 TV/AV YSP 2 120min MENU TEST 1 SLEEP Press SLEEP repeatedly to set the interval for the sleep timer. Choices: 120min, 90min, 60min, 30min, OFF The SLEEP indicator flashes in the front panel display while switching the interval for the sleep timer. SLEEP Flashes 54 En Wait for a few seconds without operating this unit to confirm the setting for the sleep timer. The SLEEP indicator lights up in the front panel display, indicating that the sleep timer is activated. Lights up Using the sleep timer ■ Canceling the sleep timer 1 Set the operation mode selector to YSP. TV/AV YSP 2 Press SLEEP repeatedly until “SLEEP OFF” appears in the front panel display. SLEEP XSLEEPXXOFF 3 Wait for a few seconds without operating this unit to confirm the setting for the sleep timer. The SLEEP indicator disappears from the front panel display, indicating that the sleep timer is deactivated. Disappears BASIC OPERATION Note The previous setting for the sleep timer before you deactivate it is stored in the system memory. y The sleep timer setting can also be deactivated if you press STANDBY/ON to set this unit to the standby mode or unplug the AC power supply cable from the AC outlet. English 55 En MANUAL SETUP MANUAL SETUP To achieve the best quality surround sound, you can use MANUAL SETUP to fine-tune the listening environment parameters, as well as to make advanced settings for sound signals, sound beams, digital input, and the OSD. Change the initial settings (indicated in bold under each parameter) to reflect the needs of your own listening environment. y • You can save the settings optimized by the AUTO SETUP procedure (see page 38). A set of settings optimized according to the specific conditions of your listening environment can be recalled later depending on the varying conditions of your listening environment (see page 39). • Most of the parameters in SOUND MENU and BEAM MENU are automatically set when you run AUTO SETUP (see page 31). Use SOUND MENU and BEAM MENU to make additional adjustments. • BEAM MENU allows you to make settings for the surround sound effects normally available in the speaker settings menu. • Make settings for the parameters in BEAM MENU first before making settings for the parameters in SOUND MENU, INPUT MENU, and DISPLAY MENU. SOUND MENU Use to manually adjust the various parameters related to the sound output. Item Features Page TONE CONTROL Adjusts the output level of high-frequency or low-frequency sound. 62 SUBWOOFER SET Adjusts the various subwoofer settings. 62 MUTE LEVEL Adjusts the muting level. 62 AUDIO DELAY Adjusts the audio delay. 63 DD/DTS Dynamic Range Adjusts the dynamic range of Dolby Digital or DTS signals. 63 TruBass Selects the bass sound enhancer. 63 BEAM MENU Use to manually adjust the various parameters related to the sound beam output. Item Features Page SETTING PARAMETERS Adjusts the listening room and listening position settings. 58 BEAM ADJUSTMENT Adjusts the various sound beam settings. 59 IMAGE LOCATION Adjusts the sound position of the front left and right channels. 61 INPUT MENU Use to manually adjust the various parameters related to the audio and video input. Item Features Page INPUT MODE Selects the initial input of the source. 64 INPUT TRIM Adjusts the input level of the source. 64 INPUT RENAME Renames the displayed input source. 65 DISPLAY MENU Use to manually adjust the various parameters related to the display. Item Features Page F.DISPLAY SET Adjusts the front panel display settings. 66 OSD SET Adjusts the OSD settings. 66 UNIT SET Changes the display unit of measurement. 66 56 En MANUAL SETUP Using MANUAL SETUP 3 Use the remote control to access and adjust each parameter. 7 8 Press / to select MANUAL SETUP and press ENTER. The following screen appears on your TV. 9 SUR. DECODE 0 ENTER +10 ENTER CH LEVEL MENU TV/AV ENTER YSP TEST VOLUME RETURN CH ;MANUAL SETUP TV VOL . 1)SOUND MENU 2)BEAM MENU 3)INPUT MENU 4)DISPLAY MENU p p [ ]/[ ]:Up/Down [ENTER]:Enter y You can adjust the SET MENU parameters while the unit is reproducing sound. 1 Set the operation mode selector to YSP. 4 Press / ENTER. to select a sub menu and press TV/AV YSP ENTER ENTER 2 Press MENU. The SET MENU screen appears on your TV. SET MENU MENU 5 . ;MEMORY ;AUTO SETUP ;MANUAL SETUP ;LANGUAGE SETUP Press / / / each parameter. and ENTER to configure ADVANCED OPERATION p p [ ]/[ ]:Up/Down [ENTER]:Enter ENTER y • The control buttons used for SET MENU are displayed at the bottom of the screen. • To return to the previous screen while using SET MENU, press RETURN. • To exit from the SET MENU screen, press MENU once more. • You can also perform the following operations in the front panel display. 6 Press MENU to exit. The OSD disappears from your TV screen. MENU English 57 En MANUAL SETUP BEAM MENU ANGLE TO WALL OR CORNER FLAT TO WALL Use to manually adjust the various parameters related to the sound beam output. SET MENU → MANUAL SETUP → BEAM MENU 2)BEAM MENU . A)SETTING PARAMETERS B)BEAM ADJUSTMENT C)IMAGE LOCATION p p [ ]/[ ]:Up/Down [ENTER]:Enter y You can adjust the sound beam output level of each channel in “Adjusting the audio balance” (see page 67). • Select FLAT TO WALL if this unit is installed in parallel with the wall in your listening room. Adjust the width and length of your listening room as well as the distance of the listening position from this unit and the distance of the center of this unit from the left wall. Listening position from the left wall ■ SETTING PARAMETERS (Setting parameters) Use to set the position of this unit in your listening room and the distance of this unit from the listening position. When you make settings for each parameter, other related parameters are automatically adjusted to best match your listening environment. Listening position from the unit Room length Room width Note Choices for the room width and length: 2.0 m to 12.0 m (6.5 ft to 40.0 ft) Choices for the listening position from this unit: 1.8 m to 9.0 m (6.0 ft to 30.0 ft) Choices for the listening position from the left wall: 0.6 m to 11.4 m (2.0 ft to 38.0 ft) A)SETTING PARAMETERS 1/3 A)SETTING PARAMETERS 2/3 . INSTALLED POSITION ;;;;;;;FLAT TO WALL p p p p [ ]/[ ]:Up/Down [ ]/[ ]:Sel [ENTER]:Return | -------[ 5.4m ]| 4.9m | Room width and length p p If you make adjustments in SETTING PARAMETERS, the beam optimization settings made in the AUTO SETUP procedure will be lost. If you want to keep the beam optimization settings made in the AUTO SETUP and make further adjustments, adjust settings in BEAM ADJUSTMENT first (see page 59). A)SETTING PARAMETERS 3/3 Listening position from the unit and the left wall --------| 2.7m [ 2.5m ] | p p INSTALLED POSITION (Installed position of this unit) Use to adjust the installed position of this unit. Choices: FLAT TO WALL (Parallel to wall installation), ANGLE TO WALL OR CORNER (Corner installation) p p [ ]/[ ]:Up/Down [ ]/[ ]:Sel [ENTER]:Return 58 En p p [ ]/[ ]:Up/Down [ ]/[ ]:Sel [ENTER]:Return MANUAL SETUP • Select ANGLE TO WALL OR CORNER if this unit is installed in the corner of your listening room. Adjust the width and length of your listening room as well as the distance of the listening position from this unit. Listening position from the unit ■ BEAM ADJUSTMENT (Beam adjustment) Use to manually adjust the various sound beam settings. We recommend that you select 5 Beam as the beam mode before adjusting these parameters (see page 44). Notes • When INSTALLED POSITION is adjusted in MANUAL SETUP (see page 58), the factory default value is automatically set for this parameter except Center in FOCAL LENGTH (see page 60). • Depending on the beam mode settings (see pages 44 and 50), some channel positions may not be available for selection. In this case, “– –” is displayed. When using Stereo plus 3 Beam as the beam mode, set the surround left and right signals to be output from the front left and right channels. Room width Room length B)BEAM ADJUSTMENT . a)HORIZONTAL ANGLE b)BEAM TRAVEL LENGTH c)FOCAL LENGTH d)TREBLE GAIN p [ ]/[ ]:Up/Down [ENTER]:Enter p Choices for the room width and length: 2.0 m to 12.0 m (6.5 ft to 40.0 ft) Choices for the listening position from this unit: 1.8 m to 9.0 m (6.0 ft to 30.0 ft) A)SETTING PARAMETERS 2/3 ----- 5.4m --- Room width and length p p | [ 5.4m ] | | p p [ ]/[ ]:Up/Down [ ]/[ ]:Sel [ENTER]:Return HORIZONTAL ANGLE (Horizontal angle) Use to adjust the horizontal angle of sound beams for each channel. By adjusting the horizontal angle of the sound beams, you can optimize the sound beam paths. A test tone is automatically output. ( ) (+) (+) ( ) A)SETTING PARAMETERS 3/3 p p Note When you set the INSTALLED POSITION parameter in MANUAL SETUP (see page 58), the parameters newly set for the width and length of your listening room are automatically set as the factory default value. Choices: L90° to R90° Adjust toward L (left) to move the direction of the output to the left and adjust toward R (right) to move it to the right. a)HORIZONTAL ANGLE5 beam 1/5 Front L L65deg L90 R90 * p p 0(deg) p p p [ ]/[ ]:Up/Down [ ]/[ ]:Sel [ENTER]:Return ADVANCED OPERATION \ [ 2.5m ] \ Listening position from the unit p [ ]/[ ]:Up/Down [ ]/[ ]:Sel [ENTER]:Return English 59 En MANUAL SETUP BEAM TRAVEL LENGTH (Beam travel length) A certain amount of delay must be applied to the sound from each channel so that all sounds can arrive at the listening position at the same time. This menu sets the distance that sound beams travel after being output and reflected off the wall until they arrive at the listening position and adjusts the delay applied to the respective channel. The lines in the illustration below indicate the distance. FOCAL LENGTH (Focal length) Use to set the distance from the front of this unit to the focal point of output for each channel to achieve an expansive feeling for each channel. The focal points except for the center channel should be set near the reflection points on the walls. The shorter the distance, the larger the expansion. focal length focal point sweet spot Choices: 0.3 m to 24.0 m (1.0 ft to 80.0 ft) • Front L adjusts the distance the front left channel sound beams travel. • Front R adjusts the distance the front right channel sound beams travel. • Center adjusts the distance the center channel sound beams travel. • Surround L adjusts the distance the surround left channel sound beams travel. • Surround R adjusts the distance the surround right channel sound beams travel. b)BEAM TRAVEL LENGTH 5 beam . Front L;;;;;;;6.0m Front R;;;;;;;6.0m Center;;;;;;;;2.5m Surround L;;;;9.1m Surround R;;;;9.1m p p p p [ ]/[ ]:Up/Down [ ]/[ ]:Sel [ENTER]:Return y We recommend that you use the setting optimized by AUTO SETUP (see page 31). Adjust this parameter only when you changed HORIZONTAL ANGLE (see page 59). Front left channel Center channel Choices: –1.0 m to +13.0 m (–3.5 ft to +43.5 ft) Adjust toward – (minus) to move the focus outward and adjust toward + (plus) to move the focus toward the normal position. • Front L adjusts the focal length for the front left sound beams. • Front R adjusts the focal length for the front right sound beams. • Center adjusts the focal length for the center sound beams. Initial setting: –0.3 m (–1.0 ft) • Surround L adjusts the focal length for the surround left sound beams. • Surround R adjusts the focal length for the surround right sound beams. y We recommend that you use the initial setting (–0.3 m (or –1.0 ft)) for the center channel. c)FOCAL LENGTH 5 beam . Front L;;;;;;+1.5m Front R;;;;;;+1.5m Center;;;;;;;-0.3m Surround L;;;+2.3m Surround R;;;+2.3m p p 60 En p p [ ]/[ ]:Up/Down [ ]/[ ]:Sel [ENTER]:Return MANUAL SETUP TREBLE GAIN (Treble gain) Use to adjust the high-frequency output level of each channel. y If the reflection points of the front left and right or surround left and right sound beams are on curtain or other acoustically absorbent surfaces, you can achieve more effective surround sound by increasing the treble level for those sound beams. ■ IMAGE LOCATION (Image location) Use to adjust the direction from which the front left and right channel sound is heard so that each sound can be heard closer to the center channel. Use this feature to redirect audio signals if the sound coming from the front left and right channels seems unnatural, such as when your listening position is not the center of your listening room. You can only adjust this parameter when 3 Beam or 5 Beam is selected as the beam mode (see page 44). Choices: ON, OFF Setting range: 0% to 95% Initial setting: 0% C)IMAGE LOCATION . OFF L C )ON R p LEFT;;;;;;;;;;;0% RIGHT;;;;;;;;;;0% p p p [ ]/[ ]:Up/Down [ ]/[ ]:Sel [ENTER]:Return p Choices: –12.0 dB to +12.0 dB Initial setting: 0 dB • Front L adjusts the high-frequency output level of the front left channel. • Front R adjusts the high-frequency output level of the front right channel. • Center adjusts the high-frequency output level of the center channel. • Surround L adjusts the high-frequency output level of the surround left channel. • Surround R adjusts the high-frequency output level of the surround right channel. LEFT (Left) Adjusts audio signals toward the left. The higher the percentage, the louder the output from the center. Without adjustment With the front left channel adjusted d)TREBLE GAIN + . Front L;;;;;;;;0dB -----Front R;;;;;;;;0dB -----Center;;;;;;;;;0dB -----Surround L;;;;;0dB -----Surround R;;;;;0dB ------ p p p p [ ]/[ ]:Up/Down [ ]/[ ]:Sel [ENTER]:Return Without adjustment ADVANCED OPERATION RIGHT (Right) Adjusts audio signals toward the right. The higher the percentage, the louder the output from the center. With the front right channel adjusted English 61 En MANUAL SETUP Use to manually adjust the various parameters related to the sound output. SET MENU → MANUAL SETUP → SOUND MENU 1)SOUND MENU . A)TONE CONTROL B)SUBWOOFER SET C)MUTE LEVEL D)AUDIO DELAY E)DD/DTS Dynamic Range F)TruBass p p [ ]/[ ]:Up/Down [ENTER]:Enter ■ TONE CONTROL (Tone control) You can adjust the tonal quality of sound beams. + TREBLE;;;;;0dB -----+ BASS;;;;;;;0dB ------ p p . A)TONE CONTROL- p p [ ]/[ ]:Up/Down [ ]/[ ]:Sel [ENTER]:Return TREBLE (Treble) Use to adjust the high-frequency response. Choices: –12 dB to +12 dB Initial setting: 0 dB BASS (Bass) Use to adjust the low-frequency response. Choices: –12 dB to +12 dB Initial setting: 0 dB ■ SUBWOOFER SET (Subwoofer settings) Use to manually adjust the various subwoofer settings. B)SUBWOOFER SET . BASS OUT;;;;;FRONT CROSS OVER;;;100Hz LFE LEVEL;;;;;;0dB DISTANCE;;;;;;3.0m p p 62 En p p [ ]/[ ]:Up/Down [ ]/[ ]:Sel [ENTER]:Return BASS OUT (Bass out) Low-frequency (bass) signals can be directed to the subwoofer and/or the front left and right channels. This setting also determines the routing of LFE (low-frequency effect) signals found in Dolby Digital or DTS sources. Choices: SWFR (Subwoofer), FRONT • Select SWFR if you connect a subwoofer. LFE and low-frequency signals from other channels are directed to the subwoofer. • Select FRONT if you do not use a subwoofer. LFE and low-frequency signals from other channels are directed to the front left and right channels. CROSS OVER (Crossover) When BASS OUT is set to SWFR, you can use this feature to select a crossover (cutoff) frequency for all lowfrequency signals. All frequencies below the selected frequency will be sent to the subwoofer position. Choices: 100Hz, 120Hz, 150Hz LFE LEVEL (Low-frequency effect level) Select to adjust the output level of the LFE (low-frequency effect) channel according to the capacity of your subwoofer. The LFE channel carries low-frequency special effects which are only added to certain scenes. This setting is effective only when this unit decodes Dolby Digital or DTS signals. Choices: –20 to 0 dB DISTANCE (Distance) Select to adjust the distance of the subwoofer from the listening position. Choices: 0.3 to 15.0 m (1.0 ft to 50.0 ft) Initial setting: 3.0 m (10.0 ft) ■ MUTE LEVEL (Muting level) Use to adjust how much the mute function reduces the volume level. Choices: MUTE, –20 dB • Select MUTE to completely halt all sound output. • Select –20 dB to reduce the current volume level by 20 dB. C)MUTE LEVEL pMUTE p p SOUND MENU -20dB [ ]/[ ]:Select [ENTER]:Return MANUAL SETUP ■ AUDIO DELAY (Audio delay) ■ TruBass Use to delay the sound output and synchronize it with the video image. This may be necessary when using certain LCD monitors or projectors. Choices: 0 to 160 msec Use to turn on or off the bass sound enhancer. The SRS TruBass technology improves bass even without a subwoofer and provides deeper, richer bass in the presence of a subwoofer. Choices: OFF, ON D)AUDIO DELAY F)TruBass AUDIO DELAY;;;;;0msec [ ]/[ ]:Select [ENTER]:Return pON p p p p OFF [ ]/[ ]:Select [ENTER]:Return ■ DD/DTS Dynamic Range (Dynamic range of Dolby Digital and DTS signals) Use to select the amount of dynamic range compression. This setting is effective only when the unit is decoding Dolby Digital and DTS signals. Dynamic range is the difference between the smallest sound that can be heard above the noise of the equipment and the biggest sound that can be heard without distortion. Choices: MIN (minimum), STD (standard), MAX (maximum) Note TruBass is not available when My Beam (see page 51) or My Surround (see page 45) is selected as the beam mode. E)DD/DTS Dynamic Range p STD pMAX p MIN [ ]/[ ]:Select [ENTER]:Return ADVANCED OPERATION Select to adjust the dynamic range compression. • Select MIN for listening to sources at low volume levels. • Select STD for general use. • Select MAX for feature films. English 63 En MANUAL SETUP ■ INPUT TRIM (Input trim) INPUT MENU Use to adjust the input level of the input source. B)INPUT TRIM . TV/STB VCR DVD AUX 3)INPUT MENU p ■ INPUT MODE (Input mode) Use to designate the input mode for the input sources connected to the DIGITAL INPUT jacks when you turn on the power of this unit. For information on the types of audio signals that can be output by this unit, see “Selecting the input mode” on page 70. Choices: AUTO, LAST A)INPUT MODE pAUTO p p LAST [ ]/[ ]:Select [ENTER]:Return • Select AUTO to set this unit to automatically detect the type of input signals and select the appropriate input mode. • Select LAST to set this unit to automatically select the last input mode used for that input source. If the type of input signals is different from the setting, no sounds will be produced. 64 En p p [ ]/[ ]:Up/Down [ENTER]:Enter p [ ]/[ ]:Up/Down [ ]/[ ]:Sel [ENTER]:Return p . A)INPUT MODE B)INPUT TRIM C)INPUT RENAME ANALOG;;;-3.0dB DIGITAL;;-3.0dB ANALOG;;;-3.0dB DIGITAL;;-3.0dB DIGITAL;;-3.0dB p Use to manually adjust the various parameters related to the audio and video input. SET MENU → MANUAL SETUP → INPUT MENU • Select TV/STB ANALOG to adjust the level of audio and video signals input at the TV/STB AUDIO INPUT jacks of this unit. Control range: –6.0 dB to 0.0 dB Initial setting: –3.0 dB • Select TV/STB DIGITAL to adjust the level of audio and video signals input at the TV/STB OPTICAL DIGITAL INPUT jack of this unit. Control range: –6.0 dB to 0.0 dB Initial setting: –3.0 dB • Select VCR ANALOG to adjust the level of audio and video signals input at the VCR AUDIO INPUT jacks of this unit. Control range: –6.0 dB to 0.0 dB Initial setting: –3.0 dB • Select DVD DIGITAL to adjust the level of audio and video signals input at the DVD COAXIAL DIGITAL INPUT jack of this unit. Control range: –6.0 dB to 0.0 dB Initial setting: –3.0 dB • Select AUX DIGITAL to adjust the level of audio and video signals input at the AUX OPTICAL DIGITAL INPUT jack of this unit. Control range: –6.0 dB to 0.0 dB Initial setting: –3.0 dB MANUAL SETUP ■ INPUT RENAME (Input rename) Use to change the name of the input source in the OSD and the front panel display. Press an input selector button (e.g., DVD) to select the component you want to change the name for and perform the following procedure. C)INPUT RENAME DVD -> p p DVD 1 p p [ ]/[ ]:Position [ ]/[ ]:Character [ENTER]:Return Press / to place the _ (underscore) under the space or the character you want to edit. The _ (underscore) flashes. ENTER 2 Press / to select the desired character. • You can use up to 8 characters for each input. • Press to change the character in the following order or press to go in the reverse order: A to Z, a space, 0 to 9, a space, a to z, a space, #, *, +, etc. ENTER Repeat steps 1 to 2 to rename each input. 4 Press ENTER to exit. The new names are registered, and the display returns to the previous screen. ADVANCED OPERATION 3 ENTER English 65 En MANUAL SETUP ■ OSD SET (OSD settings) DISPLAY MENU Use to manually adjust the various parameters related to the display. SET MENU → MANUAL SETUP → DISPLAY MENU Use to adjust the display position and to set the display time of the OSD. B)OSD SET OSD SHIFT;;;;;;;;;;0 p . A)F.DISPLAY SET B)OSD SET C)UNIT SET p 4)DISPLAY MENU [ ]/[ ]:Select [ENTER]:Return p ■ F.DISPLAY SET (Front panel display settings) Use to adjust the brightness and display settings of the front panel display. OSD SHIFT (OSD shift) Use to adjust the vertical position of the OSD. Adjust toward the – (minus) direction to raise the position of the OSD, and adjust toward the + (plus) direction to lower it. Choices: –5 to +5 Initial setting: 0 ■ UNIT SET (Unit settings) Use this to change the display unit of measurement. Choices: METERS, FEET A)F.DISPLAY SET . STANDARD DIMMER;;;;;OFF AUTO DIMMER ;;;;;;;;;;;;;OFF FEET p p C)UNIT SET p METERS p p [ ]/[ ]:Up/Down [ ]/[ ]:Sel [ENTER]:Return p p p [ ]/[ ]:Up/Down [ENTER]:Enter [ ]/[ ]:Select [ENTER]:Return STANDARD DIMMER (Standard dimmer) Use to adjust the brightness of the front panel display when you operate this unit by using the control buttons on the front panel or on the remote control. Choices: –2, –1, OFF AUTO DIMMER (Auto dimmer) If no operation is performed for a specified period of time, the front panel display dims. Use to adjust the brightness of the front panel display in this case. Choices: OFF (the same brightness as the STANDARD DIMMER setting), –1 to –3 (based on the STANDARD DIMMER setting), DISPLAY OFF 66 En • Select METERS to enter distances in meters. • Select FEET to enter distances in feet. Note If you change this setting, the adjusted sound beam settings may change. Adjusting the audio balance Adjusting the audio balance You can adjust the sound beam output level of each channel by using the test tone or the audio output being played back in each beam mode to achieve a more true-to-life surround sound experience. Using the test tone 3 You can use the test tone feature to output a test tone from each channel to manually balance the channel levels. Use this to set the channel levels so that the volume level of each channel is identical when heard from your listening position. Press / to select the channel you want to adjust. The front panel display changes as follows: TEST FRONT L ENTER CH LEVEL TEST CENTER MENU TEST FRONT R ENTER TV/AV YSP TEST TEST SUR.R RETURN TEST SUR.L 1 TEST SUBWOOFER Set the operation mode selector to YSP. Note TV/AV YSP 2 Press TEST. “TEST LEFT” appears in the front panel display and a test tone is output from the front left channel. “TEST SUBWOOFER” is only available when a subwoofer is connected to this unit and SWFR is selected for BASS OUT in SOUND MENU (see page 62). 4 Press / to adjust the channel volume. TEST ENTER ADVANCED OPERATION Control range: –10.0 dB to +10.0 dB TESTXLEFT English 67 En Adjusting the audio balance 5 Press TEST when you have completed all your adjustments. 1 Set the operation mode selector to YSP. TV/AV YSP TEST 2 Notes • All channel levels cannot be adjusted when the stereo playback (see page 50), My Beam (see page 51), or My Surround (see page 45) is selected as the beam mode. • “FRONT L/R” cannot be adjusted when Stereo plus 3 Beam is selected as the beam mode (see page 45). • “FRONT L/R” are automatically adjusted depending on the settings of the other channels when Stereo plus 3 Beam or stereo playback is selected as the beam mode (see pages 45 and 50). Press CH LEVEL repeatedly (or press CH LEVEL and / ) to select the channel you want to adjust. The front panel display changes as follows. CH LEVEL or CH LEVEL y ENTER If the level of a particular channel cannot be adjusted, “– –dB” appears in the front panel display. Using the audio output being played back You can also manually adjust the channel levels while playing back an input source such as a DVD. CH LEVEL FRONT L +1.0dB CENTER -2.5dB FRONT R +1.0dB SUR.R +2.0dB SUR.L +2.0dB MENU ENTER TV/AV YSP TEST RETURN SWFR --dB Note “SWFR” is available only when a subwoofer is connected to this unit and SWFR is selected for BASS OUT in SOUND MENU (see page 62). 68 En Adjusting the audio balance 3 Press / to adjust the channel volume. ENTER Control range: –10.0 dB to +10.0 dB 4 Wait for a few seconds without operating this unit when you have completed your adjustment. Notes • All channel levels cannot be adjusted when the stereo playback (see page 50), or My Surround (see page 45) is selected as the beam mode. • “FRONT L/R” cannot be adjusted when Stereo plus 3 Beam is selected as the beam mode (see page 41). • Only CENTER can be adjusted when My Beam is selected as the beam mode (see page 51). • “FRONT L/R” are automatically adjusted depending on the settings of the other channels when Stereo plus 3 Beam or stereo playback is selected as the beam mode (see pages 45 and 50). y If the level of a particular channel cannot be adjusted, “– –dB” appears in the front panel display. ADVANCED OPERATION English 69 En Selecting the input mode Selecting the input mode You can select the type of audio input signals of the selected input source according to your preference or the conditions of the input source. This function is available for TV/STB, DVD, and AUX. y We recommend setting the input mode to AUTO in most cases. 3 AV TV VCR DVD AUX INPUT1 TV INPUT2 MACRO Press INPUTMODE repeatedly to toggle between input modes. INPUTMODE STB TV AUTO VOL MODE SETUP INPUTMODE SLEEP 5BEAM ST+3BEAM 1 2 3BEAM 3 STEREO MY BEAM MY SUR. 4 5 6 7 8 9 +10 CH LEVEL AUTO TV/STB AUTO DVD DTS TV/STB DTS TV/STB ANALOG When DVD is selected as the input source SUR. DECODE 0 DVD When TV or STB is selected as the input source MENU ENTER TV/AV AUX AUTO AUX DTS YSP TEST RETURN When AUX is selected as the input source 1 Set the operation mode selector to YSP. Note TV/AV ANALOG is not available as the input mode of DVD and AUX. YSP 2 Press one of the input selector buttons to select the desired input source. STB TV VCR DVD AUX • AUTO Automatically selects audio input signals in the following priority order: 1) Dolby Digital or DTS 2) PCM 3) Analog y Use this input mode in most cases. • DTS Selects only digital signals encoded in DTS. Compared to AUTO, this input mode provides greater stability while playing back CDs or LDs encoded in DTS. • ANALOG Selects only analog signals. Even when both digital and analog signals are input simultaneously, only analog signals are selected. y You can adjust the default input mode to be selected when the power of this unit is turned on by adjusting INPUT MODE in INPUT MENU (see page 64). 70 En Adjusting the system parameters Adjusting the system parameters This unit has additional menus that are displayed in the front panel display. These menus offer additional operations to adjust and customize the way this unit operates. Note When “F.PANEL KEY” is set to “F.PANEL: OFF” (see page 76), STANDBY/ON on the front panel is ineffective. Use STANDBY/ON on the remote control instead to adjust the system parameters. Using the system parameters 2 Follow the procedure below to enter the system parameters. Press and hold INPUT on the front panel and press STANDBY/ON on the remote control to turn on the power of this unit. “MEMORY PROTECT” is displayed in the front panel display. STANDBY/ON INPUT INPUT VOLUME STANDBY/ON MEMORYXPROTECT STANDBY/ON POWER POWER AV CH LEVEL MENU 3 Release INPUT on the front panel. TV ENTER TV/AV YSP STB TEST VCR DVD AUX INPUT1 TV INPUT2 MACRO RETURN INPUT TV 1 ADVANCED OPERATION Press STANDBY/ON on the remote control to turn off the power of this unit. STANDBY/ON English 71 En Adjusting the system parameters Setting the MEMORY PROTECT 4 You can protect the settings you saved in the system memory of this unit from being accidentally erased or unwantedly changed. Press / to switch between “PROTECT: ON” and “PROTECT: OFF”. ENTER 1 Repeat steps 1 to 3 in “Using the system parameters” on page 71. 2 Set the operation mode selector to YSP. XPROTECT:XON TV/AV YSP 3 Confirm that “MEMORY PROTECT” is displayed in the front panel display and press ENTER. XPROTECT:XOFF • Select PROTECT: ON to activate the protection feature. • Select PROTECT: OFF to deactivate the protection feature. MEMORYXPROTECT 5 ENTER Press STANDBY/ON on the remote control to set this unit to the standby mode. STANDBY/ON The new setting will be activated when you turn on the power of this unit next time. 72 En Adjusting the system parameters Setting the MAX VOLUME 5 You can set the maximum volume level so that this unit will not output sound beyond the limited volume level. 1 Repeat steps 1 to 3 in “Using the system parameters” on page 71. 2 Set the operation mode selector to YSP. Press level. / to adjust the maximum volume ENTER Control range: MAX, 99 to 01, MIN Control step: 1 “ TV/AV YSP 3 6 Press / so that “MAX VOLUME SET” is displayed in the front panel display. Press STANDBY/ON on the remote control to set this unit to the standby mode. STANDBY/ON The new setting for the maximum volume level will be activated when you turn on the power of this unit next time. ENTER Setting the TURN ON VOLUME You can set the initial volume level when the power of this unit is turned on. MAXXVOLUMEXSET 4 Press ENTER. 1 Repeat steps 1 to 3 in “Using the system parameters” on page 71. 2 Set the operation mode selector to YSP. TV/AV ENTER YSP ADVANCED OPERATION English 73 En Adjusting the system parameters 3 Press / so that “TURN ON VOLUME” is displayed in the front panel display. ENTER Setting the DEMO MODE You can test the sound beam output from this unit to experience the sound beam. 1 Repeat steps 1 to 3 in “Using the system parameters” on page 71. 2 Set the operation mode selector to YSP. TV/AV YSP TURNXONXVOLUME 3 4 Press ENTER. Press / so that “DEMO MODE” is displayed in the front panel display. ENTER ENTER 5 Press / to adjust the initial volume level. DEMOXMODE ENTER Control range: MAX, 99 to 01, OFF Control step: 1 6 Press STANDBY/ON on the remote control to set this unit to the standby mode. STANDBY/ON The new setting for the maximum volume level will be activated when you turn on the power of this unit next time. 74 En 4 Press ENTER. ENTER Adjusting the system parameters 5 Press / to switch between “DEMO: ON” and “DEMO: OFF”. ENTER Setting the PANEL INP. KEY You can disable the INPUT on the front panel when you adjust the system parameters. 1 Repeat steps 1 to 3 in “Using the system parameters” on page 71. 2 Set the operation mode selector to YSP. TV/AV YSP XDEMO:XXON 3 Press / so that “PANEL INP. KEY” is displayed in the front panel display. XDEMO:XXOFF ENTER • Select DEMO: ON to activate the demo mode. • Select DEMO: OFF to deactivate the demo mode. 6 Press STANDBY/ON on the remote control to set this unit to the standby mode. PANELXINP.XKEY STANDBY/ON 4 Press ENTER. ENTER ADVANCED OPERATION The new setting will be activated when you turn on the power of this unit next time. Press ENTER while playing back sources to test the sound beam. The sound beam being output shuttles between left and right. Press ENTER again to stop shuttling. English 75 En Adjusting the system parameters 5 Press / to switch between “P.INPUT: ON” and “P.INPUT: OFF”. ENTER Disabling the front panel keys You can disable the front panel keys except when you adjust the system parameters. 1 Repeat steps 1 to 3 in “Using the system parameters” on page 71. 2 Set the operation mode selector to YSP. TV/AV YSP XP.INPUT:XON 3 Press / so that “F.PANEL KEY” is displayed in the front panel display. XP.INPUT:XOFF ENTER • Select P.INPUT: ON to enable the INPUT key on the front panel. • Select P.INPUT: OFF to disable the INPUT key on the front panel. “F.PANEL KEY” is automatically set to “ON”. 6 F.PANELXKEY Press STANDBY/ON on the remote control to set this unit to the standby mode. STANDBY/ON The new setting will be activated when you turn on the power of this unit next time. 76 En 4 Press ENTER. ENTER Adjusting the system parameters 5 Press / to switch between “F.PANEL: ON” and “F.PANEL: OFF”. ENTER Setting the FACTORY PRESET You can reset all of the parameters of this unit to the factory presets. This procedure completely resets ALL the parameters in SET MENU. Note After performing the following procedure you must run AUTO SETUP again to match your surround sound environment. XF.PANEL:XON 1 Repeat steps 1 to 3 in “Using the system parameters” on page 71. 2 Set the operation mode selector to YSP. TV/AV YSP XF.PANEL:XOFF 3 Press / so that “FACTORY PRESET” is displayed in the front panel display. • Select F.PANEL: ON to enable the front panel keys. • Select F.PANEL: OFF to disable the front panel keys. “P.INPUT” is automatically set to “ON”. 6 ENTER Press STANDBY/ON on the remote control to set this unit to the standby mode. STANDBY/ON FACTORYXPRESET 4 Press ENTER. ADVANCED OPERATION The new setting will be activated when you turn on the power of this unit next time. ENTER English 77 En Adjusting the system parameters 5 Press / to switch between “PRESET: RESET” and “PRESET: CANCEL”. ENTER XPRESET:XRESET XPRESET:CANCEL • Select PRESET: RESET to reset all of the current settings. • Select PRESET: CANCEL to cancel the resetting procedure. 6 Press STANDBY/ON on the remote control to set this unit to the standby mode. STANDBY/ON The new setting will be activated when you turn on the power of this unit next time. 78 En Remote control features Remote control features In addition to controlling this unit, the remote control can also operate other AV components made by Yamaha and other manufacturers. To control other components, you must set up the remote control with the appropriate remote control codes and set the operation mode selector to TV/AV to change the control area. Note Depending on the external AV component you are using, you may not be able to operate the component with the remote control, even if a remote control code is set. In this case, operate the component using the supplied remote control. Setting remote control codes 2 You can control other components by setting the appropriate remote control codes. Codes can be set up for each input area (STB, VCR, DVD, AUX, and TV). For a complete list of available remote control codes, refer to “List of remote control codes” at the end of this manual. Press the numeric buttons to enter the remote control code while holding down CODE SET. Setting example: Yamaha DVD input area MY SUR. 6 TV MUTE Transmission indicator AV While holding down, press 9 CODE SET TV 9 STB VCR DVD AUX INPUT1 TV INPUT2 MACRO TV AUTO VOL MODE SETUP INPUTMODE SLEEP 5BEAM ST+3BEAM 3BEAM 1 2 3 STEREO MY BEAM MY SUR. 4 5 6 7 8 3 9 SUR. DECODE 0 +10 MUTE TV INPUT TV MUTE CODE SET Note Press and hold CODE SET and press one of the input selector buttons to select the input source you want to set a remote control code for. The transmission indicator flashes twice and remains lit. Proceed to step 2 while holding down CODE SET. TV MUTE CODE SET STB While holding down, press TV VCR DVD AUX If the manufacturer of your component has more than one code, try each of them until you find the correct one. ADVANCED OPERATION 1 Refer to “Controlling other components” on page 80 to operate the external component using the remote control. If the external component functions correctly the remote control code setup is successful. If the external component does not function correctly, the remote control code may be incorrect. Confirm that the remote control code is correct. See “List of remote control codes” at the end of this manual and start over from step 1. If the remote control is without batteries for more than two minutes, or if exhausted batteries remain in the remote control, the contents of the memory may be cleared. When the memory is cleared, insert new batteries and reset the remote control codes. When changing the batteries, be careful not to press any of the buttons on the remote control. Doing so will clear the contents of the memory. English 79 En Remote control features Controlling other components ■ Operating your TV Set the operation mode selector to TV/AV, and press TV to select TV as the input source. The control area of the remote control changes to the TV operation mode. TV/AV TV YSP STANDBY/ON TV VCR DVD AUX INPUT1 TV INPUT2 MACRO STB 4 5 AUTO VOL MODE SETUP INPUTMODE SLEEP 1 ST+3BEAM 1 2 3 STEREO MY BEAM MY SUR. 4 5 6 7 8 3BEAM 9 SUR. DECODE 0 +10 CH LEVEL MENU ENTER TV/AV YSP TEST VOLUME RETURN CH TV VOL 2 6 MUTE 3 80 En TV INPUT TV MUTE CODE SET 3 TV INPUT Switches the input source for your TV. 5 TV INPUT1/2 Selects the input source of your TV. 6 TV VOL +/– Adjusts the audio output level of your TV. 7 TV MUTE Temporarily mutes audio output from your TV. TV 5BEAM 2 CH +/– Switches between the available TV channels. 4 TV POWER Turns on or off the power of your TV. POWER POWER AV 1 Numeric buttons Selects a TV channel for playback. 7 Remote control features ■ Operating your DVD player/recorder Set the operation mode selector to TV/AV and press DVD to select DVD as the input source. The control area of the remote control changes to the DVD operation mode. TV/AV ■ Operating your STB (CATV/Satellite tuner) Set the operation mode selector to TV/AV and press STB to select STB as the input source. The control area of the remote control changes to the STB operation mode. DVD YSP TV/AV STB YSP STANDBY/ON POWER POWER AV TV 4 STANDBY/ON POWER POWER AV VCR DVD AUX INPUT1 TV INPUT2 MACRO STB TV 3 TV VCR DVD AUX INPUT1 TV INPUT2 MACRO STB AUTO VOL MODE SETUP INPUTMODE SLEEP TV 1 5BEAM ST+3BEAM 1 2 3 STEREO MY BEAM MY SUR. 5BEAM ST+3BEAM 4 5 6 1 2 3 STEREO MY BEAM MY SUR. 4 5 6 7 8 7 3BEAM AUTO VOL MODE SETUP INPUTMODE SLEEP 9 8 1 SUR. DECODE 0 +10 CH LEVEL MENU 2 9 SUR. DECODE 5 0 +10 CH LEVEL ENTER 3BEAM MENU TV/AV YSP TEST VOLUME MUTE RETURN CH TV INPUT 6 ENTER TV/AV YSP TV VOL TEST RETURN VOLUME CH MUTE TV INPUT TV VOL 2 TV MUTE CODE SET 3 ADVANCED OPERATION 1 Numeric buttons Enter numeric digits. 1 Numeric buttons Enter numeric digits. 2 Cursor buttons / / Use to select DVD menu items. TV MUTE CODE SET 2 CH +/– Switches between the available STB channels. / , ENTER 3 AV POWER Turns on or off the power of your STB. 3 Operation buttons for DVD players Operate your DVD player/recorder, such as play and stop. 4 AV POWER Turns on or off the power of your DVD player/recorder. 5 MENU Displays the DVD menu. English 6 RETURN Use to return to the previous DVD menu screen or exit from the DVD menu. 81 En Remote control features ■ Operating your VCR Set the operation mode selector to TV/AV and press VCR to select VCR as the input source. The control area of the remote control changes to the VCR operation mode. TV/AV VCR YSP STANDBY/ON POWER POWER AV TV 4 VCR DVD AUX INPUT1 TV INPUT2 MACRO STB TV AUTO VOL MODE SETUP INPUTMODE SLEEP 1 5BEAM ST+3BEAM 1 2 3BEAM 3 STEREO MY BEAM MY SUR. 4 5 6 7 8 9 SUR. DECODE 0 +10 CH LEVEL MENU ENTER TV/AV YSP TEST RETURN VOLUME CH MUTE TV INPUT TV VOL 2 TV MUTE CODE SET 3 1 Numeric buttons Enter numeric digits. 2 CH +/– Switches between the available VCR channels. 3 Operation buttons for VCR Operate your VCR, such as play and stop. 4 AV POWER Turns on or off the power of your VCR. 82 En Remote control features ■ Setting macros for the TV with the tuning capability Using the TV macro The TV macro feature makes it possible to perform a series of operations with the press of a single button. For example, when you want to play a DVD, you would normally turn on the component, select DVD as the input source, and press the play button to start playback. The TV macro feature lets you perform all of these operations simply by pressing the DVD macro button. 1 Press and hold CODE SET and press one of the input selector buttons to select the input source you want to set macros for. Proceed to step 2 while holding down CODE SET. TV MUTE While holding down, press Notes • Be sure to set up a remote control code for your TV before setting macros. • The ways to set macros differ if your TV does not have the tuning capability. • If you press any control buttons on the remote control other than the ones used to set macros while setting macros, the setting procedure is automatically canceled. • If it takes more than 10 seconds in steps 2 and 3, the setting procedure is automatically canceled. In this case, repeat from step 1. STB VCR DVD AUX CODE SET 2 Press MACRO while holding down CODE SET. TV MUTE MACRO While holding down, press CODE SET STANDBY/ON POWER POWER AV TV 3 VCR DVD AUX INPUT1 TV INPUT2 MACRO STB Press CH +/– or the numeric buttons to select the TV channel. Check that the TV screen changes to the tuner screen. TV AUTO VOL MODE SETUP INPUTMODE SLEEP 5BEAM ST+3BEAM 5BEAM ST+3BEAM 3BEAM 1 2 3 1 2 3 STEREO MY BEAM MY SUR. STEREO MY BEAM MY SUR. 4 5 6 4 5 6 7 8 7 8 9 0 +10 CH or 9 3BEAM SUR. DECODE 0 +10 CH LEVEL MENU TV/AV 4 YSP TEST VOLUME RETURN CH Press TV INPUT repeatedly until the screen changes to the display of the input source selected in step 1. TV VOL TV INPUT MUTE TV INPUT ADVANCED OPERATION ENTER TV MUTE CODE SET 5 Press ENTER to confirm the macro setting. ENTER English 83 En Remote control features ■ Setting macros for the TV without the tuning capability 1 Press and hold CODE SET and press one of the input selector buttons to select the input source you want to set macros for. Proceed to step 2 while holding down CODE SET. TV MUTE While holding down, press STB VCR DVD ■ Operating macros Press and hold one of the input selector buttons for approximately two seconds to select the input source you want to operate macros for. The TV input changes at the same time the input mode changes. STB AUX VCR DVD AUX CODE SET 2 ■ Canceling the macros Press MACRO while holding down CODE SET. TV MUTE While holding down, press 1 MACRO CODE SET 3 Press and hold CODE SET and press one of the input selector buttons to select the input source you want to cancel the macros for. Proceed to step 2 while holding down CODE SET. TV MUTE Press INPUT1. Check that the TV screen changes to the input 1 screen. INPUT1 While holding down, press 2 Press TV INPUT repeatedly until the screen changes to the display of the input source selected in step 1. TV INPUT Press ENTER to confirm the setting. ENTER 84 En DVD AUX Press MACRO while holding down CODE SET. While holding down, press MACRO CODE SET 3 Press ENTER to cancel the macros. ENTER 5 VCR CODE SET TV MUTE 4 STB Troubleshooting Troubleshooting Refer to the chart below when this unit does not function properly. If the problem you are experiencing is not listed below or if the instruction below does not help, set this unit to the standby mode, disconnect the AC power supply cable, and contact the nearest authorized Yamaha dealer or service center. ■ General Problem Cause Remedy See page The AC power supply cable is not firmly connected to the AC wall outlet. Connect the AC power supply cable firmly to the AC wall outlet. 25 This unit has been exposed to a strong external electric shock (such as lightning and strong static electricity). Set this unit to the standby mode, disconnect the AC power supply cable, plug it back in after 30 seconds, and use it normally. — This unit suddenly enters the standby mode. The internal temperature becomes too high and the overheat protection circuitry has been activated. Wait for about one hour for this unit to cool down and turn it back on. — The sleep timer has turned the unit off. Turn on the power and play back the source again. — Incorrect input or output cable connections. Connect the cables properly. If the problem persists, the cables may be defective. 16 No appropriate input source has been selected. Select an appropriate input source with INPUT or the input selector buttons. 41 The volume is turned down. Turn up the volume. 43 The sound is muted. Press MUTE or VOLUME +/– to resume audio output and adjust the volume level. 43 The signals this unit cannot reproduce (such as PCM signals with more than 96 kHz of sampling frequency) are being received from the source component. Play a source whose signals can be reproduced by this unit. — Change the system settings of the source component. — The sleep timer has turned this unit off. Turn on the power and play back the source again. — The sound is muted. Press MUTE or VOLUME +/– to resume audio output and adjust the volume level. 43 No sound from the effect channels. You are playing back the source or program in the stereo playback or My Beam mode. Press one of the beam mode buttons on the remote control to select a multi-channel playback mode and play back the source or program once more. 44 No sound from the center channel. The output level of the center channel is set to minimum. Raise the level of the center channel. 67 No sound from the surround channels. The output level of the surround channels is set to minimum. Raise the output level of the surround channels. 67 No sound. The sound suddenly goes off. ADDITIONAL INFORMATION This unit fails to turn on when STANDBY/ON is pressed, or enters the standby mode soon after the power has been turned on. English 85 En Troubleshooting Problem No sound from the subwoofer. Cause BASS OUT in SUBWOOFER SET is set to FRONT. Remedy Select SWFR. See page 62 The source does not contain low bass signals. Distorted or too little bass sound. CROSS OVER in SUBWOOFER SET is set incorrectly. Set CROSS OVER correctly. One of the night listening enhancers is currently selected. Turn off the night listening enhancers. TruBass is currently turned on. Turn off TruBass. 63 The volume level of the subwoofer is too high. Turn down the volume level of the subwoofer. — The listening room is not a regular shape. Install this unit in a square or rectangular shaped room. — There is no wall in the path of the sound beam. Try placing a flat object, such as a board, in the path of the sound beam. — Dolby Digital or DTS sources cannot be played back. (Dolby Digital or DTS indicator does not light up in the front panel display.) The connected component is not set to output Dolby Digital or DTS digital signals. Make an appropriate setting following the operating instructions for your component. — The input mode is set to ANALOG. Set the input mode to AUTO. 70 There is noise interference when a subwoofer is not connected to this unit. The protection circuitry was in operation because a source with strong bass elements was played back. Turn down the volume level. 43 Select SWFR for BASS OUT. 62 Connect a subwoofer and adjust settings for SUBWOOFER SET. 62 Too much bass sound. Surround sound effects are insubstantial. 62 53 Low-frequency sounds are distorted. CROSS OVER in SUBWOOFER SET is set incorrectly. Set CROSS OVER correctly. 62 On-screen display does not appear. The OSD video pin cable is not connected properly. Connect the cable properly. 18 This unit does not operate properly. The internal microcomputer has been frozen by an external electric shock (such as lightning or excessive static electricity) or by a power supply with low voltage. Disconnect the AC power supply cable from the outlet and plug it in again after about 30 seconds. — There is noise interference from digital or highfrequency equipment. This unit is too close to the digital or highfrequency equipment. Move this unit farther away from such equipment. — This unit does not output effect sounds properly. The original source includes surround effects. Disable the surround effect settings of this unit. — My Beam auto-adjust function does not work. The listening room is too noisy. Keep the listening room as quiet as possible. — Try manual-adjust function. 52 The remote control may be operated outside of the remote control operation range. The remote control functions within a maximum range of 6 m (20 ft) and no more than 30 degrees off-axis from the front panel. 26 The function does not work properly because of the condition of the connected components. Select My Beam and then try again. 51 86 En Troubleshooting ■ Remote control Problem The remote control does not work and/or function properly. Cause Remedy See page Wrong distance or angle. The remote control functions within a maximum range of 6 m (20 ft) and no more than 30 degrees off-axis from the front panel. 26 Direct sunlight or lighting (from an inverter type of fluorescent lamp, etc.) is striking the remote control sensor of this unit. Reposition this unit. — The batteries are weak. Replace all batteries. 26 The external component you want to operate is not selected as the input source. Press INPUT on the front panel or the input selector buttons on the remote control to select the external component you want to operate. 41 The remote control code was not correctly set. Set the remote control code correctly or try another code for the same manufacturer using the “List of remote control codes” at the end of this manual. 79 Even if the remote control code is correctly set, there are some models that do not respond to the remote control. Use the remote control supplied with the external component. — The cursor buttons do not work during SET MENU operation. The operation mode selector was unwantedly set to TV/AV. Set the operation mode selector to YSP. — Cannot use the My Beam auto-adjust function. Wrong distance or angle. The remote control functions within a maximum range of 6 m (20 ft) and no more than 30 degrees off-axis from the front panel. 51 Cannot operate external components with the remote control of this unit. ADDITIONAL INFORMATION English 87 En Glossary Glossary ■ Dolby Digital ■ DTS Digital Surround Dolby Digital is a digital surround sound system that gives you completely independent multi-channel audio. With 3 front channels (left, center, and right) and 2 surround stereo channels, Dolby Digital provides 5 full-range audio channels. With an additional channel especially for bass effects, called LFE (low-frequency effect), the system has a total of 5.1-channels (LFE is counted as 0.1-channel). By using 2-channel stereo for the surround channels, more accurate moving sound effects and surround sound environment are possible than with Dolby Surround. The wide dynamic range (from maximum to minimum volume) reproduced by the 5 full-range channels and the precise sound orientation generated using digital sound processing provide listeners with excitement and realism previously unheard of. With this unit, any sound environment from monaural up to a 5.1-channel configuration can be freely selected for your enjoyment. DTS digital surround was developed to replace the analog soundtracks of movies with a 6-channel digital sound track, and is now rapidly gaining popularity in movie theaters around the world. DTS, Inc. has developed a home theater system so that you can enjoy the depth of sound and natural spatial representation of DTS digital surround in your home. This system produces practically distortion-free 6-channel sound (technically, left, right, and center channels, 2 surround channels, plus an LFE 0.1-channel as a subwoofer, for a total of 5.1 channels). The unit incorporates a DTS-ES decoder that enables 6.1channel reproduction by adding the surround back channel to existing 5.1-channel format. ■ Dolby Pro Logic II Dolby Pro Logic II is an improved technique used to decode vast numbers of existing Dolby Surround software. This new technology enables a discrete 5-channel playback with 2 front left and right channels, 1 center channel, and 2 surround left and right channels (instead of only 1 surround channel for conventional Pro Logic technology). Music and Game modes are also available for 2-channel sources in addition to the Movie mode. ■ Dolby Surround Dolby Surround uses a 4-channel analog recording system to reproduce realistic and dynamic sound effects: 2 front left and right channels (stereo), a center channel for dialog (monaural), and a surround channel for special sound effects (monaural). The surround channel reproduces sound within a narrow frequency range. Dolby Surround is widely used with nearly all video tapes and laser discs, and in many TV and cable broadcasts as well. The Dolby Pro Logic decoder built into this unit employs a digital signal processing system that automatically stabilizes the volume on each channel to enhance moving sound effects and directionality. 88 En ■ DTS Neo:6 Neo:6 decodes the conventional 2-channel sources for 6channel playback by the specific decoder. It enables playback with the full-range channels with higher separation just like digital discrete signal playback. Two modes are available: Music mode for playing music sources and Cinema mode for movies. ■ EUPHONY Euphony is a revolutionary sound field reproduction system implemented with state-of-the-art sound technologies developed under the basic concept of enjoying beautiful sound. It can reproduce surround sound optimized without depending on the number of input channels, the number of speakers (two or more speakers) or the speaker’s dimensions. In addition, it features steady center localization. It also can reproduce the surround sound for the headphones with natural sound and “out-ofhead” localization so that the listener feels an expanded sound and will not tire, even when listening to music or a movie for long time. Glossary ■ LFE 0.1-channel This channel is for the reproduction of low bass signals. The frequency range for this channel is 20 Hz to 120 Hz. This channel is counted as 0.1 because it only enforces a low-frequency range compared to the full-range reproduction by the other 5/6 channels in Dolby Digital or DTS 5.1/6.1-channel systems. ■ PCM (Linear PCM) Linear PCM is a signal format under which an analog audio signal is digitized, recorded, and transmitted without using any compression. This is used as a method of recording CDs and DVD audio. The PCM system uses a technique for sampling the size of the analog signal per very small unit of time. Standing for pulse code modulation, the analog signal is encoded as pulses and then modulated for recording. ■ SRS TruBass SRS TruBass is a psychoacoustic bass enhancement technology developed by SRS Labs, Inc. for speakers and headphone systems that delivers bass up to an octave below the physical capabilities of the speaker’s driver. SRS TruBass technology takes advantage of a spontaneous tendency of the human ears to infer lowrange audio data when presented with higher-frequency harmonic signals. As a result, our ears can hear the original low-range sound that the speaker system is incapable of producing. ADDITIONAL INFORMATION English 89 En Index ■ Numerics ■ M 3 Beam ............................................................................ 45 5 Beam ............................................................................ 44 MANUAL SETUP ..........................................................56 MEMORY .......................................................................38 My Beam.........................................................................51 ■ A AC power supply cable ................................................... 25 Audio pin cable............................................................... 17 AUTO SETUP (IntelliBeam).......................................... 31 ■ N ■ B On-screen display (OSD) ................................................28 Optical cable ...................................................................17 OSD video pin cable .......................................................17 Battery............................................................................. 26 BEAM MENU ................................................................ 58 Beam mode ......................................................... 44, 50, 51 ■ C Cable clamp .................................................................... 17 Cardboard microphone stand.......................................... 33 ■ D DEMO MODE................................................................ 74 Demonstration DVD ......................................................... 6 Digital audio pin cable.................................................... 17 DISPLAY MENU ........................................................... 66 Dolby Digital .................................................................. 46 Dolby Pro Logic.............................................................. 46 Dolby Pro Logic II.......................................................... 46 DTS................................................................................. 46 DTS Neo: 6 ..................................................................... 46 Dynamic range................................................................ 63 Night listening enhancer .................................................53 ■ O ■ P PCM ................................................................................89 Power...............................................................................27 ■ R Rear panel .........................................................................9 Remote control ................................................................10 Remote control code .......................................................79 Remote control sensor.....................................................26 ■ S EUPHONY ..................................................................... 88 SET MENU.....................................................................28 Sleep timer ......................................................................54 Stereo plus 3 Beam .........................................................45 Surround mode ................................................................46 Surround sound ...............................................................44 SOUND MENU ..............................................................62 Stereo sound ....................................................................50 System parameter ............................................................71 ■ F ■ T FACTORY PRESET ....................................................... 77 Front panel ........................................................................ 7 Front panel display ........................................................... 8 Test tone ..........................................................................67 TruBass............................................................................63 TV macro ........................................................................83 TV volume equal mode...................................................53 ■ E ■ I IntelliBeam ..................................................................... 31 IntelliBeam microphone ................................................. 32 ■ L LFE 0.1-channel ............................................................. 89 90 En ■ V Volume ............................................................................43 Volume mode ..................................................................53 Specifications Specifications AMP SECTION • Maximum Output Power (JEITA) ................................................. 2 W (1 kHz, 10% THD, 4 Ω) × 16 15 W (100 Hz, 10% THD, 4 Ω) × 2 SPEAKER SECTION • Driver Small dia. speakers ................... 2.8 cm (1-3/32 in) cone magnetic shielding type × 16 Woofers ........................ 8 cm (3-5/32 in) cone magnetic shielding type × 2 CONNECTIONS • Input Jacks TV/STB, VCR AUDIO IN (1 V, 32 kΩ) ............. 2 pairs (Analog) TV/STB, AUX OPTICAL DIGITAL IN .......... 2 (Optical digital) DVD COAXIAL DIGITAL IN ......................... 1 (Coaxial digital) GENERAL • Power Supply [Australia model] ................................. AC 220–240 V, 50/60 Hz [U.K. and Europe models] ................... AC 220–240 V, 50/60 Hz [Korea model] ...................................... AC 220–240 V, 50/60 Hz [General model] ................................... AC 110–120 V, 50/60 Hz [Asia model] .......................................... AC 220–240 V, 50/60 Hz • Power Consumption ................................................................. 22 W • Standby Power Consumption ...................................... 0.1 W or less • Dimensions (W x H x D) ................................ 610 × 120 × 220 mm (24 x 4-23/32 x 8-21/32 in) • Weight ............................................................. 8.5 kg (18 lbs 12 oz) * Specifications are subject to change without notice. • Output Jacks SUBWOOFER OUT (1.5 V, less than 120 Hz) ...... 1 (Subwoofer) VIDEO OUT (1 Vp-p, 75 Ω) ............................................ 1 (OSD) • System Connector Jack INTELLIBEAM MIC .................................. 1 (Microphone input) SYSTEM CONNECTOR ..................................1 (System control) ADDITIONAL INFORMATION English 91 En Limited Guarantee for European Economic Area (EEA) and Switzerland Thank you for having chosen a Yamaha product. In the unlikely event that your Yamaha product needs guarantee service, please contact the dealer from whom it was purchased. If you experience any difficulty, please contact Yamaha representative office in your country. You can find full details on our website (http://www.yamaha-hifi.com/ or http://www.yamaha-uk.com/ for U.K. resident). The product is guaranteed to be free from defects in workmanship or materials for a period of two years from the date of the original purchase. Yamaha undertakes, subject to the conditions listed below, to have the faulty product or any part(s) repaired, or replaced at Yamaha’s discretion, without any charge for parts or labour. Yamaha reserves the right to replace a product with that of a similar kind and/or value and condition, where a model has been discontinued or is considered uneconomic to repair. Conditions 1. The original invoice or sales receipt (showing date of purchase, product code and dealer’s name) MUST accompany the defective product, along with a statement detailing the fault. In the absence of this clear proof of purchase, Yamaha reserves the right to refuse to provide free of charge service and the product may be returned at the customer’s expense. 2. The product MUST have been purchased from an AUTHORISED Yamaha dealer within the European Economic Area (EEA) or Switzerland. 3. The product must not have been the subject of any modifications or alterations, unless authorised in writing by Yamaha. 4. The following are excluded from this guarantee: a. Periodic maintenance and repair or replacement of parts due to normal wear and tear. b. Damage resulting from: (1) Repairs performed by the customer himself or by an unauthorised third party. (2) Inadequate packaging or mishandling, when the product is in transit from the customer. Please note that it is the customer’s responsibility to ensure the product is adequately packaged when returning the product for repair. (3) Misuse, including but not limited to (a) failure to use the product for its normal purpose or in accordance with Yamaha’s instructions on the proper use, maintenance and storage, and (b) installation or use of the product in a manner inconsistent with the technical or safety standards in force in the country where it is used. (4) Accidents, lightning, water, fire, improper ventilation, battery leakage or any cause beyond Yamaha’s control. (5) Defects of the system into which this product is incorporated and/or incompatibility with third party products. (6) Use of a product imported into the EEA and/or Switzerland, not by Yamaha, where that product does not conform to the technical or safety standards of the country of use and/or to the standard specification of a product sold by Yamaha in the EEA and/or Switzerland. (7) Non AV (Audio Visual) related products. (Products subject to “Yamaha AV Guarantee Statement” are defined in our website at http://www.yamaha-hifi.com/ or http://www.yamaha-uk.com/ for U.K. resident.) 5. Where the guarantee differs between the country of purchase and the country of use of the product, the guarantee of the country of use shall apply. 6. Yamaha may not be held responsible for any losses or damages, whether direct, consequential or otherwise, save for the repair or replacement of the product. 7. Please backup any custom settings or data, as Yamaha may not be held responsible for any alteration or loss to such settings or data. 8. This guarantee does not affect the consumer’s statutory rights under applicable national laws in force or the consumer’s rights against the dealer arising from their sales/purchase contract. 92 En TOSHIBA TOTEVISION UNITECH UNIVERSUM VIDEOSONIC W.WHOUSE WARDS YAMAHA ZERITH 335, 389 363, 396 363 396, 327, 376 363 396 395, 396, 336, 362, 397, 363 399, 392, 393, 394 344, 361, 368, 371, 379, 396, 397 CABLE TV TUNER ABC 739, 752, 753, 755, 758, 759, 762 GENERAL INSTRUMENT 722 HAMIN 723, 724, 725, 726, 727 HITACHI 722 JEROLD 722, 728, 729, 732, 733, 734, 735, 736, 737 MAGNAVOX 738 MOTOROLA 748 OAK 739, 742, 743 PANASONIC 744, 745, 746, 747, 783, 784 PHILLIPS 763, 764, 765, 766, 767, 768 PIONEER 748, 785, 747 RADIO SHACK749 SCIENTIFIC ATLANTA 752, 753, 754 SONY 756, 757 TOCOM 755 UNIVERSAL 769, 772, 773, 774, 775 VIEWSTAR 764, 766, 776, 777, 778, 779, 782 SATELLITE TUNER ECHOSTAR 822 GE 837, 838, 839 GENERAL INSTRUMENT 823 HITACHI 824 HUGHES 843, 844, 845, 846 JVC 822 MAGNAVOX 825 PANASONIC 826, 829 PHILLIPS 825, 843, 844, 845, 846, 847, 848, 849 PRIMESTAR 827 PROSCAN 837, 838, 839, 842 RADIO SHACK 828 RCA 837, 838, 839, 842 SAMSUNG 852 SONY 832, 835 TOSHIBA 833, 836 UNIDEN 825 ZENITH 834 ii YSP-500_G-cv.fm Page 1 Thursday, September 20, 2007 8:49 AM G YSP-500 © 2007 YAMAHA ELECTRONICS CORPORATION, USA 6660 ORANGETHORPE AVE., BUENA PARK, CALIF. 90620, U.S.A. YAMAHA CANADA MUSIC LTD. 135 MILNER AVE., SCARBOROUGH, ONTARIO M1S 3R1, CANADA YAMAHA ELECTRONIK EUROPA G.m.b.H. SIEMENSSTR. 22-34, 25462 RELLINGEN BEI HAMBURG, GERMANY YAMAHA ELECTRONIQUE FRANCE S.A. RUE AMBROISE CROIZAT BP70 CROISSY-BEAUBOURG 77312 MARNE-LA-VALLEE CEDEX02, FRANCE YAMAHA ELECTRONICS (UK) LTD. YAMAHA HOUSE, 200 RICKMANSWORTH ROAD WATFORD, HERTS WD18 7GQ, ENGLAND YAMAHA SCANDINAVIA A.B. J A WETTERGRENS GATA 1, BOX 30053, 400 43 VÄSTRA FRÖLUNDA, SWEDEN YAMAHA MUSIC AUSTRALIA PTY, LTD. 17-33 MARKET ST., SOUTH MELBOURNE, 3205 VIC., AUSTRALIA All rights reserved. Printed in Malaysia WM28790 YSP-500 Digital Sound ProjectorTM Système Acoustique Numérique OWNER’S MANUAL MODE D’EMPLOI BEDIENUNGSANLEITUNG BRUKSANVISNING GEBRUIKSAANWIJZING ИНСТРУКЦИЯ ПО ЭКСПЛУАТАЦИИ Items used for connections and operations in this guide s Audio pin cable (x1) s OSD* video pin cable (x1) s Optical cable (x1) s Digital audio pin cable (x1) s IntelliBeam microphone (x1) s Cardboard microphone stand (x1) s Demonstration DVD (x1) YSP-500 QUICK REFERENCE GUIDE *OSD: On-Screen Display 2 Connecting external components to this unit Connecting external components such as a TV or DVD player to this unit. Connect your TV or DVD player to this unit using appropriate cables as shown below. After all connections are complete, plug the power supply cable into the AC wall outlet. For further information on connecting other components, see pages 16 to 24 in the Owner’s Manual. This connection example shows a way to connect external components such as a TV or DVD player to this unit by using the supplied cable. You can enjoy the multi-channel audio from the DVD player and the analog/digital audio from the TV. Use the video pin cable supplied with your DVD player to make a video connection between your DVD player and TV. This quick reference guide explains steps to connect a TV and a DVD player to this unit and achieve the surround sound effects in a quick, easy manner. For detailed operation, refer to the Owner’s Manual. TV 1 Installing this unit Decide where to install this unit. Install this unit where there are no objects such as furniture obstructing the path of sound beams. Otherwise, the desired surround sound effects may not be achieved. You may install this unit in parallel with the wall or in the corner. Install this unit in the exact center of the wall when it is measured from the left and right corners. Connect the supplied cables in the following order. DVD player 1 Audio pin cable (Outputs TV analog audio sounds from this unit) Video connection 2 OSD video pin cable (Displays the YSP-500 menu screen on the TV) Install this unit in the corner at a 40˚ to 50˚ angle from the adjacent walls. 3 Optical cable (Outputs TV digital audio sounds from this unit) An object, such as furniture Front left channel 40˚ to 50˚ OPTICAL AUDIO OUTPUT ANALOG AUDIO VIDEO OUTPUT INPUT L 1 An object, such as furniture Front left channel Center channel Center channel Front right channel Front right channel Surround left channel Surround left channel Surround right channel Surround right channel R COAXIAL AUDIO OUTPUT Optical cable 1. Pull out the cap 2 2. Check the direction 4 Digital audio pin cable (Outputs DVD digital audio sounds from this unit) Pull out the cap before connecting the optical cable, and then check the direction to insert the cable. Note Check whether the digital audio output of your TV and DVD player is turned on. YSP-500 Install this unit using a rack, etc. 1 2 3 4 Depending on your installation environment, connections with external components (see “2 Connecting external components to this unit”) can be done before installing this unit. We recommend that you temporarily place and arrange all components in order to decide which procedure must come first. For further information on installation, see page 13 in the Owner’s Manual. L R VCR TV/STB SUBWOOFER AUDIO INPUT VIDEO OUT TV/STB AUX DVD SYSTEM OPTICAL COAXIAL CONNECTOR DIGITAL INPUT The following is an example of installing this unit in a rack. 1 Place this unit in front of 2 Connect this unit 3 Install this unit in the the rack. to your TV and DVD player. rack. To the AC wall outlet 4 Installation is completed. L If a subwoofer is connected to this unit, turn on the power of your subwoofer and then carry out the AUTO SETUP procedure (see the R VCR TV/STB SUBWOOFER AUDIO INPUT VIDEO OUT TV/STB AUX DVD SYSTEM OPTICAL COAXIAL CONNECTOR DIGITAL INPUT backside) or select “SWFR” for “BASS OUT” in “SUBWOOFER SET” (see page 62 in the Owner’s Manual). Do not plug the power supply cable into an AC wall outlet until all connections are complete. System connection Audio connection y Hint To enjoy better surround effects, place this unit on the upper shelf to keep it away from the floor. Note Subwoofer Be careful not to leave scratches on this unit or the rack. Printed in Malaysia 0906_YSP-500_En_guide.p65 C2007 WM28850 [En] 1 If you have connected external components, follow the steps on the backside to start the Continued on the back AUTO SETUP procedure. 9/7/07, 11:18 AM All rights reserved. Continued from the front 3 Carry out the AUTO SETUP (IntelliBeam) Carry out the AUTO SETUP to adjust the settings that best match your listening environment 6 Set the operation mode selector to YSP. This unit switches to the YSP operation mode. The following screen appears on the TV. Leave the room within 10 seconds before the AUTO SETUP procedure starts. The IntelliBeam technology allows you to achieve sound adjustments that best match your listening environment. It is normal for loud test tones to be output during the AUTO SETUP procedure. Make sure that there are no children around in the listening room while the AUTO SETUP procedure is in progress. CH LEVEL 1 Connect the supplied IntelliBeam microphone to the INTELLIBEAM MIC jack on the front panel. MENU ENTER TV/AV YSP TEST CH LEVEL INTELLIBEAM MIC INPUT VOLUME 2 3 4 STANDBY/ON AUTO SETUP START Will begin in 10sec ENTER TV/AV 7 Press and hold AUTO SETUP for more than 2 seconds. 4 Enjoying surround sound Enjoy TV or DVD digital audio in surround sound. For instructions on how to operate or set your TV or DVD player, refer to the owner’s manual supplied with each component. Enjoying DVDs in surround sound 1 Select the TV channel using the remote control supplied with your TV. 2 Set the operation mode selector to YSP. 2 Set the operation mode selector to YSP. **-------[RETURN]:Cancel RETURN The setup screen automatically changes during the AUTO SETUP procedure. When the AUTO SETUP procedure is completed, the following screen appears on the TV. Enjoying TV in surround sound 1 Select the DVD video input on your TV. Please leave the room YSP TEST The menu screen appears on the TV. If the menu screen does not appear, check the OSD video pin cable (see the connection example on the front page). INTELLIBEAM MIC MENU RETURN You may want to use the supplied cardboard microphone stand for the AUTO SETUP. Assemble the stand and place the IntelliBeam microphone on top of it as shown below. 1 10 Press ENTER to start the AUTO SETUP procedure, and then leave the room within 10 seconds. This unit switches to the YSP operation mode. SHOW RESULT This unit switches to the YSP operation mode. MEASUREMENT COMPLETE IntelliBeam microphone (supplied) TV INPUT2 INPUT1 MACRO TV Cardboard microphone stand (supplied) AUTO VOL MODE SETUP INPUTMODE SLEEP 5BEAM ST+3BEAM 3BEAM 1 2 3 BEAM MODE :5 BEAM SUBWOOFER :NOT APPLICABLE AUTO SETUP PREPARATION & CHECK Please connect the MIC. Please place the MIC at least 1.8m/6ft away from the YSP unit. The MIC should be set at ear level when seated. Measurement takes about 3min. After [ENTER] is pressed, please leave the room. [ENTER]:Start [RETURN]:Cancel ENTER TEST IntelliBeam microphone Center height of this unit Place the IntelliBeam microphone on the extended center line of this unit and 1.8 m (6.0 ft) or more away from it. Also, make sure place the IntelliBeam microphone within 1 m (3.3 ft) upper or lower from the center height of this unit. Upper bound position of the microphone Within 1 m (3.3 ft) Cardboard microphone stand More than 1.8 m (6.0 ft) Within 1 m (3.3 ft) Listening position Lower bound position of the microphone Center line Cardboard microphone stand 3 8 Check the following points. About the IntelliBeam microphone • Is the microphone placed on an imaginary center line drawn from this unit? • Is the microphone placed within 1 m (3.3 ft) upper or lower from the center height of this unit? • Is the microphone placed more than 1.8 m (6.0 ft) from the front of this unit? About the room environment • Is your listening room kept as quiet as possible? y Hint • The result may differ depending on the environment. • If any error occurs, the corresponding error message appears on the screen. In this case, see “Error messages for AUTO SETUP” on page 37 in the Owner’s Manual and then follow the instructions. To start the AUTO SETUP procedure once again, press RETURN. 9 Prepare to leave the room. Subwoofer VOLUME STANDBY/ON POWER POWER AV CROSSOVER/ HIGH CUT “YSP-500” appears on your TV. If the OSD video pin cable is connected to the video input 1 on the TV as shown in the connection example, switch the video input to “1”. CH LEVEL MENU AUTO SETUP COMPLETE ENTER Please remove the MIC from the YSP and the listening position. TV/AV YSP 12 Disconnect the IntelliBeam microphone. The AUTO SETUP has completed. Keep the IntelliBeam microphone in a safe place. The settings are automatically saved in the system memory. VCR DVD AUX INPUT1 TV INPUT2 MACRO TV MAX MIN STB VCR DVD AUX INPUT1 TV INPUT2 MACRO TV 5BEAM ST+3BEAM 3BEAM 1 2 3 MULTI indicator The MULTI indicator and/or (see page 42 in the Owner’s Manual) is lit in the front panel display. If the sound is output from your TV speakers, mute the volume on your TV. For details about digital audio input signals, see page 46 in the Owner’s Manual. INPUT VOLUME VOLUME CH TV VOL MUTE TV INPUT TV MUTE 5BEAM ST+3BEAM 1 2 3 STEREO MY BEAM MY SUR. 4 5 6 5 Press VOLUME +/- on the remote control to adjust the volume level of this unit. 6 Press one of the beam mode buttons on the remote control to select the desired beam mode. Select one of the six beam modes that best matches the current input source of this unit. For further information on the beam modes, see page 44 in the Owner’s Manual. 3BEAM STANDBY/ON MAX INTELLIBEAM MIC 2 STB This unit switches to the TV playback mode. RETURN INTELLIBEAM MIC 0905_YSP-500_En_guide.p65 This unit switches to the DVD playback mode. 3 Press TV on the remote control of this unit. 4 Check the multi-channel digital signal being output at this unit. TV MIN RETURN y Hint • When leaving the room, bring this guide with you. • Wait outside the room during the AUTO SETUP procedure. • The AUTO SETUP procedure takes about 3 minutes. • To cancel the AUTO SETUP procedure after it is started, press RETURN. 5 Select the appropriate video input on your TV. 1) Press DVD on the remote control of this unit. 2) Play back the supplied demonstration DVD on the DVD player. 11 Press ENTER. TEST The power of this unit turns on. Before operations, insert batteries into the remote control (see page 26 in the Owner’s Manual). If necessary, adjust the volume level of this unit. If you have connected the subwoofer, set the volume and crossover/high cut frequency. Refer to the note on page 32 in the Owner’s Manual. TEST The following screen appears on the TV for 2 seconds and then the menu screen disappears from the TV. IntelliBeam microphone 4 Turn on the power of your TV. YSP RETURN AUTO VOL MODE SETUP INPUTMODE SLEEP The best setting may not be done if you are in the room. Prepare to leave the room in 10 seconds after pressing ENTER in step 10. 3 Press STANDBY/ON on the remote control. TV/AV ENTER If “ENVIRONMENT CHECK (FAILED) is displayed, see page 36 in the Owner’s Manual and then run the procedure again. 2 Set the IntelliBeam microphone at your normal listening position. Use the supplied cardboard microphone stand or a tripod to place the IntelliBeam microphone at the same height as your ears would be when you are seated. TV/AV YSP [ENTER]:Save set-up [RETURN]:Do not save set-up 9/6/07, 5:05 PM To fine-tune the listening environment parameters manually or make advanced settings for speaker positions, sound beams, etc., see “MANUAL SETUP” on page 56 in the Owner’s Manual. Articles utilisés pour les raccordements et les opérations s Câble audio à fiches cinch (x1) s Câble vidéo à fiches cinch pour affichage des informations OSD* (x1) s Câble à fibres optiques (x1) s Câble audionumérique à fiches cinch (x1) s Microphone IntelliBeam (x1) s Support de microphone plat (x1) s DVD de démonstration (x1) YSP-500 GUIDE DE REFERENCE RAPIDE *OSD: Affichage des menus sur l’écran de télévision 2 Raccordement de composants à cet appareil Raccordement de composants, tel qu’un téléviseur ou un lecteur de DVD à cet appareil. Raccordez votre téléviseur ou lecteur de DVD à cet appareil en utilisant les câbles appropriés, comme indiqué ci-dessous. Lorsque tous les appareils sont raccordés, branchez le câble d’alimentation sur une prise secteur. Pour de plus amples informations sur le raccordement d’autres composants, reportez-vous aux pages 16 à 24 du mode d’emploi. Cet exemple montre comment raccorder des composants, tels qu’un téléviseur ou un lecteur de DVD à cet appareil à l’aide du câble fourni. Vous pourrez profiter du son multivoies du lecteur de DVD et du son analogique ou numérique du téléviseur. Utilisez le câble cinch vidéo fourni avec votre lecteur de DVD pour établir une liaison vidéo entre le lecteur de DVD et le téléviseur. Ce guide de référence rapide explique comment procéder pour raccorder un téléviseur et un lecteur de DVD à cet appareil et obtenir rapidement, de la manière la plus simple, des effets ambiophoniques. Pour de plus amples informations à ce sujet, reportez-vous au mode d’emploi. TV 1 Installation de l’appareil Déterminez l’emplacement de cet appareil. Installez l’appareil à un endroit où des meubles ou d’autres objets ne risquent pas de faire obstacle aux faisceaux sonores émis. Sinon, vous n’obtiendrez pas les effets d’ambiance souhaités. Vous pouvez installer cet appareil parallèlement à un mur ou dans un angle de la pièce. Installez cet appareil au centre du mur dans le sens de la longueur. Raccordez les câbles fournis dans l’ordre suivant. Graveur de DVD 1 Câble audio à fiches cinch (Transmet les signaux audio analogiques du téléviseur via cet appareil) Liaison vidéo 2 Câble vidéo à fiches cinch pour affichage des informations OSD (Affiche les menus du YSP-500 sur l’écran du téléviseur) Installez cet appareil dans un angle du mur à 40° à 50° des murs adjacents. 3 Câble à fibres optiques (Transmet les signaux audio numériques du téléviseur via cet appareil) Un objet, par exemple un meuble 40° à 50° Voie avant gauche OPTICAL AUDIO OUTPUT ANALOG AUDIO VIDEO OUTPUT INPUT L 1 Un objet, par exemple un meuble Voie avant gauche Voie centrale Voie centrale Voie avant droite Voie avant droite Voie d’ambiance gauche Voie d’ambiance gauche Voie d’ambiance droite Voie d’ambiance droite R 1. Déposez le capuchon. 2 2. Vérifiez le sens. COAXIAL AUDIO OUTPUT Câble à fibres optiques 4 Câble audionumérique à fiches cinch (Transmet les signaux audio numériques du lecteur de DVD via cet appareil) Déposez le capuchon avant de brancher le câble optique, puis vérifiez le sens d’insertion de la fiche. Remarque Vérifiez si la sortie audio numérique de votre téléviseur et de votre lecteur de DVD est en service. YSP-500 Installez cet appareil dans un meuble, etc. 1 2 3 4 Selon la situation, les raccordements aux composants pourront être effectués avant l’installation de cet appareil (voir “2 Raccordement de composants à cet appareil”). Il est conseillé de placer et de disposer provisoirement tous les appareils de manière à voir ce qu’il convient de faire en premier. Pour de plus amples informations sur l’installation, reportez-vous à la page 13 du mode d’emploi. L R VCR TV/STB SUBWOOFER AUDIO INPUT VIDEO OUT TV/STB AUX DVD SYSTEM OPTICAL COAXIAL CONNECTOR DIGITAL INPUT L’installation dans un meuble est expliquée dans l’exemple suivant. 1 Posez cet appareil devant 2 Raccordez cet appareil au 3 Installez l’appareil dans le meuble. téléviseur et au lecteur de DVD. À une prise secteur 4 L’installation est terminée. le meuble. L Si un caisson de graves est connecté à l’appareil, mettez votre caisson de graves sous tension et exécutez la procédure AUTO SETUP (voir au R VCR TV/STB SUBWOOFER AUDIO INPUT VIDEO OUT TV/STB AUX DVD SYSTEM OPTICAL COAXIAL CONNECTOR DIGITAL INPUT verso) ou sélectionnez “SWFR” pour “BASS OUT” dans “SUBWOOFER SET” (voir page 62 du Mode d’emploi). Connexion système Liaison audio y Conseil Pour bénéficier d’un meilleur effet ambiophonique, posez l’appareil sur l’étagère supérieure du meuble de manière à ce qu’il soit le plus loin possible du sol. Remarque Caisson de graves Attention de ne pas rayer l’appareil ou le meuble. Printed in Malaysia 0906_YSP-500_Fr_guide.p65 Ne branchez le câble d’alimentation sur une prise secteur que lorsque tous les appareils ont été raccordés. C2007 WM28860 [Fr] 1 Si vous avez raccordé des composants, suivez les étapes au verso pour effectuer la procédure AUTO SETUP. 9/6/07, 5:08 PM Suite au verso All rights reserved. Suite du recto 3 Exécution de AUTO SETUP (IntelliBeam) Exécutez AUTO SETUP pour obtenir les réglages les mieux adaptés à votre environnement. 6 Réglez le sélecteur de mode de fonctionnement sur YSP. L’appareil se met en mode de fonctionnement YSP. L’écran suivant apparaît sur le téléviseur. Quittez la pièce dans les 10 secondes, avant que la procédure AUTO SETUP démarre. La technologie IntelliBeam permet d’obtenir les réglages les mieux adaptés à votre environnement. Pendant la procédure AUTO SETUP, il est normal d’entendre des signaux d’essai puissants. Ne laissez pas d’enfants dans la pièce pendant l’exécution de AUTO SETUP. CH LEVEL 1 Raccordez le microphone IntelliBeam fourni à la prise INTELLIBEAM MIC sur la face avant. MENU ENTER TV/AV YSP TEST INTELLIBEAM MIC INPUT VOLUME 2 3 4 STANDBY/ON 7 Appuyez sur AUTO SETUP et maintenez la pression plus de 2 secondes. TV INPUT2 INPUT1 Utilisez le support de microphone en carton fourni ou un trépied pour placer le microphone IntelliBeam à la hauteur de vos oreilles lorsque vous êtes assis. Placez le microphone IntelliBeam sur l’axe central à 1,8 m au minimum de l’appareil. Assurez-vous aussi que le microphone IntelliBeam est à moins de 1 m au-dessus ou au-dessous de la hauteur centrale de cet appareil. Limite supérieure du microphone Moins de 1 m Axe Position d’écoute Limite inférieure du microphone Support de microphone plat 3 Appuyez sur STANDBY/ON sur le boîtier de télécommande. L’appareil se met sous tension. N’oubliez de mettre auparavant des piles dans le boîtier de télécommande (voir page 26 du mode d’emploi). Si nécessaire, réglez le niveau de sortie de cet appareil. Si vous avez raccordé le caisson de graves, réglez le volume et la fréquence de coupure des hautes fréquences. Reportez-vous à la remarque à la page 32 du mode d’emploi. Subwoofer VOLUME STANDBY/ON POWER POWER AV CROSSOVER/ HIGH CUT TV MAX L’écran de configuration change automatiquement pendant toute la procédure AUTO SETUP. Lorsque la procédure AUTO SETUP est terminée, l’écran suivant apparaît sur l’écran de télévision. Microphone IntelliBeam MIN 2 Regarder la télévision en ambiophonie 1 Sélectionnez l’entrée vidéo du DVD sur votre téléviseur. 1 Sélectionnez la chaîne de télévision avec le boîtier de télécommande fourni avec votre téléviseur. 2 Réglez le sélecteur de mode de fonctionnement sur YSP. 2 Réglez le sélecteur de mode de fonctionnement sur YSP. L’appareil se met en mode de fonctionnement YSP. MACRO ENTER L’appareil se met en mode de fonctionnement YSP. TV/AV TV/AV ENTER YSP 5BEAM ST+3BEAM 3BEAM 1 2 3 TEST 3 y Conseil Vous pouvez sélectionner la langue indiquée dans les informations OSD en procédant de la façon suivante. Réglez le sélecteur de mode de fonctionnement sur YSP. ➞ Appuyez sur MENU. ➞ Appuyez sur / pour sélectionner LANGUAGE SETUP. ➞ Appuyez sur ENTER. ➞ Appuyez sur / pour sélectionner la langue. ➞ Appuyez sur ENTER. RETURN YSP TEST RETURN Si “ENVIRONMENT CHECK (FAILED)” apparaît, reportez-vous à la page 36 du mode d’emploi et effectuez une nouvelle fois la procédure. y Conseil • Le résultat peut être différent selon l’environnement. • En cas d’erreur, le message d’erreur correspondant apparaît sur l’écran. Dans ce cas, reportez-vous à “Message d’erreur pour AUTO SETUP” à la page 37 du mode d’emploi et suivez les instructions. Pour relancer la procédure AUTO SETUP, appuyez sur RETURN. 1) Appuyez sur DVD du boîtier de télécommande de cet appareil. L’appareil se met en mode de lecture de DVD. STB VCR DVD AUX INPUT1 TV INPUT2 MACRO TV 3 Appuyez sur TV sur le boîtier de télécommande de cet appareil. L’appareil se met en mode Télévision. STB VCR DVD AUX INPUT1 TV INPUT2 MACRO TV AUTO VOL MODE SETUP INPUTMODE SLEEP En ce qui concerne le microphone IntelliBeam • Est-ce que le microphone est placé dans l’axe de cet appareil? • Est-ce que le microphone est à moins de 1 m au-dessus ou au-dessous de la hauteur centrale de cet appareil? • Est-ce que le microphone est à plus de 1,8 m de l’avant de cet 2) Reproduisez le DVD de démonstration fourni sur le lecteur de DVD. appareil? En ce qui concerne l’environnement de la pièce • Est-ce que la pièce est la plus silencieuse possible? 11 Appuyez sur ENTER. 5BEAM ST+3BEAM 3BEAM 1 2 3 L’écran suivant apparaît sur le téléviseur pendant 2 secondes, puis il disparaît. Témoin MULTI CH LEVEL 4 Vérifiez le signal numérique multivoies fourni par cet appareil. MENU ENTER Le témoin MULTI (voir page 42 du mode d’emploi) s’éclaire sur l’afficheur de la face avant. Si le son est fourni par les enceintes de votre téléviseur, coupez le son sur votre téléviseur. Pour de plus amples informations sur les signaux d’entrée audio numérique, reportez-vous à la page 46 du mode d’emploi. TV/AV YSP TEST RETURN 4 Mettez le téléviseur sous tension. 9 Préparez-vous à quitter la pièce. 5 Sélectionnez l’entrée vidéo appropriée sur votre téléviseur. “YSP-500” apparaît sur votre téléviseur. Si le câble cinch vidéo OSD est raccordé à l’entrée vidéo 1 du téléviseur, comme indiqué dans l’exemple de raccordement, réglez l’entrée vidéo sur “1”. Vous n’obtiendrez peut-être pas le meilleur réglage possible si vous restez dans la pièce. Préparez-vous à quitter la pièce dans les 10 secondes après avoir appuyé sur ENTER à l’étape 10. y Conseil • Lorsque vous quittez la pièce, emportez le guide avec vous. • Attendez à l’extérieur de la pièce pendant toute la durée de la procédure AUTO SETUP. • La procédure AUTO SETUP dure 3 minutes environ. • Pour annuler la procédure AUTO SETUP en cours d’exécution, appuyez sur RETURN. 12 Débranchez le microphone IntelliBeam. La procédure AUTO SETUP est terminée. Rangez le microphone Intellibeam en lieu sûr. Les réglages sont automatiquement sauvegardés dans la mémoire du système. INPUT VOLUME VOLUME CH TV VOL MUTE TV INPUT TV MUTE 5BEAM ST+3BEAM 1 2 3 STEREO MY BEAM MY SUR. 4 5 6 5 Appuyez sur VOLUME +/– du boîtier de télécommande pour régler le niveau de sortie de cet appareil. 6 Appuyez sur une des touches du mode de faisceaux sur le boîtier de télécommande pour sélectionner le mode de faisceaux souhaité. Sélectionnez le mode de faisceaux le mieux adapté à la source actuellement sélectionnée parmi les six modes proposés. Pour de plus amples informations sur les modes de faisceaux, reportez-vous à la page 44 de mode d’emploi. 3BEAM STANDBY/ON MAX INTELLIBEAM MIC 0906_YSP-500_Fr_guide.p65 Regarder des DVD en ambiophonie RETURN INTELLIBEAM MIC MIN Pour le détail sur le fonctionnement ou le réglage du téléviseur ou du lecteur de DVD, reportez-vous à leur manuel respectif. TV/AV 8 Vérifiez les points suivants. Moins de 1 m Plus de 1,8 m Écoutez le son numérique de la télévision ou de vos DVD en ambiophonie. AUTO VOL MODE SETUP INPUTMODE SLEEP 2 Posez le microphone IntelliBeam à votre position d’écoute habituelle. Support de microphone plat Écoute du son ambiophonique TV Support de microphone plat (Fourni) Hauteur centrale de cet appareil 4 YSP TEST Microphone IntelliBeam (Fourni) Microphone IntelliBeam MENU ENTER Le menu apparaît sur l’écran de télévision. S’il n’apparaît pas, vérifiez le câble cinch vidéo OSD (voir l’exemple de raccordement sur le recto). INTELLIBEAM MIC CH LEVEL RETURN Vous pouvez utiliser le support de microphone en carton fourni lors de la procédure AUTO SETUP. Assemblez le support et posez le microphone IntelliBeam dessus, comme indiqué ci-dessous. 1 10 Appuyez sur ENTER pour lancer la procédure AUTO SETUP, puis quittez la pièce dans les 10 secondes. 9/6/07, 5:08 PM Pour régler plus finement les paramètres de l’environnement d’écoute ou pour faire des réglages encore plus sophistiqués pour les positions des enceintes, les faisceaux sonores, etc. reportez-vous à “MANUAL SETUP” (Configuration manuelle) à la page 56 du mode d’emploi. Teile für Anschluss und Betrieb s Audio-Cinchkabel (x1) s OSD*-Video-Cinchkabel (x1) s Optokabel (x1) s Digitales Audio-Cinchkabel (x1) s IntelliBeam Mikrofon (x1) s Pappständer für Mikrofon (x1) s Demo-DVD (x1) YSP-500 KURZ-ANLEITUNG 2 Anschluss externer Komponenten an diesem Gerät Verbinden des Geräts mit externen Komponenten wie Fernsehgerät und DVD-Player. Schließen Sie Fernsehgerät, DVD-Player u. dgl. mit geeigneten Kabeln wie nachfolgend beschrieben an. Nach Herstellen aller anderen Verbindungen schließen Sie dann noch das Netzkabel an eine Steckdose an. Weitere Informationen zum Anschluss anderer Komponenten finden Sie in der Bedienungsanleitung auf den Seiten 16 bis 24. *OSD: Bildschirmanzeige (On-Screen Display) Dieses Anschlussbeispiel veranschaulicht eine Möglichkeit für den Anschluss externer Komponenten wie Fernsehgerät und DVD-Player mit den mitgelieferten Kabeln. Mehrkanalton vom DVD-Player und analoge/dititale Tonsignale vom Fernsehgerät genießen. Stellen Sie mit Hilfe des mit dem DVD-Player gelieferten Video-Cinchkabels eine Video-Verbindung zwischen dem DVD-Player und dem Fernsehgerät her. Diese Kurz-Anleitung erläutert in kurzer und übersichtlicher Form, wie Sie dieses Geräts mit einem Fernsehgerät und einem DVD-Player verbinden und Surroundklang-Effekte genießen. Ausführliche Anweisungen zur Bedienung finden Sie in der Bedienungsanleitung. TV 1 Installieren dieses Gerätes Bestimmung des richtigen Aufstellungsorts Installieren Sie dieses Gerät an einem Ort, wo der Schallstrahlengang durch keine Hindernisse, wie z.B. Möbelstücke, beeinträchtigt wird. Anderenfalls werden die gewünschten Surroundklangeffekte möglicherweise nicht erzielt. Sie können dieses Gerät parallel zur Wand oder in einer Ecke installieren. Installieren Sie dieses Gerät genau in der Mitte der Wand, von der linken und rechten Ecke aus gemessen. Ein Hindernis, wie zum Beispiel ein Möbelstück Vorderer linker Kanal Schließen Sie das mitgelieferte Kabel in der folgenden Reihenfolge her. DVD-Player 1 Audio-Cinchkabel (Zur Ausgabe analoger Fernseh-Audiosignale über dieses Gerät.) Video-Verbindung 2 OSD-Video-Cinchkabel (Zum Einblenden der YSP-500 Menüanzeige am Fernsehbildschirm.) Installieren Sie dieses Gerät in einer Ecke in einem Winkel von 40˚ bis 50˚ zu den angrenzenden Wänden. 40˚ bis 50˚ Vorderer linker Kanal Center-Kanal Center-Kanal Vorderer rechter Kanal Vorderer rechter Kanal Linker Surround-Kanal Linker Surround-Kanal Rechter Surround-Kanal Rechter Surround-Kanal OPTICAL AUDIO OUTPUT ANALOG AUDIO VIDEO OUTPUT INPUT L 1 Ein Hindernis, wie zum Beispiel ein Möbelstück R 1. Kappe herausziehen 2 2. Korrekt ausrichten 3 Optokabel (Zur Ausgabe digitaler Fernseh-Audiosignale über dieses Gerät.) COAXIAL AUDIO OUTPUT Optokabel 4 Digitales Audio-Cinchkabel (Zur Ausgabe digitaler DVD-Audiosignale über dieses Gerät.) Ziehen Sie vor dem Anschluss des Optokabels die Kappe heraus und richten Sie den Stecker beim Anschluss korrekt aus. Hinweis Sehen Sie nach, ob der digitale Audio-Ausgang an Fernsehgerät und DVD-Player eingeschaltet ist. YSP-500 Installation des Geräts in einem Gestell o. dgl. 1 2 3 4 Die Verbindungen mit externen Komponenten (siehe „2 Anschluss externer Komponenten an diesem Gerät“) können je nach Installationsumgebung vor der Aufstellung des Geräts erfolgen. Wir empfehlen Ihnen, dieses Gerät und alle anderen Komponenten zunächst provisorisch anzuordnen um zu sehen, in welcher Reihenfolge Sie vorgehen müssen. Ausführliche Anweisungen zur Installation finden Sie in der Bedienungsanleitung auf Seite 13. L R VCR TV/STB SUBWOOFER AUDIO INPUT VIDEO OUT TV/STB AUX DVD SYSTEM OPTICAL COAXIAL CONNECTOR DIGITAL INPUT Das folgende Beispiel zeigt die Aufstellung in einem Gestell. 1 Stellen Sie das Gerät vor 2 Schließen Sie dieses 3 Stellen Sie das Gerät in dem Gestell auf dem Boden ab. Gerät an Ihren Fernseher und das Gestell. DVD-Player an. An die Wandsteckdose 4 Die Aufstellung ist damit abgeschlossen L Wenn ein Subwoofer an dieses Gerät angeschlossen ist, schalten Sie Ihren Subwoofer ein und führen dann das AUTO Setup-Verfahren aus R VCR TV/STB SUBWOOFER AUDIO INPUT VIDEO OUT TV/STB AUX DVD SYSTEM OPTICAL COAXIAL CONNECTOR DIGITAL INPUT (siehe Rückseite) oder wählen Sie „SWFR“ für „BASS OUT“ in „SUBWOOFER SET“ (siehe Seite 62 im Bedienungshandbuch). Systemanschluss Audio-Verbindung y Tipp Zur Optimierung der Surroundeffekte stellen Sie das Gerät in das obere Regalbrett. Ein gewisser Abstand zum Fußboden ist von Vorteil. Hinweis Subwoofer (Tieftöner) Arbeiten Sie vorsichtig, damit weder am Gerät noch am Gestell Kratzer entstehen. Printed in Malaysia 0906_YSP-500_De_guide.p65 Schließen Sie das Netzkabel erst an die Steckdose an, nachdem alle anderen Verbindungen hergestellt wurden. C2007 WM28870 [De] 1 Nachdem Sie die externen Komponenten angeschlossen haben, folgen Sie den Schritten auf der Rückseite, um das AUTO SETUP zu starten. 9/6/07, 8:21 PM Fortsetzung auf der Rückseite All rights reserved. Fortsetzung von der Vorderseite 3 Durchführung von AUTO SETUP (IntelliBeam) Führen Sie das AUTO SETUP durch, um die Einstellungen der Geräteparameter optimal an Ihre Hörumgebung anzupassen 6 Stellen Sie den Betriebsmoduswähler auf YSP. Das Gerät schaltet in den YSP-Betriebsmodus. Die IntelliBeam-Technologie erlaubt Ihnen eine automatische Ermittlung der für Ihren Hörraum optimalen Soundeinstellungen. Während des AUTO SETUPVorgangs werden laute Testtöne ausgegeben. Achten Sie darauf, dass sich im Verlauf des AUTO SETUP-Vorgangs keine Kinder im Hörraum befinden. CH LEVEL 1 Schließen Sie das mitgelieferte IntelliBeam-Mikrofon an die INTELLIBEAM MIC-Buchse an der Frontblende an. MENU ENTER INTELLIBEAM MIC INPUT VOLUME 2 3 4 STANDBY/ON 7 Halten Sie AUTO SETUP mindestens 2 Sekunden lang gedrückt. TV INPUT2 INPUT1 Stellen Sie das IntelliBeam mikrofon entlang der verlängerten Mittenlinie des Geräts in mindestens 1,8 m Entfernung auf. Achten Sie unbedingt darauf, dass die Höhe des IntelliBeam mikrofons nicht mehr als 1 m von der Mittenlinie des Geräts abweicht. Obere Grenzposition des Mikrofons Innerhalb 1 m Mittellinie Pappständer für Mikrofon Hörposition Obere Grenzposition des Mikrofons 3 Drücken Sie STANDBY/ON auf der Fernbedienung. Das Gerät wird dadurch eingeschaltet. Legen Sie zunächst Batterien in die Fernbedienung ein (siehe Seite 26 in der Bedienungsanleitung). Stellen Sie, sofern erforderlich, den Lautstärkepegel dieses Geräts ein. Wenn ein Subwoofer angeschlossen ist, stellen Sie dessen Lautstärke und Übergangs-/Tiefpassfrequenz ein. Mehr dazu finden Sie im Hinweis auf Seite 32 der Bedienungsanleitung. Subwoofer (Tieftöner) STANDBY/ON POWER POWER AV CROSSOVER/ HIGH CUT TV MAX Nach Abschluss des AUTO SETUP-Vorgangs ist auf dem Fernsehbildschirm die folgende Anzeige zu sehen. 2 2 Stellen Sie den Betriebsmoduswähler auf YSP. 2 Stellen Sie den Betriebsmoduswähler auf YSP. Das Gerät schaltet in den YSP-Betriebsmodus. Das Gerät schaltet in den YSP-Betriebsmodus. ENTER 5BEAM ST+3BEAM 3BEAM 1 2 3 IntelliBeam Mikrofon TEST Falls „ENVIRONMENT CHECK FAILED“ angezeigt wird, lesen Sie auf Seite 36 in der Bedienungsanleitung nach und führen den Vorgang danach noch einmal durch. y Tipp Sie können die in der Bildschirmanzeige gezeigte Sprache mit den folgenden Schritten wählen. Stellen Sie den Betriebsmoduswahlschalter auf YSP ➞ Drücken Sie MENU ➞ Drücken Sie / zum Wählen von LANGUAGE SETUP ➞ Drücken Sie ENTER ➞ Drücken Sie / zum Auswählen der Sprache ➞ Drücken Sie ENTER y Tipp • Das Ergebnis kann je nach Hörumgebung anders ausfallen. • Wenn ein Fehler auftritt, erscheint eine entsprechende Fehlermeldung auf dem Bildschirm. Folgen Sie in einem solchen Fall den Anweisungen unter „Fehlermeldungen für AUTO SETUP“ auf Seite 37 der Bedienungsanleitung. Zum erneuten Starten des AUTO SETUP-Vorgangs drücken Sie RETURN. MIN TV/AV TV/AV ENTER 3 RETURN 1) Drücken Sie DVD an der Fernbedienung dieses Geräts. Das Gerät schaltet dabei in den DVD-Wiedergabemodus. STB VCR DVD AUX INPUT1 TV INPUT2 MACRO TV YSP TEST RETURN 3 Drücken Sie TV an der Fernbedienung dieses Geräts. Das Gerät schaltet in den TV-Wiedergabemodus. STB VCR DVD AUX INPUT1 TV INPUT2 MACRO TV AUTO VOL MODE SETUP INPUTMODE SLEEP Bezüglich des IntelliBeam-Mikrofons • Ist das Mikrofon entlang der imaginären, vom Gerät gezogenen Mittenlinie aufgestellt? • Befindet sich das Mikrofon innerhalb 1 m ober- bzw. unterhalb der Mittenlinie des Geräts? • Ist das Mikrofon mindestens 1,8 m vom Gerät entfernt? Bezüglich der Raumumgebung • Herrscht im Hörraum die erforderliche Ruhe? 2) Spielen Sie die mitgelieferte DemoDVD auf dem DVD-Player ab. 11 Drücken Sie ENTER. 5BEAM ST+3BEAM 3BEAM 1 2 3 Die folgende Anzeige erscheint 2 Sekunden lang am Fernsehbildschirm, wonach die Menüanzeige ausgeblendet wird. CH LEVEL MENU ENTER Die MULTI-Anzeige (siehe Seite 42 in der Bedienungsanleitung) leuchtet im Frontblendendisplay auf. Falls auch Ton vom Fernseher selbst erzeugt wird, schalten Sie ihn stumm. Genauere Angaben zu digitalen AudioEingangssignalen finden Sie in der Bedienungsanleitung auf Seite 46. TV/AV YSP TEST MULTI Anzeige 4 Prüfen Sie das an diesem Gerät ausgegebene mehrkanalige Digitalsignal. RETURN 4 Schalten Sie das Fernsehgerät ein. 9 Bereiten Sie sich vor, den Raum zu verlassen. 5 Wählen Sie den richtigen Videoeingang am Fernsehgerät. „YSP-500“ erscheint auf dem Fernsehbildschirm. Wenn das OSD-Video-Cinchkabel wie im Anschlussbeispiel an Videoeingang 1 des Fernsehgeräts angeschlossen wurde, wählen Sie den Videoeingang „1“. Die bestmögliche Einstellung wird unter Umständen nicht erzielt, wenn Sie im Hörraum bleiben. Bereiten Sie alles vor, so dass Sie den Hörraum nach Drücken von ENTER in Schritt 10 innerhalb von 10 Sekunden verlassen können. y Tipp 12 Trennen Sie das IntelliBeam-Mikrofon ab. 5 Stellen Sie den Lautstärkepegel dieses Geräts mit VOLUME +/– an der Fernbedienung ein. Das AUTO SETUP ist hiermit beendet. Bewahren Sie das IntelliBeam-Mikrofon an einem sicheren Platz auf. Die Einstellungen werden automatisch im Systemspeicher festgehalten. 6 Drücken Sie eine der Schallstahlmodustasten an der Fernbedienung, um den gewünschten Schallstrahlmodus zu wählen. • Nehmen Sie diese Anleitung beim Verlassen des Raums mit. • Warten Sie draußen, bis der AUTO SETUP-Vorgang beendet ist. • Das AUTO SETUP dauert etwa 3 Minuten. • Sie können den gestarteten AUTO SETUP-Vorgang durch einen Druck auf RETURN abbrechen. Wählen Sie den der sechst Schallstrahlmodi, der sich für die aktuelle Eingangsquelle am besten eignet. Weitergehende Informationen zu den Schallstrahlmodi finden Sie in der Bedienungsanleitung auf Seite 44. INPUT VOLUME VOLUME CH TV VOL MUTE TV INPUT TV MUTE 5BEAM ST+3BEAM 1 2 3 STEREO MY BEAM MY SUR. 4 5 6 3BEAM STANDBY/ON MAX INTELLIBEAM MIC 0906_YSP-500_De_guide.p65 1 Wählen Sie mit der Fernbedienung des Fernsehgeräts das gewünschte Fernsehprogramm. RETURN Die Setup-Anzeigen wechseln während des AUTO SETUPVorgangs automatisch. Fernsehprogramme mit Surroundklang 1 Wählen Sie den DVD-Eingang am Fernsehgerät. TV/AV INTELLIBEAM MIC MIN DVD-Wiedergabe mit Surroundklang YSP 8 Prüfen Sie folgende Punkte. Innerhalb 1 m VOLUME Anweisungen zur Bedienung und Einstellung Ihres Fernsehers oder DVD-Players entnehmen Sie bitte der Bedienungsanleitung der betreffenden Komponente. AUTO VOL MODE SETUP INPUTMODE SLEEP Verwenden Sie den mitgelieferten Karton-Mikrofonständer oder ein Stativ, damit das Mikrofon sich in derselben Höhe befindet wie Ihre Ohren, wenn Sie an Ihrer Hörposition Platz nehmen. Mehr als 1,8 m Genießen Sie digitale Fernseh- oder DVD-Tonsignale mit Surroundklang. MACRO 2 Stellen Sie das IntelliBeam mikrofon an Ihrer normalen Hörposition auf. Pappständer für Mikrofon Surroundklang-Wiedergabe TV Pappständer für Mikrofon (mitgeliefert) Mittenhöhe dieses Geräts 4 YSP TEST IntelliBeam Mikrofon (mitgeliefert) IntelliBeam Mikrofon MENU ENTER Die Menüanzeige erscheint am Fernsehbildschirm. Sollte die Menüanzeige nicht eingeblendet werden, überprüfen Sie das OSD-Video-Cinchkabel (siehe Anschlussbeispiel auf der Vorderseite). INTELLIBEAM MIC CH LEVEL RETURN Wir empfehlen die Verwendung des mitgelieferten Karton-Mikrofonständers für das AUTO SETUP. Bauen Sie den Ständer zusammen und legen Sie das Mikrofon wie in der Abbildung oben auf den Ständer. 1 Die folgende Anzeige erscheint am Fernsehbildschirm. Verlassen Sie den Raum innerhalb von 10 Sekunden, bevor der AUTO SETUP-Vorgang startet. TV/AV YSP TEST 10 Drücken Sie ENTER, um den AUTO SETUP-Vorgang zu starten, und verlassen Sie den Hörraum dann innerhalb von 10 Sekunden. 9/6/07, 8:21 PM Zur manuellen Feinabstimmung der Hörumgebungsparameter oder zum Vornehmen weitergehender Einstellungen für Lautsprecherpositionen, Schallstrahlen usw. lesen Sie auf Seite 56 der Bedienungsanleitung unter „MANUAL SETUP“ nach. Artiklar som behövs för anslutningar och manövrering s Ljudkabel med stiftkontakter (x1) s Videokabel med stiftkontakter (x1) s Optisk kabel (x1) s Digital ljudkabel med stiftkontakter (x1) s IntelliBeam-mikrofon (x1) s Mikrofonställ av hårdpapp (x1) s Demonstrations-DVD (x1) YSP-500 SNABBREFERENSGUIDE 2 Anslutning av externa komponenter till ljudprojektorn Anslut externa komponenter, t.ex. en tv och en DVD-spelare, till ljudprojektor. Använd lämpliga kablar till att ansluta tv:n och DVD-spelaren till ljudprojektorn enligt nedan. Anslut nätkabeln till ett nätuttag efter att alla övriga anslutningar är klara. För vidare information om anslutning av andra komponenter hänvisas till sidorna 16 till 24 i bruksanvisningen. I detta anslutningsexempel visas hur sådana externa komponenter som en tv och en DVD-spelare kan anslutas till ljudprojektorn med hjälp av medföljande kablar. Med denna anslutning kan flerkanaligt ljud från DVD-spelaren och analogt/digitalt ljud från tv:n återges. Använd den videokabel med stiftkontakter som följer med DVD-spelaren till att utföra en videoanslutning mellan DVD-spelaren och tv:n. I denna snabbreferensguide beskrivs hur man kan ansluta en tv och en DVD-spelare till ljudprojektorn och erhålla surroundljudseffekter på ett snabbt och enkelt sätt. För närmare information om manövrering hänvisas till bruksanvisningen. TV 1 Installering av ljudprojektorn Bestäm var ljudprojektorn ska installeras. Installera ljudprojektorn på en plats där inga hinder, såsom möbler, är i vägen för ljudstrålarna. Sådana hinder kan medföra att önskade surroundljudseffekter inte kan uppnås. Ljudprojektorn kan installeras längs en vägg eller i ett hörn. Installera ljudprojektorn exakt på mitten av väggen, mätt från hörnen till vänster och höger. Anslut de medföljande kablar i följande ordning. DVD-spelare 1 Ljudkabel med stiftkontakter (för utmatning av analoga tv-ljudsignaler via ljudprojektorn) Videoanslutning 2 Videokabel med stiftkontakter (för visning av menyn till YSP-500 på tv:n) Installera ljudprojektorn i 40° till 50° vinkel från de angränsande väggarna. 3 Optisk kabel (för utmatning av digitala tv-ljudsignaler via ljudprojektorn) Möbel etc. Vänster framkanal 40° till 50° OPTICAL AUDIO OUTPUT ANALOG AUDIO VIDEO OUTPUT INPUT L 1 Möbel etc. Vänster framkanal Mittkanall Mittkanall Höger framkanal Höger framkanal Vänster surroundkanal Vänster surroundkanal Höger surroundkana Höger surroundkana R 1. Ta bort dammskyddet 2 2. Kontrollera riktningen COAXIAL AUDIO OUTPUT Optisk kabel 4 Digital ljudkabel med stiftkontakter (för utmatning av digitala DVD-ljudsignaler via ljudprojektorn) Ta bort dammskyddet och kontrollera att kontakten är korrekt vänd, när en kontakt på den optiska kabeln ska anslutas. Anmärkning Kontrollera huruvida digital ljudutmatning på tv:n och DVDspelaren är inkopplat. YSP-500 Installera ljudprojektorn i ett rack e.dyl. 1 2 3 4 Beroende på aktuell installationsmiljö kan anslutningar till externa komponenter (se “2 Anslutning av externa komponenter till ljudprojektorn”) utföras innan ljudprojektorn installeras. Det rekommenderas att samtliga komponenter placeras ut temporärt på önskade platser för att det ska gå lättare att avgöra vilken åtgärd som behöver utföras först. För vidare information om installation hänvisas till sidan 13 i bruksanvisningen. L R VCR TV/STB SUBWOOFER AUDIO INPUT VIDEO OUT TV/STB AUX DVD SYSTEM OPTICAL COAXIAL CONNECTOR DIGITAL INPUT Nedan visas ett exempel på hur ljudprojektorn kan installeras i ett rack. 1 Placera ljudprojektorn 2 Anslut denna enhet tv:n 3 Installera ljudprojektorn i 4 Installationen är klar. framför racket. och DVD-spelaren. racket. Till ett nätuttag L Om en subwoofer är ansluten till denna enhet, slå av strömmen till subwoofern och utför därefter proceduren AUTO SETUP (se baksidan) R VCR TV/STB SUBWOOFER AUDIO INPUT VIDEO OUT TV/STB AUX DVD SYSTEM OPTICAL COAXIAL CONNECTOR DIGITAL INPUT eller välj “SWFR” för “BASS OUT” i “SUBWOOFER SET” (se sid. 62 i bruksanvisningen). Anslut inte nätkabeln till ett nätuttag förrän samtliga övriga anslutningar är klara. Systemanslutning Ljudanslutning y Tips Placera ljudprojektorn på den övre hyllan, så att den hålls borta från golvet, för att uppnå bättra surroundeffekter. Anmärkning Subwoofer Var försiktig med att inte orsaka repor på ljudprojektorn eller racket. Printed in Malaysia 0906_YSP-500_Sv_guide.p65 C2007 WM86580 [Sv] 1 Utför åtgärderna på baksidan för att starta AUTO SETUP-inställning, när externa komponenter har anslutits. 9/6/07, 5:18 PM Fortsättning på baksidan All rights reserved. Fortsättning från framsidan 3 Utförande av AUTO SETUP-inställning (IntelliBeam) Utför AUTO SETUP-inställningen för att anpassa inställningar till aktuell lyssningsmiljö. 6 Ställ manövreringslägesväljaren i läget YSP. Manövreringsläget YSP kopplas in på ljudprojektorn. Följande meddelande visas på tv-skärmen. Lämna rummet inom 10 sekunder, innan AUTO SETUP-inställningen startar. IntelliBeam-tekniken gör det möjligt att uppnå optimala ljudinställningar i förhållande till den aktuella lyssningsmiljön. Det är normalt att höga testtoner matas ut under pågående AUTO SETUP-inställning. Se till att inga barn finns i närheten av lyssningsrummet medan AUTO SETUP-inställningen genomförs. CH LEVEL 1 Anslut den medföljande IntelliBeam-mikrofonen till ingången INTELLIBEAM MIC på frontpanelen. ENTER TV/AV YSP TEST INTELLIBEAM MIC INPUT VOLUME 2 3 CH LEVEL MENU AUTO SETUP START RETURN Will begin in 10sec 4 STANDBY/ON ENTER TV/AV Återgivning av surroundljud Upplev digitalt surroundljud från tv eller DVD-skivor. Angående manövrering av den tv eller den DVD-spelare som används hänvisas till bruksanvisningen till respektive komponent. 7 Tryck in och håll AUTO SETUP intryckt i över 2 sekunder. 1 Använd fjärrkontrollen som följer med tv:n till att välja önskad tvkanal. 2 Ställ manövreringslägesväljaren i läget YSP. 2 Ställ manövreringslägesväljaren i läget YSP. **-------[RETURN]:Cancel RETURN Inställningsmenyerna ändras automatiskt under pågående AUTO SETUP-inställning.Inställningsmenyerna ändras automatiskt under pågående AUTO SETUP-inställning. När AUTO SETUP-inställningen är klar visas följande meny på tv-skärmen. Återgivning av surroundljud från tv 1 Välj videoingången för DVDspelaren på tv:n. Please leave the room YSP TEST En meny visas på tv-skärmen. Om menyn inte visas, så kontrollera OSD-videokabeln med stiftkontakter (se anslutningsexemplen på framsidan). INTELLIBEAM MIC 4 Återgivning av surroundljud från DVD-skivor MENU Det medföljande mikrofonstället av hårdpapp kan användas vid AUTO SETUP-inställning. Montera ihop stället och placera IntelliBeam-mikrofonen ovanpå stället enligt illustrationen nedan. 1 10 Tryck på ENTER för att starta AUTO SETUP-inställningen och lämna rummet inom 10 sekunder. Manövreringsläget YSP kopplas in på ljudprojektorn. SHOW RESULT Manövreringsläget YSP kopplas in på ljudprojektorn. MEASUREMENT COMPLETE IntelliBeam-mikrofon (medföljer) TV INPUT2 INPUT1 MACRO TV Mikrofonställ av hårdpapp (medföljer) AUTO VOL MODE SETUP INPUTMODE SLEEP 5BEAM ST+3BEAM 3BEAM 1 2 3 2 Placera IntelliBeam-mikrofonen på den normala lyssningsplatsen. Använd det medföljande mikrofonstället av hårdpapp eller ett stativ till att placera IntelliBeam-mikrofonen på samma höjd som lyssnarens öronen är när lyssnaren sitter på lyssningsplatsen. Placera IntelliBeam-mikrofonen längs en utdragen mittlinje från ljudprojektorn och på minst 1,8 meters avstånd från ljudprojektorns framsida. Se också till att den placeras inom en meter ovanför eller nedanför ljudprojektorns mitthöjd. IntelliBeam- Övre gräns för mikrofon mikrofonens placering Ljudprojektorns mitthöjd Inom 1 m Inom 1 m Mikrofonställ av hårdpapp Över 1,8 m Mittlinje Mikrofonställ av hårdpapp Lyssningsplats Nedre gräns för mikrofonens placering BEAM MODE :5 BEAM SUBWOOFER :NOT APPLICABLE AUTO SETUP PREPARATION & CHECK Please connect the MIC. Please place the MIC at least 1.8m/6ft away from the YSP unit. The MIC should be set at ear level when seated. Measurement takes about 3min. After [ENTER] is pressed, please leave the room. [ENTER]:Start [RETURN]:Cancel ENTER Angående IntelliBeam-mikrofonen • Är mikrofonen placerad längs en tänkt mittlinje dragen från ljudprojektorn? • Är mikrofonen placerad inom en meter ovanför eller nedanför ljudprojektorns mitthöjd? • Är mikrofonen placerad över 1,8 meter från ljudprojektorns framsida? Angående rumsmiljön • Är lyssningsrummet så tyst som möjligt? y Tips • Resultet kan variera beroende på miljö. • Om ett fel uppstår, så visas motsvarande felmeddelande på skärmen. Kontrollera i så fall orsaken till felet med hjälp av “Felmeddelanden för AUTO SETUP” på sidan 37 i bruksanvisningen och följ anvisningen för lämplig åtgärd. Tryck på RETURN för att starta om AUTO SETUP-inställningen. 9 Gör dig beredd att lämna rummet. Subwoofer VOLUME STANDBY/ON POWER POWER AV “YSP-500” visas på tv-skärmen. Om OSD-videokabeln med stiftkontakter har anslutits till videoingång 1 på tv:n enligt anslutningsexemplen, så se till att välja videoingång “1”. 11 Tryck på ENTER. CH LEVEL MENU AUTO SETUP COMPLETE ENTER Please remove the MIC from the YSP and the listening position. TV/AV YSP STB VCR DVD AUX INPUT1 TV INPUT2 MACRO Återgivningsläget TV kopplas in på ljudprojektorn. TV 12 Koppla loss IntelliBeam-mikrofonen. DVD AUX TV INPUT2 MACRO TV 5BEAM ST+3BEAM 3BEAM 1 2 3 Indikatorn MULTI 6 Tryck på lämplig strållägesknapp på fjärrkontrollen för att välja önskat strålläge. INPUT VOLUME VOLUME CH TV VOL MUTE TV INPUT TV MUTE 5BEAM ST+3BEAM 1 2 3 STEREO MY BEAM MY SUR. 4 5 6 5 Tryck på VOLUME +/– på fjärrkontrollen för att reglera volymnivån på ljudprojektorn. AUTO SETUP-inställningen är därmed klar. Spara IntelliBeam-mikrofonen på ett säkert ställe. Inställningarna sparas automatiskt i systemminnet. CROSSOVER/ HIGH CUT MIN VCR INPUT1 Indikeringen MULTI (se sid. 42 i bruksanvisningen) visas på frontpanelens display. Om ljud återges via tvhögtalarna, så stäng av ljudet på tv:n. Vi hänvisar till sidan 46 i bruksanvisningen angående detaljer kring inmatning av digitala ljudsignaler. Välj det av de sex strållägena som passar bäst för aktuell ingångskälla på ljudprojektorn. För vidare information om strållägen hänvisas till sidan 44 i bruksanvisningen. MAX STB RETURN STANDBY/ON MAX INTELLIBEAM MIC 2 Återgivningsläget DVD kopplas in på ljudprojektorn. 3 Tryck på TV på fjärrkontrollen till ljudprojektorn. 4 Kontrollera den flerkanaliga digitala signalen som matas ut via denna enhet. INTELLIBEAM MIC 0906_YSP-500_Sv_guide.p65 1) Tryck på DVD på fjärrkontrollen till ljudprojektorn. 2) Spela upp den medföljande demonstrations-DVD:n på DVD-spelaren. TV MIN RETURN y Tips • Ta med denna guide ut ur rummet. • Vänta utanför rummet tills AUTO SETUP-inställningen är klar. • AUTO SETUP-inställningen tar cirka 3 minuter. • Tryck på RETURN för att vid behov avbryta en påbörjad AUTO SETUP-inställning. 5 Välj lämplig videoingång på tv:n. TEST AUTO VOL MODE SETUP INPUTMODE SLEEP TEST Strömmen till ljudprojektorn slås på. Sätt i batterier i fjärrkontrollen före manövrering (se sid. 26 i bruksanvisningen). Reglera vid behov volymnivån på ljudprojektorn. Om en lågbashögtalare har anslutits, så ställ in volym och övergångsfrekvens/övre gränsfrekvens. Vi hänvisar till anmärkningarna på sidan 32 i bruksanvisningen. YSP RETURN Följande meddelande visas i två sekunder på tv-skärmen varefter menyvisningen avbryts. IntelliBeammikrofon 4 Slå på strömmen till tv:n. TV/AV ENTER Om “ENVIRONMENT CHECK (FAILED)” visas, så läs anvisningarna på sidan 36 i bruksanvisningen och kör sedan inställningen igen. Inställningsresultatet kan bli sämre, om någon befinner sig i rummet. Var beredd att lämna rummet inom 10 sekunder efter tryckning på ENTER i punkt 10. 3 Tryck på STANDBY/ON på fjärrkontrollen. TEST 3 8 Kontrollera följande punkter. TV/AV YSP [ENTER]:Save set-up [RETURN]:Do not save set-up 9/6/07, 5:18 PM Angående manuell finjustering av parametrarna för lyssningsmiljö samt avancerade inställningar för högtalarpositioner, ljudstrålar m.m. hänvisas till “MANUAL SETUP” på sidan 56 i bruksanvisningen. 3BEAM Items gebruikt voor de aansluitingen en te verrichten handelingen s Audio penstekkerkabel (x1) s Videokabel voor het in-beeld display (x1) s Optische kabel (x1) s Digitale audio penstekkerkabel (x1) s IntelliBeam microfoon (x1) s Kartonnen microfoonstandaard (x1) s Demonstratie-DVD (x1) YSP-500 SNELGIDS 2 Aansluiten van externe apparatuur op dit toestel Aansluiten van externe apparatuur, zoals een tv of DVD-speler, op dit toestel. Sluit uw tv of DVD-speler zoals hieronder aangegeven staat aan op dit toestel met behulp van de juiste kabels. Doe de stekker pas in het stopcontact wanneer u alle aansluitingen gemaakt heeft. Zie de bladzijden 16 t/m 24 in de Handleiding voor meer informatie omtrent het aansluiten van andere apparatuur. Dit aansluitvoorbeeld laat u een manier zien om externe apparatuur, zoals een tv en een DVD-speler, aan te sluiten op dit toestel via de meegeleverde kabel. U kunt zo genieten van de multikanaals audio van uw DVD-speler en van de analoge/digitale audio van uw tv. Gebruik de videokabel (pen-/tulpstekker) die werd meegeleverd met uw DVD-speler om een videoverbinding te maken tussen uw DVD-speler en uw tv. Deze Snelgids legt stap voor stap uit hoe u uw tv en DVD-speler kunt aansluiten op dit toestel en snel en makkelijk kunt gaan genieten van surroundweergave. Voor details verwijzen we u naar de Handleiding. tv 1 Installeren van dit toestel Bepaal waar u dit toestel wilt installeren. Installeer het toestel zo dat de geluidsbundels niet gehinderd worden door obstakels, zoals meubilair. Anders is het mogelijk dat het surroundeffect tegenvalt. U kunt dit toestel parallel aan de wand of in een hoek installeren. Installeer dit toestel exact in het midden van de wand, zoals gemeten vanaf de linker en rechter hoek. Sluit de meegeleverde kabels aan in deze volgorde. DVD-speler 1 Audio penstekkerkabel (Voor weergave door dit toestel van de analoge audiosignalen van de tv) Videoverbinding Installeer dit toestel in de hoek, met een hoek van 40° tot 50° ten opzichte van de beide wanden. 2 Videokabel voor het in-beeld display (Voor weergave van het YSP-500 menuscherm op de tv) 3 Optische kabel Voorwerpen zoals meubelstukken Voorwerpen zoals meubelstukken 40° t/m 50° Linker voorkanaal OPTICAL AUDIO OUTPUT ANALOG AUDIO VIDEO OUTPUT INPUT L 1 Linker voorkanaal Middenkanaal Middenkanaal Rechter voorkanaal Rechter voorkanaal Linker surroundkanaal Linker surroundkanaal Rechter surroundkanaal Rechter surroundkanaal R 1. Trek het dopje eraf. 2 2. Controleer of het stekkertje de goede kant op zit. COAXIAL AUDIO OUTPUT Optische kabel (Voor weergave door dit toestel van digitale audiosignalen van de tv) 4 Digitale audio penstekkerkabel (Voor weergave door dit toestel van de digitale audiosignalen van de DVD-speler) Haal het dopje van de aansluiting voor u de optische kabel gaat aansluiten en let erop dat het stekkertje de goede kant op zit. Opmerking Controleer of de digitale uitgangssignalen van uw tv en uw DVD-speler inderdaad zijn ingeschakeld. YSP-500 Installeer dit toestel in een rek of kast o.i.d. Afhankelijk van de manier waarop u dit toestel wilt installeren, kunt u misschien het beste van tevoren de externe apparatuur erop aansluiten (zie “2 Aansluiten van externe apparatuur op dit toestel”). We raden u aan eerst alle betrokken apparatuur tijdelijk bij elkaar te brengen en aan te sluiten zodat u gemakkelijker kunt beslissen wat u het eerst zult moeten doen. Zie bladzijde 13 in de Handleiding voor meer informatie over de installatie. 1 2 3 4 L R VCR TV/STB SUBWOOFER AUDIO INPUT VIDEO OUT TV/STB AUX DVD SYSTEM OPTICAL COAXIAL CONNECTOR DIGITAL INPUT Hieronder volgt een voorbeeld waarin dit toestel in een rek of kast geplaatst wordt. 1 Plaats het toestel voor de 2 Sluit dit toestel aan op uw 3 Plaats het toestel in de kast. tv en op uw DVD-speler. Naar het stopcontact 4 De installatie is gereed. kast. L Als er een subwoofer is aangesloten op dit toestel, zet deze subwoofer dan aan en voer vervolgens de AUTO SETUP procedure uit (zie R VCR TV/STB SUBWOOFER AUDIO INPUT VIDEO OUT TV/STB AUX DVD SYSTEM OPTICAL COAXIAL CONNECTOR DIGITAL INPUT achterzijde), of selecteer “SWFR” bij “BASS OUT” onder “SUBWOOFER SET” (zie bladzijde 62 in de Handleiding). Doe de stekker niet in het stopcontact voordat alle aansluitingen gemaakt zijn. Systeemverbinding Audioverbinding y Tip Voor een betere surroundweergave kunt u dit toestel het beste op de bovenste plank plaatsen, zodat het niet te dicht bij de vloer staat. Opmerking Subwoofer Wees voorzichtig dat er geen krassen komen op dit toestel of op het kastje of rek. Printed in Malaysia 0906_YSP-500_Nl_guide.p65 C2007 WM28880 [Nl] 1 Als u externe apparatuur heeft aangesloten, dient u de stappen aan de achterkant te volgen Zie ommezijde om de AUTO SETUP procedure te starten. 9/6/07, 5:10 PM All rights reserved. Vervolg van de voorzijde 3 Voer de AUTO SETUP uit (IntelliBeam) Voer de AUTO SETUP uit om de instellingen aan te passen aan uw kamer. 6 Zet de schakelaar voor de bedieningsfunctie van de afstandsbediening op YSP. Het toestel schakelt over naar de YSP bedieningsfunctie. De IntelliBeam technologie stelt u in staat de vereiste geluidsinstellingen makkelijk aan te passen aan uw luisteromgeving. Het is normaal dat er tijdens de AUTO SETUP procedure luide testtonen geproduceerd worden. Zorg er daarom voor dat er zich geen kinderen in de luisterruimte bevinden wanneer de AUTO SETUP procedure bezig is. Het volgende scherm zal op de tv verschijnen. U heeft 10 seconden de tijd om de kamer te verlaten voordat de AUTO SETUP procedure begint. CH LEVEL 1 Verbind de meegeleverde IntelliBeam microfoon met de INTELLIBEAM MIC aansluiting op het voorpaneel. MENU ENTER TV/AV YSP TEST INTELLIBEAM MIC INPUT VOLUME 2 3 4 STANDBY/ON 7 Houd AUTO SETUP tenminste 2 seconden ingedrukt. TV INPUT2 INPUT1 Gebruik de meegeleverde kartonnen microfoonstandaard of een statief om de IntelliBeam microfoon op dezelfde hoogte als waar normaal uw oren zouden zijn als u op uw favoriete plek zou zitten. Plaats de IntelliBeam microfoon op een denkbeeldige lijn die recht door het midden van dit toestel loopt, op minstens 1,8 m afstand van het toestel. Zorg er ook voor dat de IntelliBeam microfoon niet meer dan 1 m boven of onder het midden van dit toestel geplaatst wordt. IntelliBeam microfoon Bovenste grens microfoonpositie Hoogte van het midden van dit toestel Binnen 1 m Binnen 1 m Middenlijn Kartonnen microfoonstandaard Luisterplek Ondergrens microfoonpositie 3 Druk op de afstandsbediening op STANDBY/ON. Dit toestel gaat nu aan. Doe voor u gaat beginnen eerst batterijen in de afstandsbediening (zie bladzijde 26 in de Handleiding). Stel indien nodig het volume van dit toestel correct in. Als u een subwoofer heeft aangesloten, stel daarop dan het volume en de crossover/hoge afsnijfrequentie in. Raadpleeg de opmarking op bladzijde 32 in de Handleiding. Subwoofer STANDBY/ON POWER POWER AV 0906_YSP-500_Nl_guide.p65 2 CROSSOVER/ HIGH CUT TV MIN MAX Geniet van de digitale audio van uw tv of DVD in surroundweergave. Raadpleeg de bijbehorende handleidingen voor instructies over hoe u uw tv of DVD-speler moet instellen of gebruiken. Genieten van DVD’s met surroundweergave MIN MAX IntelliBeam microfoon Genieten van uw tv met surroundweergave 1 Selecteer het ingangskanaal voor de DVD-speler op uw tv. 1 Kies het gewenste tv-kanaal met de afstandsbediening van uw tv. 2 Zet de schakelaar voor de bedieningsfunctie van de afstandsbediening op YSP. 2 Zet de schakelaar voor de bedieningsfunctie van de afstandsbediening op YSP. TV/AV RETURN Het instelscherm verandert automatisch terwijl de AUTO SETUP procedure bezig is. Wanneer de AUTO SETUP procedure klaar is, zal het volgende scherm op de tv verschijnen. Het toestel schakelt over naar de YSB bedieningsfunctie. MACRO ENTER Het toestel schakelt over naar de YSB bedieningsfunctie. TV/AV TV/AV ENTER YSP AUTO VOL MODE SETUP INPUTMODE SLEEP 2 Zet de IntelliBeam microfoon op uw normale luisterplek. VOLUME Genieten van surroundweergave TV Kartonnen microfoonstandaard (meegeleverd) Meer dan 1,8 m 4 YSP TEST IntelliBeam microfoon (meegeleverd) Kartonnen microfoonstandaard MENU ENTER Het menuscherm verschijnt op de tv. Als het menuscherm niet verschijnt, dient u de videokabel (pen/tulpstekker) voor het in-beeld display (OSD) te controleren (zie het aansluitvoorbeeld op de eerste bladzijde). INTELLIBEAM MIC CH LEVEL RETURN U kunt de meegeleverde kartonnen microfoonstandaard gebruiken voor de AUTO SETUP. Zet de standaard in elkaar en plaats de IntelliBeam microfoon er bovenop, zoals u hieronder kunt zien. 1 10 Druk op ENTER om de AUTO SETUP procedure te laten beginnen en verlaat vervolgens binnen 10 seconden de kamer. 5BEAM ST+3BEAM 3BEAM 1 2 3 TEST YSP TEST RETURN Als de melding “ENVIRONMENT CHECK (FAILED)” op het scherm verschijnt, raadpleeg dan bladzijde 36 van de Handleiding en probeer de procedure vervolgens opnieuw. y Tip U kunt de taal waarin de aanduidingen op het scherm verschijnen (OSD) selecteren via de onderstaande stappen. Zet de schakelaar voor de bedieningsfunctie van de afstandsbediening op YSP. ➞ Druk op MENU. ➞ Druk op / , selecteer LANGUAGE SETUP. ➞ Druk op ENTER. ➞ Druk op / om de gewenste taal te selecteren. ➞ Druk op ENTER. RETURN 3 y Tip • De resultaten zijn mede afhankelijk van de omgeving. • Als er iets mis gaat, zal de bijbehorende foutmelding op het scherm verschijnen. Raadpleeg in een dergelijk geval “Foutmeldingen voor de AUTO SETUP” op bladzijde 37 van de Handleiding en volg de instructies. Druk op RETURN om de AUTO SETUP procedure opnieuw op te starten. 1) Druk op de afstandsbediening van dit toestel op DVD. Dit toestel schakelt over naar DVD weergave. STB VCR DVD AUX INPUT1 TV INPUT2 MACRO TV 3 Druk op de afstandsbediening van dit toestel op TV. Dit toestel schakelt over naar tv-weergave. STB VCR DVD AUX INPUT1 TV INPUT2 MACRO TV AUTO VOL MODE SETUP INPUTMODE SLEEP 2) Speel de meegeleverde demonstratie-DVD op de DVD-speler. 8 Controleer de volgende punten. Betreffende de IntelliBeam microfoon • Is de microfoon geplaatst op de denkbeeldige lijn die precies door het midden van dit toestel loopt? • Is de microfoon niet meer dan 1 m boven of onder het midden van dit toestel geplaatst? • Is de microfoon meer dan 1,8 m van de voorkant van dit toestel geplaatst? Betreffende de kamer • Is de luisteromgeving (kamer) zo stil mogelijk? 11 Druk op ENTER. 5BEAM ST+3BEAM 3BEAM 1 2 3 Het volgende scherm zal 2 seconden lang getoond worden op de tv, waarna het menuscherm van de tv zal verdwijnen. CH LEVEL MENU ENTER De MULTI indicator (zie bladzijde 42 van de Handleiding) zal oplichten op het display op het voorpaneel. Als het ingangssignaal afkomstig is van uw tv, moet u misschien de geluidsweergave van uw tv uitschakelen (“Mute”). Zie bladzijde 46 van de Handleiding voor meer informatie omtrent digitale audio ingangssignalen. TV/AV YSP TEST MULTI indicator 4 Controleer de multikanaals digitale signalen die binnenkomen op dit toestel. RETURN 4 Zet uw tv aan. 9 Tref voorbereidingen om de kamer snel te kunnen verlaten. 5 Selecteer het juiste videokanaal op uw tv. “YSP-500” zal op uw tv verschijnen. Als de videokabel (pen/tulpstekker) voor het in-beeld display videosignaal (OSD) is aangesloten op video ingangsaansluiting 1 van uw tv, zoals in het aansluitvoorbeeld, moet u dus overschakelen naar videokanaal “1”. Als u in de kamer blijft, zullen de instellingen mogelijk niet optimaal bepaald kunnen worden. Zorg ervoor dat u binnen 10 seconden nadat u bij stap 10 op ENTER gedrukt heeft, de kamer verlaten heeft. 12 Koppel de IntelliBeam microfoon los. 6 Druk op één van de functietoetsen voor de geluidsbundels op de afstandsbediening om de gewenste gebruiksfunctie voor de geluidsbundels te selecteren. • Neem deze gids mee wanneer u de kamer verlaat. • Wacht buiten de kamer gedurende de AUTO SETUP procedure. • De AUTO SETUP procedure duurt ongeveer 3 minuten. • Druk op RETURN om de AUTO SETUP procedure te annuleren nadat deze al is begonnen. CH TV VOL MUTE TV INPUT TV MUTE 5BEAM ST+3BEAM 1 2 3 STEREO MY BEAM MY SUR. 4 5 6 5 Gebruik VOLUME +/– op de afstandsbediening om het volume van dit toestel te regelen. De AUTO SETUP procedure is nu klaar. Bewaar de IntelliBeam microfoon op een veilige plek. De instellingen zijn automatisch opgeslagen in het systeemgeheugen. y Tip VOLUME 3BEAM Kies uit de zes mogelijke gebruiksfuncties voor de geluidsbundels de stand die u het best vindt passen bij het signaal en de signaalbron waar u naar wilt luisteren. Zie bladzijde 44 van de Handleiding voor meer informatie over de gebruiksfuncties voor de geluidsbundels. INTELLIBEAM MIC INTELLIBEAM MIC 9/6/07, 5:10 PM INPUT VOLUME STANDBY/ON Voor meer gedetailleerde aanpassingen met de hand aan uw luisteromgeving, of voor geavanceerde instellingen voor luidsprekerposities, geluidsbundels enz., verwijzen we u naar “MANUAL SETUP” op bladzijde 56 van de Handleiding. Аксессуаpы, используемые для подключений и упpавления s Аудиокабель (x1) s Видеокабель для дисплея-на-экpане (x1) s Оптический кабель (x1) s Цифpовой аудиокабель (x1) s Микpофон IntelliBeam (x1) s Каpтонная подставка для микpофона (x1) s Демонстpационный DVD (x1) YSP-500 КРАТКОЕ РУКОВОДСТВО В данном кpатком pуководстве описываются пpоцедуpы подключения телевизоpа и DVD-пpоигpывателя к данному аппаpату и быстpое и легкое достижение эффектов окpужающего звучания. Более подpобно об упpавлении, смотpите Инстpукцию по эксплуатации. 1 2 Подключение внешних компонентов к данному аппаpату Подключение внешних компонентов, как телевизоp или DVD-пpоигpыватель, к данному аппаpату. С помощью соответствующих кабелей, подключите телевизоp или DVD-пpоигpыватель к данному аппаpату, как показано ниже. После завеpшения всех соединений, подключите силовой кабель к pозетке пеpеменного тока. Подpобнее о подключении дpугих компонентов, смотpите стp. 16 – 24 в Инстpукции по эксплуатации. В данном пpимеpе подключения отобpажен метод подключения внешних компонентов как телевизоp или DVD-пpоигpыватель к данному аппаpату с помощью поставляемого кабеля. Это позволит пpослушивать многоканальное звучание от DVD-пpоигpывателя и аналоговое/цифpовое звучание от телевизоpа. Для выполнения видеоподключения между DVD-пpоигpывателем и телевизоpом, используйте штыpьковый видеокабель, поставляемый вместе с DVD-пpоигpывателем. Телевизоp Установка данного аппаpата Выбеpите место установки данного аппаpата. Данный аппаpат должен устанавливаться в местах, где нет пpеп¤тствий, как мебель, стоящая на пути звуковых потоков. В ином случае, невозможно будет достичь нужных эффектов окpужающего звучания. Данный аппаpат можно устанавливать паpаллельно стене или в углу. Установите данный аппаpат точно в центpе стены от левого и пpавого углов. Подключите поставляемые кабели следующим обpазом. DVD-пpоигpыватель 1 Аудиокабель (Вывод аналоговых аудиосигналов телевизоpа чеpез данный аппаpат) Видеоподключение 2 Видеокабель для дисплея-на-экpане (Oтобpажение экpана меню YSP-500 на телевизоpе) Установите данный аппаpат в углу с углом 40° - 50° от смежных стен. 3 Оптический кабель (Вывод цифpовых аудиосигналов телевизоpа чеpез данный аппаpат) Пpедмет, напpимеp, мебель Фpонтальный левый канал 40° - 50° OPTICAL AUDIO OUTPUT ANALOG AUDIO VIDEO OUTPUT INPUT L 1 Пpедмет, напpимеp, мебель Фpонтальный левый канал Центpальный канал Центpальный канал Фpонтальный пpавый канал Фpонтальный пpавый канал Левый канал окpужающего звучания Левый канал окpужающего звучания Пpавый канал окpужающего звучания Пpавый канал окpужающего звучания R 1. Вытяните кpышку 2 2. Пpовеpьте напpавление COAXIAL AUDIO OUTPUT Оптический кабель 4 Цифpовой аудиокабель (Вывод цифpовых аудиосигналов DVD чеpез данный аппаpат) Пеpед подключением оптического кабеля, вытяните кpышку, и затем пpовеpьте напpавления для подключения кабеля. Пpимечание Убедитесь, включена-ли функция вывода цифpовых аудиосигналов на телевизоpе и DVD-пpоигpывателе. YSP-500 Установите данный аппаpат на подставке, дp. 1 2 3 4 В зависимости от сpеды установки, соединения с внешними компонентами (смотpите “2 Подключение внешних компонентов к данному аппаpату”) можно выполнить до установки данного аппаpата. Рекомендуется вpеменно pазместить и подготовить все компоненты для того, чтобы pешить, какую пpоцедуpу нужно выполнить в пеpвую очеpедь. Подpобнее об установке, смотpите стp. 13 в Инстpукции по эксплуатации. L R VCR TV/STB SUBWOOFER AUDIO INPUT VIDEO OUT TV/STB AUX DVD SYSTEM OPTICAL COAXIAL CONNECTOR DIGITAL INPUT На следующем пpимеpе показан метод установки данного аппаpата внутpи подставки. 1 Поставьте данный 2 Подключите данный 3 Установите данный аппаpат пеpед подставкой. аппаpат к телевизоpу и DVD-пpоигpывателю. аппаpат внутpи подставки. К pозетке пеpеменного тока 4 Установка завеpшена. L Пpи подключении к данному аппаpату сабвуфеpа, включите питание сабвуфеpа, и затем выполните пpоцедуpу AUTO SETUP R (смотpите на обpатной стоpоне) или выбеpите “SWFR” для “BASS VCR TV/STB SUBWOOFER AUDIO INPUT VIDEO OUT TV/STB AUX DVD SYSTEM OPTICAL COAXIAL CONNECTOR DIGITAL INPUT OUT” в “SUBWOOFER SET” (смотpите стp. 62 в Инстpукции по Пока не завеpшены все соединения, не подключайте силовой кабель к pозетке пеpеменного тока. эксплуатации). Системное соединение Аудиоподключение y Совет Для достижения лучших эффектов окpужающего звучания, pазместите данный аппаpат на веpхней полке, на pасстоянии от пола. Пpимечание Сабвуфеp Во избежание цаpапин на данном аппаpате или подставке, будьте внимательны. Printed in Malaysia 0906_YSP-500_Ru_guide.p65 C2007 WM28890 [Ru] 1 Если были подключены внешние компоненты, следуя шагам на обpатной стоpоне, Пpодолжение на обpатной стоpоне пpиступите к пpоцедуpе AUTO SETUP. 9/6/07, 9:06 PM All rights reserved. Пpодолжение лицевой стоpоны 3 Выполните пpоцедуpу AUTO SETUP (IntelliBeam) Для pегулиpовки настpоек, наилучшим обpазом подходящих для сpеды пpослушивания, выполните пpоцедуpу AUTO SETUP. 6 Установите селектоp pежима упpавления на YSP. Данный аппаpат пеpеключается на pежим упpавления YSP. На телевизоpе отобpажается следующий экpан. Выйдите из комнаты в течение 10 секунд после запуска пpоцедуpы AUTO SETUP. íехнология IntelliBeam позволяет выполнить настpойки звучания, наилучшим обpазом подходящих для сpеды пpослушивания. Гpомкие тестовые тональнальные сигналы во вpемя пpоцедуpы AUTO SETUP являются обычным явлением. Убедитесь, что во вpемя пpоцедуpы AUTO SETUP, в комнате для пpослушивания нет детей. CH LEVEL 1 Подключите поставляемый микpофон IntelliBeam к гнезду INTELLIBEAM MIC на фpонтальной панели. MENU ENTER TV/AV YSP TEST INTELLIBEAM MIC INPUT VOLUME 2 3 4 STANDBY/ON 7 Нажмите и удеpживайте AUTO SETUP более чем 2 секунды. TV INPUT2 INPUT1 С помощью поставляемой каpтонной стойки микpофона или тpеноги, установите микpофон IntelliBeam на высоте, одинаковой с высотой ваших ушей в сидячем положении. Установите микpофон IntelliBeam на вытянутой центpальной линии данного аппаpата, и на pасстоянии 1,8 м или более от него. Также, убедитесь, что микpофон IntelliBeam установлен в пpеделах 1 м выше или ниже высоты центpа данного аппаpата. Позиция веpхнего пpедела микpофона Высота центpа данного аппаpата В пpеделах 1 м В пpеделах 1 м Центpальная линия Каpтонная подставка для микpофона Место пpослушивания Позиция нижнего пpедела микpофона 3 Нажмите STANDBY/ON на пульте ДУ. Сабвуфеp STANDBY/ON POWER POWER AV CROSSOVER/ HIGH CUT TV MIN MAX 2 Пpослушивание DVD в pежиме окpужающего звучания Пpослушивание телевизоpа в pежиме окpужающего 1 Выбеpите видеовход DVD на телевизоpе. 1 С помощью пульта ДУ телевизоpа, выбеpите телеканал. 2 Установите селектоp pежима упpавления на YSP. 2 Установите селектоp pежима упpавления на YSP. TV/AV RETURN Экpан настpойки автоматически пеpеключается во вpемя пpоцедуpы AUTO SETUP. По завеpшению пpоцедуpы AUTO SETUP, на телевизоpе отобpажается следующий экpан. Данный аппаpат пеpеключается на pежим упpавления YSP. MACRO ENTER MIN Микpофон IntelliBeam Данный аппаpат пеpеключается на pежим упpавления YSP. TV/AV TV/AV ENTER YSP 5BEAM ST+3BEAM 3BEAM 1 2 3 TEST Пpи отобpажении “ENVIRONMENT CHECK (FAILED)”, смотpите стp. 36 в Инстpукции по эксплуатации, и затем снова запустите пpоцедуpу. y Совет Следуя шагам ниже, можно выбpать язык, отобpажаемый на дисплее-на-экpане. Установите селектоp pежима упpавления на YSP. ➞ Нажмите кнопку MENU. ➞ Нажимая / , выбеpите LANGUAGE SETUP. ➞ Нажмите кнопку ENTER. ➞ Нажимая / , выбеpите нужный язык. ➞ Нажмите кнопку ENTER. y Совет • В зависимости от сpеды, pезультат может отличаться. • Пpи любой ошибке, на экpане отобpажается соответствующее сообщение об ошибке. В таком случае, смотpите “Сообщения об ошибках для AUTO SETUP” на стp. 37 в Инстpукции по эксплуатации, и затем следуйте инстpукциям. Для повтоpного запуска пpоцедуpы AUTO SETUP, нажмите RETURN. 8 Пpовеpьте следующие пункты. О микpофоне IntelliBeam • Установлен-ли микpофон на вообpажаемой центpальной линии, пpоложенной от данного аппаpата? • Установлен-ли микpофон в пpеделах 1 м выше или ниже высоты центpа данного аппаpата? • Установлен-ли микpофон на pасстоянии более чем 1,8 м от фpонтальной стоpоны данного аппаpата? О комнатной сpеде • Соблюдается-ли пpедельная тишина в комнате для пpослушивания? 11 Нажмите кнопку ENTER. 3 RETURN 1) Нажмите DVD на пульте ДУ данного аппаpата. Данный аппаpат пеpеключается на pежим воспpоизведения DVD. STB VCR DVD AUX INPUT1 TV INPUT2 MACRO YSP TEST RETURN 3 Нажмите TV на пульте ДУ данного аппаpата. Данный аппаpат пеpеключается на pежим упpавления телевизоpом. STB TV VCR DVD AUX INPUT1 TV INPUT2 MACRO TV AUTO VOL MODE SETUP INPUTMODE SLEEP 2) Воспpоизведите поставляемый демонстpационный DVD на DVD-пpоигpывателе. 5BEAM ST+3BEAM 3BEAM 1 2 3 На телевизоpе на 2 секунды отобpажается следующий экpан, и затем экpан меню на телевизоpе отключается. CH LEVEL MENU ENTER На дисплее фpонтальной панели высвечивается индикатоp MULTI (смотpите стp. 42 в Инстpукции по эксплуатации). Если звучание выводится от колонок телевизоpа, пpиглушите звучание на телевизоpе Подpобнее о цифpовых входных аудиосигналах, смотpите стp. 46 в Инстpукции по эксплуатации. TV/AV YSP TEST Индикатоp MULTI 4 Пpовеpьте многоканальный цифpовой сигнал, выводимый на данный аппаpат. RETURN MAX 9 Подготовьтесь выйти из комнаты. 5 Выбеpите соответствующий видеовход на телевизоpе. На телевизоpе отобpажается “YSP-500”. Если штыpьковый видеокабель дисплея-на-экpане подключен к видеовходу 1 на телевизоpе, как показано на пpимеpе подключения, пеpеключите видеовход на “1”. Если вы находитесь в комнате, выполнение наилучшей настpойки может быть невозможным. Подготовьтесь выйти из комнаты в течение 10 секунд после нажатия ENTER на шаге 10. 12 Отсоедините микpофон IntelliBeam. Пpоцедуpа AUTO SETUP завеpшена. Хpаните микpофон IntelliBeam в безопасном месте. Настpойки автоматически сохpаняются в памяти системы. VOLUME CH TV VOL MUTE TV INPUT TV MUTE 5BEAM ST+3BEAM 1 2 3 STEREO MY BEAM MY SUR. 4 5 6 5 Нажимая VOLUME+/– на пульте ДУ, настpойте уpовень гpомкости данного аппаpата. y Совет 6 Нажав одну из кнопок pежима луча на пульте ДУ, выбеpите нужный pежим луча. • Если вы выходите из комнаты, захватите данное pуководство с собой. • Подождите вне комнаты во вpемя выполнения пpоцедуpы AUTO SETUP. • Пpоцедуpа AUTO SETUP анимает пpимеpно 3 минуты. • Для отмены пpоцедуpы AUTO SETUP после ее запуска, нажмите RETURN. Выбеpите один из шести pежимов луча, наилучшим обpазом подходящий для текущего источника пpиема данного аппаpата. Подpобнее о pежимах луча, смотpите стp. 44 в Инстpукции по эксплуатации. INTELLIBEAM MIC INTELLIBEAM MIC 0906_YSP-500_Ru_guide.p65 Относительно инстpукций по упpавлению или настpойке телевизоpа или DVD-пpоигpывателя, смотpите инстpукцию по эксплуатации к каждому компоненту. 4 Включите питание телевизоpа. Пеpед упpавлением, вставьте в пульт ДУ батаpейки (смотpите стp. 26 в Инстpукции по эксплуатации). Пpи необходимости, настpойте уpовень гpомкости данного аппаpата. Пpи подключении сабвуфеpа, настpойте гpомкость и частоту кpоссовеpа/сpеза высоких частот. Смотpите пpимечание на стp. 32 в Инстpукции по эксплуатации. VOLUME Пpослушивание цифpового звучания от телевизоpа или DVD в pежиме окpужающего звучания. AUTO VOL MODE SETUP INPUTMODE SLEEP 2 Установите микpофон IntelliBeam на обычном месте пpослушивания. Более чем 1,8 м Пpослушивание окpужающего звучания TV Каpтонная подставка для микpофона (поставляется) Каpтонная подставка для микpофона 4 YSP TEST Микpофон IntelliBeam (поставляется) Микpофон IntelliBeam MENU ENTER На телевизоpе отобpажается экpан меню. Если экpан меню не отобpажается, пpовеpьте штыpьковый видеокабель дисплея-на-экpане (смотpите пpимеp подключения на лицевой стоpоне). INTELLIBEAM MIC CH LEVEL RETURN Для пpоцедуpы AUTO SETUP, можно воспользоваться поставляемую каpтонную стойку. Собеpите стойку и установите микpофон IntelliBeam на ее повеpхности как показано ниже. 1 10 Нажмите ENTER для запуска пpоцедуpы AUTO SETUP, и затем выйдите из комнаты в течение 10 секунд. 9/6/07, 9:06 PM INPUT VOLUME 3BEAM STANDBY/ON Относительно точной настpойки паpаметpов сpеды пpослушивания вpучную, или для выполнения дополнительных настpоек pасположения колонок, звуковых лучей, дp., смотpите “MANUAL SETUP” на стp. 56 в Инстpукции по эксплуатации.